1639 CD Specification

SPECIFICATION
Alterations and Additions
to an existing dwelling on a site located at
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern

JOB REFERENCE: 201639
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
AUGUST 2017
Venn Architects Pty Ltd

Level One,
178 Ferrars Street South Melbourne, Vic. 3205
Telephone: 03 9682 4222

3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION B DEMOLITION
SECTION C EXCAVATION & DRAINAGE
SECTION D CONCRETE
SECTION E STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION F MASONRY
SECTION G METALWORK
SECTION H CARPENTRY
SECTION I DELETED
SECTION J DOORS
SECTION K JOINERY
SECTION L ROOF & ROOF PLUMBING
SECTION M GLAZING
SECTION N HYDRAULIC
SECTION O DELETED
SECTION P ELECTRICAL
SECTION Q MECHANICAL
SECTION R EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL FINISHES
SECTION S DELETED
SECTION T DELETED
SECTION U PAINTING
SECTION V LANDSCAPING AND POOLS
SECTION W PRIME COSTS & PROVISIONAL SUMS
SECTION X CLEAN UP & COMPLETION
SECTION Y APPENDICES
Y01 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE
Y02 TITLE DOCUMENTS
Y03 LAND SURVEY
Y04 LEGAL POINT OF DISCHARGE
Y05 SOIL REPORT
Y06 ENERGY REPORT
Y07 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Y08 AIR CONDITIONING, HYDRONIC HEATING & VENTILATION SPECIFICATION
Y09 WINDOW COVERING SPECIFICATION
Y10 POOL SPECIFICATION
Y11 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION (DELETED)
Y12 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Y13 TOWN PLANNING PERMIT
Y14 INDICATIVE IMAGES
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section A
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A1.1. INTRODUCTION
This specification describes the requirements for the construction and completion of additions and
alterations to an existing residence located at 3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern 3144 in the City of
Stonnington. The Melways reference is 59 C10. This specification is one part of the Contract documents
which together with the drawings and the Contract Agreement will form the basis of a lump sum contract
between the Contractor and the Owner for the completion of the Works.
A1.2. SCOPE OF WORKS

The works to be carried out under the Contract generally comprise, but are not restricted to the following
items all as shown on the drawings and described in this specification:
 Bulk excavation to part of the site where new pool is located.

 Provisions of new concrete slab(s) footings and foundation systems.
 Provision of masonry veneer construction to Ground Floor with a combination of lightweight
Polystyrene Foam & timber battened First Floor, reinforced concrete floor slabs and timber
framed skillion roofing.
 Provision of all associated driveways, ramps, paving, external timber decking and
screening.
 Provision of in ground Pool & associated services & fencing.
 Excavation for the proposed works including footings, floor slabs, and associated site
works.
 Provision of incoming automation, security, light, power, internet and telephone services.
 Provision or upgrade of all services including electrical, H&C water, stormwater, and sewer.
 Provision of Air Conditioning & Hydronic Heating Systems..
A1.3. LOCATION & SITE

The site is located at 3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern 3144 in the City of Stonnington. The Melways
reference is 59 C10.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all work within the site area, including connection of all services
required for the residence, and for the protection and security of the entire site during construction of the
Works.
The site area is surrounded by adjoining residences to the north and south and a carpark to the east.
The Contractor will ensure there is adequate protection provided to all neighbouring
dwellings and any pertaining built structure. The contractor is to ensure there is no damage created by
the works to any council areas or assets to the west. Any alteration or use of councils assets must first
be approved by council as applied to council or relevant authority by the Contractor. The contractor is
to allow for reasonable time associated with these approvals.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-1 of 23

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A1.4. DEFINITIONS
The definitions and explanations of this section are neither complete or exclusive but are general for the
work to the extent that such definitions or explanations are not stated more explicitly in another part of
the contract documents. Words implying persons shall, where appropriate be construed as including
Corporations.
Agreement The Australian Building Industry Contract Simple Works in Victoria printed
in 2008 (“ABIC-SW 2008”) as issued by the Australian Institute of
Architects and the Master Builders Australia inc. in full compliance with
the Domestic Building Contract Act 1995.
Architect: Venn Architects Pty Ltd

Design, Level One
Documentation & 178 Ferrars Street
Contract South Melbourne, Vic 3205
Administration Telephone 03 9682 4222
Fax 03 9682 4233
E-mail gchallis@vennarchitects.com
Approved Approved by the Architect. However approval of drawings, samples,

prototypes, workmanship methods or any other matter whatsoever
pursuant to the Works shall not be deemed to waive any right of the
Owner or to diminish in any way the Contractor’s responsibility in respect
of the Contract.
Where used in conjunction with the Architect’s response to shop

drawings or other submissions, requests, applications, reports and
claims by the Contractor, approval will be held to the limitations of the
Architects responsibilities and duties.
AS The current edition of any standard, code or other document published

by Standards Australia
BCA The current edition of the Building Code of Australia / National

Construction Code together with the Victorian Supplement.
B.S British Standard or Code published by the British Standards Institute.
Builder The Contractor as herein defined
Contractor The party who shall sign the contract for the construction of the works
and who is named in the Agreement, including his successors and/or
permitted assignees.
Completed Completed to the satisfaction of the Architect.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
Contract The Contract between the Owner and the Contractor for the erection and
completion of the building as shown on accompanying drawings, details
and as described in this Specification.
The scope of the Works are further defined in The Australian Building
Industry Contract – Simple Works printed in 2008 (“ABIC SW-2008”) as
issued by the Australian Institute of Architects and the Master Builders
Australia inc.
All contract documents being in full compliance with the Domestic

Building Contract Act 1995 and the Building Act 1993
Contract documents All documents described in Clause A2.1 of this Specification.
Contract Price The fixed lump sum inclusive of GST as stated in Item 4 Schedule 1 in the
ABIC SW-2008 Agreement
Directions Directions, instructions and the like given by the Architect and in this
Specification, whether or not they include the expression " the Contractor
shall " or equivalent, shall be deemed to be given to and accepted by the
Contractor.
Documents The Contract documents as described in Clause A.2.1 of this

Specification.
Directed Directed by the Architect
Engineer Structural Keith Long

Keith Long & Associates Pty Ltd
7/2 Bromham Pl, Richmond VIC 31213205
Telephone: 9429 5286
Email: jonathon.long@keithlongandassociates.com.au
Indicated Indicated on the drawings or properly to be inferred from them.
Inclement weather The term shall mean rain or heat or other weather conditions sufficient to
prevent workmen to continue outside work and no allowance shall be
made from any indirect effects presumed to result from the conditions.
The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate protection against

damage etc. to any part of the works caused by "inclement weather".
Inspected Inspected by the Architect.
Named Supplier Materials and or products selected by the Architect for this project to be
and/or manufacturer included in the Works.
Owner Nikki Meltzer

3 Glendearg Grove
Malvern
VIC 3144
Particular Person The Party named in Schedule 6 &/or 7 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement
to complete part of the Works for which a prime cost and/ or provisional
sum has been included in the Contract Price.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
Prime Cost Sum A sum included in the contract for a foreseeable “off the shelf’ item, the
precise identity of which was not known or had not been decided at the
date of the contract. All Prime cost sums are included in Schedule 7 and
defined in Section K of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement.
Provide Provide and fix.
Provisional Sum A sum included in the contract for a foreseeable work item, which could
not be fully described at the date of the contract because some details
were unknown. All Provisional Sums are included in Schedule 6 and
defined in K 1.1 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement.
Rejected Rejected by the Architect. All such work or materials shall be replaced by
the Contractor at his own expense.
Retention Cash Retention, retained at 10% of last claim up to a total of 5% of

contract amount as required by Clause C 1 and C 2 of the Agreement
and Clause A 3.3 of this Specification.
Required Required by the Architect or any authorities having jurisdiction over the
Works.
Site All of the land as described in Clause A1. 3 of this Specification. and as
shown on the Site Plan and further in Schedule 4 of the ABIC SW-2008
Agreement.
Security Cash Retention, retained at 10% of last claim up to a total of 5% of

contract amount as required by Clause C 1 and C 2 of the Agreement
and Clause A 3.3 of this Specification.
Clause C 3 relating to Bank Guarantees shall not apply to this Contract
Selected Selected from a range and/or selected from a stack of materials to

comply with the standard of a sample approved by the Architect.
Sub-contractor Any person or firm with whom the Contractor engages to complete any
part of the Works.
Works Everything necessary for the Contractor to complete his obligations under
the Contract.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A2. THE AGREEMENT
A2.1. NATURE OF CONTRACT

The Agreement shall be The Australian Building Industry Contract – Simple Works printed in 2008 (“ABIC
SW-2008”) as issued by the Australian Institute of Architects and the Master Builders Australia inc.
This building contract is in full compliance with the Domestic Building Contract Act 1995. The Contract
Price shown in item 4 of Schedule 1 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement shall be a fixed lump sum, not
subject to adjustment for rise and fall and shall include all applicable GST.
The Contract documents will comprise the following:
1. The ABIC SW-2008 Agreement.

2. The Specification including appendices (items 4-17 below).
3. The Contract Drawings including Architectural, Civil and Structural drawings.
4. Architectural Material Schedule.
5. Title Documents.
6. Land Survey.
7. Legal Point of Discharge.
8. Soil report.
9. Energy Rating Report.
10. Door Hardware Specification.
11. Mechanical Services Specification.
12. Window Furnishing Specification.
13. Pool Specification.
14. Electrical Specification. (Deleted)
15. Maintenance Schedule.
16. City of Stonnington Planning Approval.
17. Indicative Images.
A2.2. INSURANCE
In accordance with the terms of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement the Contractor shall arrange pay for
and maintain all insurance cover for the Works as specified in Section E and as further specified in
Items 12 to 16 of Schedule 1 in the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement.
Evidence that all insurance policies have been effected (including cover for the Works, Public Liability
and Workcare) shall be provided to the Architect by the Contractor prior to the Contractor taking
possession of the site. Any delays experienced by the Contractor in obtaining the insurance cover
required by the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement will not be considered as grounds for extension of time nor
will any progress claims be considered until the Contractor provides sufficient information to the
Architect to verify that all required insurance policies are in place and operative.
In addition to the insurance cover required by Section E of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement the Contractor
will obtain warranty insurance for the project in full compliance with the requirements of the Domestic
Building Contracts Act and include details of the Owner nominated as beneficiary. The policy number
together with details of the insurance company providing the warranty insurance shall be furnished to
the Building Surveyor and the Architect prior to the issue of the building permit and prior to the
Contractor being granted possession of the site.
A2.3. THE CONTRACT SCHEDULES

Information to be included Schedules 1 to 8 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement are included as an
Appendix at the end of this specification. The completed schedules will form part of the Contract
Documents to be executed between the Contractor and the Owner.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A2.4. DIVISIONS OF THE SPECIFICATION

For the convenience of reference and to facilitate the letting of subcontracts, this Specification is divided
according to Trade Sections. Such divisions shall not obligate the Architect or Owner to establish the
limit of any subcontract between the Contractor and the subcontractors. Nor shall the Architect or the
Owner be held responsible for any omission caused by the Contractor in subcontracting any work
required by the Contract Documents resulting from the Contractor failing to supply all required
information to a particular subcontractor or supplier.
A2.5. CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY

In compliance with the requirements of the Domestic Buildings Contracts Act and Clause A3 of the ABIC
SW-2008 Agreement the Contractor warrants that, upon completion of the Works, the project will be fit
for purpose. Prior to entering into the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement the Contractor shall advise the Architect
of any aspect of the works which, in the opinion of the Contractor, may compromise this warranty.
Upon taking possession of the site and commencing the Works the Contractor verifies that the works as
documented will be constructed so that upon completion they will be fit for their intended use.
A3. DOCUMENTS
A3.1. INTENT OF DOCUMENTS

The Works are to be carried out in the spirit, true intent and meaning of the drawings and specification,
whether an item may or may not be particularly shown on the drawings or described in the specification,
provided the item is reasonably inferred there from drawings and specifications. Eg 1., The requirement
of non structural retaining to parts of the boundary fence condition because the site is being cut. Eg 2.
The requirement of cover plates between window sections drawn from wall to wall.
Detail drawings shall be read in conjunction with but take precedence over the 1:100 & 1:50 plans,
elevations and sections and with the specifications. It is the Contractors responsibility to program, plan
and co-ordinate works by, but not limited to, reviewing the contract drawings and documents and
building systems prior to the works taking place and in preparation for the staging and sequencing of
the works.
Should the Contractor find any discrepancy or omission in the drawings or between the drawings and
the specification, he should immediately refer the discrepancy or omission to the Architect who shall
decide which course shall be followed. It is expected that the Contractor will allow all reasonable
opportunity to identify discrepancies or omissions prior to works taking place.
Upon a reasonable request from the Contractor the Architect may supply additional details to assist the
Contractor in the completion of the work. When making requests for additional details the Contractor
shall allow sufficient time for the Architect to prepare the additional details and issue to site. Should the
Contractor consider the work included in any supplementary detail will entail additional cost, he must
notify the Architect in writing and obtain authority to proceed before putting the work in hand.
A3.2. DIMENSIONS
Figured dimensions shall be taken in preference to those scaled from the drawings. Dimensions shall
be taken to represent the sizes between structural not finished surfaces, except in cases where
dimensions are given to centre lines or in large scale drawing where the contrary intention is specifically
indicated. All dimensions shall be checked on site. Larger scale drawings shall be read in preference to
smaller scale drawings of the same work. Where cross references are given they are purely for
convenience and shall not have any significance whatever in the interpretation of the document.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A3.3. SECURITY - CASH RETENTION

Section C of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement requires the Contractor to provide security to the Owner. For
this project Clause C 2 shall apply and the security will be in the form a cash retention retained at 10% of
last claim up to a total of 5% of contract amount. Upon the issue of the Notice of Practical Completion by
the Architect 50% of retention shall be released to the Contractor. The remaining retention shall be
surrendered to the Contractor upon the issue of the Final Certificate at completion of the Contract.
Clause C 3 and Item 9 of Schedule 1 relating to unconditional guarantee will not apply to this Contract.
A3.4. SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS
A3.4.1. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS

JOB No. NUMBER TITLE DATE
201639 WD00-WD29 Venn Architects Pty Ltd AUG 2017
A3.4.2. STRUCTURAL & CIVIL ENGINEERS DRAWINGS

12-139 S1-S12 Keith Long & Associates Pty Ltd - Structural Drawings 11.08.17
12-139 C1A Keith Long & Associates Pty Ltd - Civil Drawings 11.08.17
A3.4.3. LAND SURVEYORS DRAWINGS

16106 - VICLAND SURVEYING (Surveyors) Pty Ltd VICLAND SURVEYING -
Plan, Feature and Level Survey

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A4. MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP
A4.1. STANDARDS
All materials and workmanship required for the Works shall be in accordance with the relevant standards
of the Standards Australia. Where Australian Standards and Codes do not exist, the appropriate British
Standard or code shall apply. Where in this Specification requirements are more stringent than, or
different from, the requirements defined in the relevant standard or code documents, this Specification
shall prevail.
Any reference to a standard or code in this specification shall imply the latest date, issue and/or revision
of the standard or code. Where the descriptions differ from or appear to contradict other references in
the specification to standards or codes such descriptions shall be taken as amendments to the section
within the standard to which they apply. During construction of the Works when and as requested by
the Architect, copies of any relevant standard referred to in this specification shall be made available by
the Contractor.
A4.2. MATERIALS
The Contractor shall supply all materials to construct and complete the works and organise such supply
as to maintain the rate of construction necessary to complete the works of the contract within the
contracted time. All materials shall be new and of the best quality throughout, suitable for their
respective purposes, subject to the approval and satisfaction of the Architect, and in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant Australian and/or British Standards and Codes. Any materials described in
one section of the Specification and referred to in another section shall be of equivalent quality.
Proprietary materials shall be delivered to the site in their original unopened containers and shall be
used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed recommendations. Keep copies of such
printed recommendations on site for reference by the Architect when so requested.
The Contractor is to allow for all necessary construction material requirements to ensure the installation
of all building components are fit for purpose as per the design intent and/or as inferred by the contract
documents. Especially in regard to the waterproofing, directing of drainage, sealant and durability of
construction and building components. Any material concerns regarding fit for purpose construction in
the Contractors opinion is to be brought to the Architects attention prior to construction and await the
Architects instruction. The Contractor takes all responsibility for the materials and their performance as
installed on site.
Where a material or a manufacturer or supplier is named in this Specification, the Contract price includes
for the specified item. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his tender for the named
material or manufacturer or supplier irrespective of the phrase "or other approved" which may follow.
The substitution of goods, materials, workmanship, construction methods or equipment shall only be
considered by the Architect when all of the following conditions are provided by the Contractor:
 A written request for the substitution.

 Full technical information on the proposed substitution
 Certification that the proposed substitution is equal or better in quality and effectiveness
than the item specified.
 A statement that the substitution does not involve any additional cost to the Contract Price
or any increase in the construction time for completion of the works.
 Details of any resultant cost saving available to the owner if the substitution is accepted.
Apart from the items scheduled to be retained and stored from demolition all other materials, plant,
equipment or other items salvaged from the Works shall become the property of the Contractor and shall
be removed by him from the site.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A4.3. WORKMANSHIP
Workmanship shall be of the best quality throughout, shall be subject to the Architect's approval and
shall comply with:
 the provisions and requirements of the Standards Australia Specifications and Codes, or
where no Australian Standard exists, with the provisions and requirements of British
Standards Institute specifications and codes.
 the requirements of the BCA, all relevant Acts, regulations and requirements of any
controlling authorities relevant to the site.
 all Federal and State Occupational Health & Safety Acts, regulations and requirements.
 Manufacturers Specifications and Tolerances.
 be plumb, level, square and clean
Any work rejected by the Architect is to be removed from the site and that part of the Works rebuilt at the
Contractor's risk and expense. The Contractor shall make good all losses and damages of any kind
arising out of, or during the construction of the Works.
The Contractor is to allow for all necessary construction workmanship requirements to ensure the
installation of all building components are fit for purpose as per the design intent and/or as inferred by
the contract documents. Especially in regard to the waterproofing, directing of drainage, sealant and
durability of construction and building components. Any workmanship concerns regarding fit for
purpose construction in the Contractors opinion is to be brought to the Architects attention prior to
construction and await the Architects instruction. The Contractor takes all responsibility for the
workmanship and the performance of the built structure as installed on site.
A4.4. SAMPLES
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval when requested samples as specified of all
materials and/or workmanship in respect of the Works. Upon obtaining approval from the Architect the
Contractor shall ensure all relevant sections of the Works conform to the approved samples which shall
be kept in good condition on the site until Practical Completion. The Architect shall be at liberty at any
time during the period of the Contract including the Defects Liability Period, to request for tests or
analysis or provision of samples of any materials brought onto the site for use in the Works or which
have been used in the Works either in a pure state or mixed with other materials.
Should the Architect consider any such work or materials are defective or not in full compliance with the
Contract documents the Contractor will be instructed to test the item in accordance with Clause G 7 & 8
of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement. Upon receipt of the Architect’s instruction the Contractor shall arrange
for any test or analysis required pursuant to this provision. In the event of the test or analysis shows the
material or work is defective it will immediately be made good by the Contractor to Architect’s approval
at no additional cost but if the results show full compliance with the Contract documents the cost of
testing and analysis shall be borne by the Owner and added to the Contract Price.
A4.5. MAKING GOOD

The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of making good to Architect’s approval any damage or
part of the Works considered defective either completed or in the process of construction. Upon receipt
of instructions to make good, the Contractor shall firstly obtain approval to the proposed rectification
method to be employed before commencing on the repair and/or replacement work.
A4.6. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

The building and all elements shall be so constructed that the finished components are all within the
required tolerances. The Contractor shall be aware of and comply fully with the requirements as defined
in the “Guide to Standards and Tolerances 2007” as published by the Victorian Building Authority.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
Cumulative tolerances shall be considered as well as tolerances on single members. Make all
allowances and co-ordinate tolerances for early trades to suit the requirements of the trades that follow.
Ensure that no excessive loads are placed on any part of the structure during construction. Tolerances
specified for horizontal or vertical building lines shall not allow encroachment beyond legal boundaries.
Tolerances shall include for deflections under finished load conditions.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings and or defined in the Guide, maximum tolerances shall be as
follows:
TOLERANCES
1 Variations from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of ± 3 mm in 3 M, but not more than 12 mm
vertical elements progressively.
2 For exposed corners & brick continuous lines ± 3 mm in 6 M, but not more than 12 mm
progressively.
3 Variations from the level, or from the grades ± 3 mm in 6 M, but not more than 12 mm
indicated on drawings progressively.
4 Deviation from line in plan ± 6 mm in 6 M but not more than 12 mm
progressively.
5 Variation in the size and location of wall and floor ± 10 mm
openings
6 Variation in the size of items built into wall openings +0-10 mm

and the size of joinery, or built in units
7 Variations in cross sectional dimensions of concrete -0+10 mm.

or masonry construction including thicknesses of
walls and slabs
8 Finished face of footings where not cast integrally
with floor slab.
Position- external face ± 10 mm in 6 M but not more than 10 mm
progressively
Thickness- ie. affecting internal face position -0 + 50 mm
Steps ± 10 mm
A4.7. COMPONENT DESIGN

Where the design of a particular component or components of the Works are specified, the Contractor
shall complete the necessary design work and prepare shop drawings in accordance with the general
layout, overall sizes and tolerances indicated and according to the performance specified for the
element or component.
A4.8. CONSTRUCTION LOADS

The Contractor shall ensure that no excessive loads are placed on any part of the structure during
erection or throughout the construction of the Works. The Architect will on request, supply details of the
max, loads for which the various parts of the structure is designed.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A5. SITE & SITE ESTABLISHMENT
A5.1. LEVELS & SET OUT

A survey of all existing levels has been completed and is one of the drawings forming part of this
contract. The Contractor shall obtain any additional information on the existing condition of the site,
location of drain lines and other services prior to commencing any works.
The Contractor shall verify dimensions, bearings, levels and existence of all services including water,
gas, and electrical supply mains, sewer and storm water drains, telephone cabling and any other service
currently located on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct setting out of the
proposed structure and for the accuracy of the whole Works during the construction phase. He shall
make good at his own expense any errors in set out which occur resulting from failure to comply with the
requirements of this Clause. The Contractor shall refer immediately to the Architect for instructions in the
case of any discrepancy found between any information shown on the drawings and physical features
found on site.
A5.2. TEMPORARY SITE FENCING

The Contractor shall allow for the cost and construction of a 2.4m high ply hoarding gate to the West
boundary of the site facing Glendearg Grove. All other fences to be retained and protected.
This hoarding shall be supported by cypress posts firmly supported in concrete pads as required and
faced with 12mm structural ply panels fixed to treated battens with no more than 600mm centres. The
fence is to have a top rail and bottom rail to prevent the ply from twisting, bowing or warping for the
duration of the project. The fence shall be painted matt black and maintained for the duration of the
project.
The fence shall have vehicular and pedestrian gates as required to undertake construction practically.
All fencing, temporary and permanent is to be level and not grade with the fall of the natural ground
levels.
A5.3. SITE SIGNAGE

The site signage regarding publicity shall be restricted to only the Contractor and Architect. Each sign
shall be fixed to the ply fencing and be erected level and neatly. At no stage shall further signage
pertaining to subcontractors or external parties be erected or displayed on site. Domestic Building OHS
and Regulatory signage is permitted.
A5.4. CLEANING OF SITE

The Contractor shall at all times keep the Works and the site clean and tidy. Progressively clean up the
Works and remove all accumulated, discarded and surplus building materials and debris. Maintain
delivery of all new materials in correct locations to allow easy access and avoid damage to the materials
or to areas adjacent to the site. Provide all necessary protection and keep materials in conditions
suitable for use in the Works as recommended by the relevant suppliers and/or manufacturers.
A5.5. PROTECTION
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the care, maintenance and protection of all work, materials
and fittings comprised in any subcontract comprising the Works. He shall take full responsibility for the
proper execution and protection of the Works for the full period of his legal responsibility in connection
with this Contract. Cover and protect all materials liable to be affected by the weather. The Contractor
shall protect the Owner and any members of the public, and all adjoining buildings from any damage
whatsoever, and shall comply with all Council and other statutory regulations and instructions of any
authority having jurisdiction over the Works.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
The Contractor shall protect any live water, gas, electrical and telephone pipes, mains, cables, conduits,
poles, together with all other sewer, storm water and service pipes or other such installations on or
adjacent to the site, under the control of the Owner, any public authority on or adjacent to the Works.
The Contractor shall advise the Architect when any part of the work required under this Contract may
endanger any installation, service line or asset of any public authority and/ or energy supply company.
Obtain prior approval of the Architect and any relevant authority before making good any damage
caused to such installation, service line or asset.
When any part of the uncompleted works is used as a workshop or store room make good any damage
arising from such use. Under no circumstances will the Contractor be permitted to mix any materials on
a finished and unprotected floor surface bench or other completed section of the Works. The Contractor
shall ensure that once installed all specified fittings, fixtures, joinery and other parts of the Works are not
used for depositing tools and materials, for supporting scaffolding, or used as work benches. All parts
of the Works, any joinery, fittings or equipment that are damaged at any time until the issue of the Notice
of Practical Completion shall be assessed by the Architect and where directed shall be replaced by the
Contractor without cost to the Owner.
All scaffolding, underpinning and shoring shall be constructed in accordance with all applicable by-laws
and regulations and shall be to the Architect’s approval. Approval by the Architect shall not absolve the
Contractor from full responsibility for damage or losses to property and plant or injury to people caused
through any acts or omissions by himself or his employees. The Contractor shall arrange and coordinate
the sequence of work to prevent any damage to completed sections or delays to the overall construction
program provided by the Contractor in Compliance with G 5 & G 6 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement.
A5.6. COUNCIL ASSETS

The Contractor shall be responsible for all council assets during the construction of the project.
Any Bond as being required to be paid by council prior to construction will be paid by the owner and
reimbursed by the Contractor by means of a credit variation contract sum adjustment in favour of the
owner.
The Contractor may issue a debit variation contract sum adjustment in his favour at the end of the
construction period when council has inspected the council assets and confirmed that all is to council’s
satisfaction.
Any rectification works as enforced by council shall be at the Contractors cost. It is the Contractors
responsibility to photograph the council assets prior to construction.
A5.7. RELEVANT AUTHORITIES

Any application, fee or cost associated with any construction works outside the title boundary including
but not limited to, vegetation removal and replacement, crossover construction, road works and traffic
control, will be organised and paid by the contractor unless identified prior to signing this contract
agreement.
A5.8. HEADWORKS
The term 'Headworks' shall refer to the connection of any service from the point of title boundary to the
service outside the title boundary and controlled by the relevant authority.
The contractor shall undertake all 'dial before you dig' investigations and identify any further
investigations that may be required prior to signing this contract in relation to headworks.
Unless otherwise noted or included in the Provisional Sum for Headworks, at the time of contract the
contractor is to allow for all time, costs and provisions associated with all headworks including
applications, fees, co ordination of relevant contractors and associated works.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A5.9. INSTALLATION RECORDS

The Contractor and his subcontractors shall supply to the Architect drawings showing the services or
installations as completed, such services shall be correctly drawn, dimensioned and clearly indicate
including all relative inverts and levels, valves, stopcocks, changes in direction, points of access,
junction, fittings, sizes, flow capacity, etc. The installation and service drawings shall be executed at the
time of construction/installation and before the items have been covered up. Failure to provide these
drawings progressively as work proceeds will result in a reduction in relevant progress payments
equivalent to the cost required to have the drawings completed by others as directed by the Architect.
These installation and service drawings shall form the basis for recording the final actual locations of all
services and other alterations and in particular as follows:
 Water Supply (including cocks, ties, branches, valves, etc.).

 Stormwater (including pits, I.O.'s inverts, etc.).
 Sewerage system (including pits, I.O.'s inverts, etc.).
 Air conditioning supply and return lines
 Telstra, internet and other data cabling lines

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A6. SUBCONTRACTORS
A6.1. GENERALLY
The Contractor shall bind all subcontractors by signed agreements, which shall include all conditions,
obligations and responsibilities, which he himself is bound under the Contract. The subcontract
agreements shall stipulate reasonable commencing and finishing dates for each subcontractor's work
and the order and manner for the carrying out the Works to conform to the Contractor's Program. No
subcontractor shall complete the unfinished work of any other subcontractor. No subcontractor shall
execute work, which conceals unfinished work of another trade or subcontractor.
A6.2. SEPARATE CONTRACTS

The Owner reserves the right to supply and install or supply items on site from time to time as set out in
Schedule 8 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement. These items are not included in the Contract Price as
outlined in schedule 8 and as described are therefore not part of the Works defined in the Contract
documents.
The Owner shall be totally responsible to insure against any loss by theft or loss or damage from like
causes any work (for supply and/ or supply and install) executed under a separate contract and for any
equipment not forming part of the Works placed on the site by the Owner or its agents, separate
suppliers and/or contractors prior to the date of Practical Completion.
Should the work of any of the Owner’s suppliers and/or separate contractors hinder or interfere with the
progress of the Works the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect in writing and request
instructions before proceeding.
A6.3. SHOP DRAWINGS

The term 'shop drawings' wherever used in the Contract documents shall mean complete drawings
showing all details of fabrication, assembly, installation and fixing of the items concerned, and shall
include any necessary explanatory notes or Specifications. The Contractor shall obtain and submit to the
Architect shop drawings with notes and/or Specifications for such parts of the Works as he considers
necessary or specified in the appropriate trades.
Four (4) copies of shop drawings shall be submitted in ample time to allow for examination and any
necessary amendments and re submission to the Architect well before fabrication, none of which shall
be begun unless and until the shop drawings have been checked by the Architect. Shop drawings shall,
wherever possible, be compiled from actual measurements made on site, for which the Contractor shall
be responsible.
Should urgency necessitate shop drawings being compiled before building Works are sufficiently
advanced to enable site measurements to be made, then the shop drawings shall incorporate all
necessary tolerance allowances, modifications of fixing methods, and the like, thus provide for any
discrepancy which may arise between adopted dimensions and building Works executed later. The
Architect shall examine and promptly return two copies to the Contractor, signed and appropriately
endorsed, or accompanied by an appropriate letter. Where the Architect requires amendments to such
drawings, the amendments shall be made and submitted promptly.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
The Contractor shall not stockpile, manufacture, assemble or supply anything affected by such
drawings, until he/she has obtained the Architect’s authorisation which shall not be unreasonably
delayed but delays caused by late submission or inadequacy or such drawings shall not be recognised
as a reason for variations to the Contract time or sum. Checking and review by the Architect of shop
drawings refers to general design only. If errors, omissions and interferences are noticed, they will be
brought to the Contractor's attention. Authorisation by the Architect of shop drawings will not in any way
relieve the Contractor from responsibility for such errors, omissions and interferences, or from the
necessity of furnishing such workmanship and materials as may be required for the completion of the
work in accordance with the Contract.
A6.4. SUBCONTRACTOR'S SET OUT

As soon as possible at relevant stages during the construction of the Works the Contractor shall mark
out the positions of all walls and partitions for the guidance of subcontractors to enable them to set out
their work so that conduits, pipes, fittings, etc. may be built in as the work proceeds and unnecessary
cutting of all work avoided. The Contractor shall ensure that subcontractors prepare more detailed
information to determine the exact positions of their part of the Works and upon request the Contractor
shall submit these layouts to the Architect and obtain agreement before proceeding with the relevant
part of the Work.
A6.5. PRIME COST & PROVISIONAL SUMS

Prime Cost & Provisional sums are defined in Clause K 1.3 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement and are all
ex GST. The following prime cost sums are deemed to be included in the contract sum for the purposes
stated in the relevant sections of the specification. Refer also to Schedules 6 & 7 in Section ‘K’ of the
ABIC SW-2008 Agreement, and Specification Section W.
The margin for provisional sums and prime costs is only adjusted if the sum is increased at the time of
confirming costs as per item 23 of Schedule 1. If the cost at the time of confirming the costs is less than
what has been provisioned then the margin is not included in the contract sum adjustment and the
project margin remains the same as it was before the adjustment was made.
ITEM SUM ALLOWANCE
W3.1. PS – Headworks $ 5,000.00 Excluding GST

W3.2. PS – Soft Landscaping $ 10,000.00 Excluding GST
W3.3. PS – Hard Plaster $ 2,800.00 Excluding GST
W3.4. PS – Level & Restump existing floors $ 5,000.00 Excluding GST

W4.1. PC – Pendant Lights & external garden lights $ 6,260.00 Excluding GST
TOTAL: $ 29,060.00 Excluding GST

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A7. ARCHITECT & ADMINISTRATION
A7.1. INSPECTION OF WORK

The building operations shall be inspected periodically by the Architect & Sub consultants or their
representatives. The Contractor shall give the Architect a minimum of one (3) working day’s notice to
inspect the following items:
 Footings and trenches prior to placing reinforcement.
 Steel reinforcement prior to placing concrete.
 Placing of concrete.
 Completion of steel framing
 Completion of wall framing
 Completion of roof framing
 Completion of any waterproof membrane and /or tanking systems
 Start of block work.
 At all other times when the Contractor requires the presence of the Architect on the Works.
A7.2. INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor shall not accept instructions relative to this Contract other than those in writing by the
Architect or on behalf of the Architect by such persons as shall be nominated in writing by the Architect
to the Contractor. Should the Contractor or any subcontractor or supplier respond to and proceed with
an instruction from any other party any resultant claims for additional cost as a variation to the Works will
not be accepted by the Architect
A7.3. ARCHITECT'S SATISFACTION

No expression of the Architect's reasonable satisfaction or approval shall be deemed to be an
acceptance of defective materials or workmanship not complying with the terms and conditions of the
Contract nor as authority for any variation except where authorised in writing by the Architect.
A7.4. SITE MEETINGS

A Senior Representative of the Contractor and the Architect shall be present on the site at agreed regular
intervals to discuss progress and shall arrange for the attendance of such other members of their staffs
and representatives of subcontractors and suppliers as may be required. When requested by the
Contractor or the Architect a representative of the Owner shall attend the site meetings. The Architect
shall chair all site meetings, prepare records of the proceedings and provide copies to all attendees
within three (3) working days. Copies of relevant portions of the minutes will also be supplied by the
Contractor to consultants, subcontractors and suppliers.
The inclusion in the minutes of any site meeting of an instruction given by the Architect shall not be
deemed an Architect's written instruction (“AI”) in accordance with Clause A. 7 of the SW-2008
Agreement. All AI’s shall be issued separately and in writing.
The Contractor shall periodically supply the Architect with a list of any required instructions and details,
in order of priority together with the latest dates on which such instructions and details are required.
Reasonable notice shall be given by the Contractor to allow time for response by the Architect.
A7.5. PUBLICITY
All publicity in regard to any aspect of the Project is to be arranged through the Architects. Under no
circumstances shall publicity of any description be undertaken by the Contractor or any subcontractor
without prior approval.
A7.6. GOODS & SERVICES TAX (“GST”)

GST is applicable to this Contract and must be paid by the Contractor, his subcontractors and suppliers
for all labour materials, and services (as applicable) required for the Works.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A7.7. BANK CHARGES, TAXES AND FEES

The Contractor shall allow and pay for:
 All bank fees and charges
 Payroll, sales and any other taxes
 Holiday and sickness payments, leave loadings, superannuation and any other payments
as required by any award, labour contract or agreement applicable to the Works.
 Any other fees or authority charges, road opening permits, inspection fees, fire testing fees,
other testing fees, sundry charges as required and as applicable to the Works and as
necessary to achieve Practical Completion and the Certificate of Occupancy.
The Contractor shall ensure that all relevant subcontractors have allowed for and included the cost of
any and all inspections and testing required by authorities to enable the subcontractor to provide all
certificates of compliance for the various sections of the works. The certificates of compliance will be
provided by the Contractor to the Building Surveyor at the time of the application by the Contractor for
the Certificate of Occupancy.
A7.8. INDUSTRY AWARDS & AGREEMENTS

The Contractor shall comply with all relevant State and Federal Industry Awards and any Victorian
Building Industry Agreements. Include for any allowances considered necessary for and associated with
and applicable to this project.
A7.9. STAMP DUTY

The Contractor is to allow for all duty stamps to be applied to the Form of Agreement on signing the
Contract.
A7.10. CASH FLOW SCHEDULE

Upon the execution of the Contract Documents and prior to taking possession of the site the Contractor
will provide to the Architect a forecast of anticipated monthly claims for work expected to be completed
in relation to the construction program.
This forecast shall be in the form of a cash flow schedule showing the break up all trades and monetary
sums forming the Contract Price. The schedule shall be updated by the Contractor as required to
maintain consistency with the construction program and when requested, revised versions of the
schedule shall be submitted to the Architect.
A7.11. CONSTRUCTION PROGRAM

Upon the execution of the Contract Documents and prior to taking possession of the site the Contractor
will provide to the Architect a detailed construction program (as described in Clause G 5 & G 6 of the
ABIC SW-2008 Agreement) showing the dates of commencement and completion of each trade in each
section of the Works including all named subcontractors, trade suppliers and showing Practical
Completion by the due date or earlier. The completed program shall be submitted to the Architect for
information only and shall not form part of the contract documents. The Contractor agrees the
programming of the Works remains the total responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
immediately notify the Architect in writing of any delays in the works which may cause a change to the
Program.
A7.12. BUILDING ACT & DBC ACT

The Contractor shall fully comply with the requirements of the Building Act 1993 and the Domestic
Building Contract Act 1995. He shall be a “Registered Building Practitioner” and provide evidence of
registration to the Architect when so requested together with details of the warranty insurance cover
executed in relation to this Project as required by these Acts and as per the ABIC SW-2008. Agreement.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A7.13. NOTICES, FEES & REGULATIONS

The Contractor is to apply for and obtain building approval and the relevant building permit for the
completion of the works. Upon the execution of the Contract the Contractor shall provide the Building
Surveyor details of his registration as a Building Practitioner the warranty insurance policy he has
obtained for the works. The Contractor will not be given site possession until evidence of all insurances
policies has been supplied to the Architect.
The policies include:

 Warranty insurance policy as required by the DBC Act
 Public liability insurance as per clause E.1 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement
 Insurance of the works as per clause E.2 of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement
The Contractor shall obtain all other required permits and give all notices to the Building Surveyor, the
Municipal Council and any other authorities, make all necessary applications, obtain all necessary
licenses, consents and other permits in connection with this Contract, comply with all codes, by-laws,
building regulations and the regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over the Works. The
Contractor shall allow for and pay all fees, security deposits, and other legal charges, as required by all
such authorities and as required by the drawings, this Specification and the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement.
The Contractor shall ensure all subcontractors comply with the provisions of this clause including any
payments required from relevant authorities to enable subcontractors to complete their sections of the
Works. Particular reference is drawn to the requirements of the electrical, gas and water supply
companies in relation to the supply of these services and the fees and regulations applicable to these
parts of the works. The Contractor shall protect as necessary, all public installations on or off the site
such as gas, water, electricity, sewerage, telephone, etc, that may be disturbed during the execution of
the Works and shall make good at his own expense any work damaged or disturbed to the satisfaction
of the appropriate authorities and the Architect.
A7.14. PROGRESS CLAIMS & CERTIFICATES

The Contractor shall submit claims on a monthly basis as required by Section N of the ABIC SW-2008.
Agreement. Each claim shall be in the form of a trade break up spreadsheet showing percentage of
works completed to date and percentage this claim, any variations to the works and any prime cost and
provisional sums expended to date. The Architect will assess the claim and determine the value of work
completed and hence the amount due to the Contractor. This valuation will be included in a Progress
Certificate issued by the Architect to the Contractor and the Owner. The Contractor will then prepare a
tax invoice for the amount stated on the Certificate and present the invoice and signed certificate to the
Owner for payment.
The first progress claim will not be considered until the Contractor has complied with the following
provisions of the ABIC SW-2008 and supplied to the Architect:
 evidence of all the required insurance cover as per section E.
 a copy of the construction program as per section G.
A7.15. DECLARATION OF PAYMENT

Clause N.3.3 of the ABIC SW-2008. Agreement requires the Contractor to provide with each progress
claim a statement in a form acceptable to the Architect that:
 all payments due to all employees, sub contractors and suppliers have been paid.
 all wages, leave entitlements, superannuation, long service leave entitlements for
employees of the contractor have been paid.
 all insurances required by the ABIC SW-2008. Agreement have been paid and are in force
For this Project the declaration will be the sign off by the contractor on the progress certificate where
noted that all subcontractors employees and suppliers have been paid. No certificate will be considered
complete without this signature.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A7.16. VARIATIONS
Procedures to be followed for any variations to the Works are covered by section J of the ABIC SW-2008
Agreement. When the Contractor is required to complete work, which is considered to be additional to
the works as described in the Contract documents and, before commencement of such additional work,
the Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing stating the nature of additional work and the reasons
why it is considered to be outside the current scope of the Works.
All such claims from the Contractor will be acknowledged by the issue of an Architect’s Instruction (“AI”).
Any further communications for each claim shall refer to the relevant AI number. Quotations for the work
shall be submitted to the Architect in accordance with the requirements of sections J and H of the ABIC
SW-2008 Agreement. Upon agreement and approval of the quotation an Adjustment to the Contract will
be issued by the Architect authorising the additional work to proceed.
A7.17. VALUATION OF VARIATIONS

Variations shall be valued in accordance with the provisions of Sections H 2 & H 3 of the ABIC SW-2008
Agreement. To the net cost of the variation (as assessed by the Architect) shall be added an amount of
Ten percent (10%) for overheads and profit all as stated in item 21 of Schedule 1 of the ABIC SW-2008
Agreement. No other loadings or additions will be accepted as part of the cost of the variation. Upon
determination of the value of any variation by the Architect the cost shall be added or deducted to the
Contract Price and will be assessed for payment in the normal manner as part of a progress claim once
the item has been completed.
A7.18. OFF-SITE MATERIALS

Should the Contractor consider it necessary to procure or manufacture materials or goods away from
the Site to meet the program dates and complete the Works by the date for Practical Completion, the
Contractor may include in a normal monthly progress claim an amount for payment or part payment of
for these materials before their delivery to the site. However assessment and certification by the Architect
for any off-site goods and materials will only be considered when the Contractor has arranged All of the
following at no additional cost to the Owner or addition to the Contract Price:
 Provide an additional certificate of insurance to cover the item for the amount involved;
 Provide a statement from the supplier or manufacturer stating the Contractor is therefore able to
transfer that title of ownership to the Owner;
 Clear identification of the materials or goods by suitable tags, orders, markings or other means
stating they are the property of the Owner and designated for the Works.
Upon incorporation into the Works of any unfixed materials and/or goods and assessment by the
Architect of the satisfactory completion of this part of the work the Owner shall release the bank
guarantee required by the provisions of this clause to the Contractor.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A8. CONDUCT OF JOB
A8.1. SECURITY OF SITE

The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the proper and adequate safeguarding of the Works and
of all fixed and unfixed materials and equipment in the site under the Contractor’s control during both
working and non-working hours for the duration of the Contract until Practical Completion.
The Contractor shall take all measures including employment of watchmen and/or safety patrol services,
security fences, temporary flood lighting, etc. considered necessary for the purpose of safeguarding of
the Works. The Contractor shall also ensure that any potential entry points created by the building works
are totally secured when the site is unattended.
No claim for extension of time or for extra cost will be considered in respect of damage or loss of
material or interruption of work due to the Contractor's failure to safeguard the Works and any and all
losses resulting from the Contractor’s failure to maintain the security of the site shall be replaced and or
reinstated by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.
A8.2. GENERAL WATERPROOFING

The Contractor shall be responsible for the general watertightness of the total building for the duration of
the Works and shall correct, without extra cost, any part of the Works which allows entry of water or
dampness, or in the opinion of the Architect is likely to do so. Any damage resulting from water entry
will be made good to the approval of the Architect at the Contractor's cost. The Contractor shall allow for
and provide tarpaulins and other protection or pumps to all relevant areas of the Works while the
structure is open for the period considered by the Contractor to be necessary until the finished work is in
place and the new roof is water and weather tight.
A8.3. SUPERVISION & STAFF

The Contractor warrants it has the capacity to complete the works as set out in section A and that it will
complete its obligations in building the Works as set out in section G of the ABIC SW-2008 Agreement.
In compliance with these provisions the Contractor shall engage a competent site manager to be in
charge of and control the Works until Practical Completion. In addition the Contractor shall engage
sufficient qualified and experienced site staff as necessary for the execution of the work and proper
supervision of all other subcontractors, supplies and workmen to achieve the quality of workmanship as
defined in the Contract documents. Where it is normal practice for a trade to employ apprentices they
shall be only permitted to work with the constant supervision of a qualified tradesmen and the ratio shall
not exceed 2:1. Each trade or subcontractor shall have a qualified foreman with minimum five (5) years
foreman's experience in charge of all work force in the trade.
A8.4. WORKING CONDITIONS

The Contractor shall provide the best possible working conditions for the various operations on the site,
and shall remove any surplus water, provide temporary pathways, vehicular tracks, etc. and protect the
Works from rain, wind, etc. as may be desirable and necessary. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility
to comply with all Union conditions and O H & S requirements as set out in industry awards and
agreements including any additional requirements which may be negotiated with the relevant unions
specifically for this project.
A8.5. SAFETY
The Contractor shall carry out the whole of the Works in a thoroughly safe manner and in particular shall:
1. Ensure that subcontractors and others conform to the requirements of all relevant Acts,
Regulations, By-Laws or orders relating to the safety of persons on or about the site;

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
2. Ensure that all tools and tackle, gear, staging, scaffolding, ladders, machines, winding
arrangements and other equipment used in connection with the Works are of adequate strength
and safe for use;
3. Immediately discontinue any practice or remove any equipment, which becomes or is likely to
become unsafe;
4. Remove from the Works promptly any of his employees or representatives or those of any
subcontractor or other party on the site whose conduct tends to create any danger to
themselves or others or to the Works.
A8.6. OPERATING TIMES & OVERTIME

The Contractor may operate on the site between 7.30am and 5.00 PM Monday to Saturday or as
otherwise arranged with the Architect. All due care and diligence must be exercised at all times to
adhere to local municipal requirements and avoid unnecessary disruptions to any adjoining property
owners to the site.
If it is necessary for the Contractor or any subcontractor to work outside normal working hours, the
Contractor shall give due notice of the intention to do so and obtain the prior approval from the Architect.
The additional cost caused by overtime or shift work shall be borne in full by the Contractor.
A8.7. WORKMEN'S AMENITIES

The Contractor shall provide all site sheds, lunch room, toilet and washrooms in full compliance with
current award conditions and union requirements. These amenities shall be maintained for the duration
of the work until Practical Completion. Accommodation shall be neat, clean, freshly painted, well
constructed, watertight, well lit, ventilated and maintained in full accordance with requirements of the
local Authorities and/or under any trade agreements with relevant Unions or Building Industry Awards.
A8.8. TEMPORARY SERVICES

The provision of the minimum services hereinafter specified shall in no way imply that the Contractor's
obligation to provide all necessary temporary services has been satisfied, and the Contractor shall be
entirely responsible for providing any further temporary services required. Provide the following services
and remove them away on completion. They shall be available at all hours during which work is being
carried out.
1. Electricity
Provide all necessary power as required at various parts of the works.
2. Water
Provide all necessary water as required at various parts of the works.
3. Compressed Air
Provide all necessary compressed air services.
4. Plant, Equipment and Hoisting
Provide all necessary plant and equipment (including tackle, tools, cranes, hoists, gantries,
mixers, pumps, scaffolding, timbering, braces, struts, forms, shutters, etc.) as may be required
for the efficient and proper carrying out of the Works.
A8.9. SITE FENCE & HOARDINGS

Provide suitable site fencing to the approval of the Architect or as specified in Clause A5.2 for duration of
construction to ensure security of the Works including all site areas, site amenities and materials for the
Works. Remove fence and make good all adjacent surfaces at Practical Completion. In addition to the
site boundary fence erect and maintain all necessary screen gates, footways, gangways, gantries,
platforms, temporary enclosures, etc. for the protection of the Works, persons and property and to the
satisfaction of the Architect, local and other relevant authorities.
A8.10. NOISE & DUST CONTROL

Take all practicable precautions to minimise noise resulting from work required to complete the Works.
The use of radios and equipment generally shall be kept to a minimum level sufficient to avoid
disturbance to neighbours. Provide suitable screening to work areas to restrict the spread of dust.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
A9. COMPLETION
A9.1. PRACTICAL COMPLETION

Practical Completion is defined in section M 1 of the ABIC SW-2008:
“The works are at practical completion when, in the reasonable opinion of the architect:
a) They are substantially complete and any incomplete necessary works or defects remaining in the works are
of a minor nature and number, the completion or rectification of which is not practical at the time and will not
unreasonably affect occupation and use
b) All commissioning tests in relation to plant and equipment shown in item 28 of schedule 1 have been
carried out successfully and
c) Any approvals required for occupation have been obtained from the relevant authorities and copies of official
documents evidencing the approvals have been provided to the architect”
The procedures to achieve Practical Completion are set out in Section M of the of the ABIC SW-2008
Agreement and as follows:
 The Contractor shall bring the Works to Practical Completion by the date (or the extension
of that date) shown in Schedule 1.
 When the Contractor is of the opinion the Works are nearing the stage of Practical
Completion the Contractor shall conduct an inspection and prepare a list of outstanding
works The Contractor shall submit a copy of this list to the Architect.
 Subsequently the Contractor shall submit a Notice requesting the Architect to inspect the
Works and determine if they are at the stage of Practical Completion.
 The Architect will then inspect and assess the state of the Works.
 If the Architect considers the works are completed he will issue a Notice to the Contractor &
Owner advising the works have reached the stage of Practical Completion.
 If this is not the case the Architect will advise the Contractor what is required to achieve
practical Completion
Notwithstanding that all items are required to be fully completed by the date of Practical Completion the
Architect, at his discretion may permit some minor items to be completed after the issue of the Notice of
Practical completion.
All such minor items shall be completed by the Contractor with the minimum of inconvenience to the
Owner within 14 days from the issue of the Notice of Practical Completion or within a reasonable time as
agreed by both parties.
Payment for outstanding defects shall be withheld from the practical completion progress claim and will
not be certified for payment until all defects at the time of Practical Completion are rectified or negotiated
as complete.
A9.2. DOCUMENTS
Prior to the issue of the Notice of Practical Completion the Contractor shall provide the following
documents.
 All insurance policies & cover notes,

 All warranties required by this Specification
 All instruction manuals from equipment suppliers,
 All certificates of approval from all authorities having jurisdiction over the Works,
 All compliance certificates including electrical, plumbing, roofing, insulation and glazing
works.
 A complete statement of variations and contract sum adjustments to Contract,

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
 All copies of all Drawings and Specification issued to date to the Contractor and any
subcontractor or supplier.
 A complete set of “As-Built” drawings showing locations of all installed services, pipes,
conduits, etc. as previously specified.
Should the Contractor have any reason for not being able to obtain such documents immediately notify
the Architect in writing, stating the reasons for the delay and the date by which the documents will be
available. Notwithstanding any delays experienced by the Contractor all documents must be supplied to
the Architect as a condition precedent to the processing and certification of the Practical Completion
claim
A9.3. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

Prior to requesting any inspection of the Works in anticipation of Practical Completion the Contractor
shall:
 Remove all temporary buildings, structures, fences, services, plant and equipment.
 Clean up and remove rubbish and spoil from the Works and site.
 Make good all damage, stains and blemishes and replace any such materials where
necessary.
 Clean all surfaces and polish glass and natural or chromed metal finishes.
 Bring all surfaces to the specified finishes.
 Ease all doors, windows and check, oil and adjust all locks, latches, bolts and closers.
 Clean all gutters and drains.
 Check, test and ensure that all services and equipment are functioning satisfactorily.
 Label all keys with individual plastic tags.
A9.4. OCCUPATION
Upon issue of the Notice of Practical Completion the Owner shall be entitled to occupation of the whole
of the Works. Not withstanding the Owner's occupation, the Contractor shall be granted access during
the Defects Liability Period to complete any incomplete and/or defective items contained in the
Architects Instruction issued to the Contractor. This work shall be carried out at times in such manner so
as not to reasonably interfere with the Owner's occupation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section B
DEMOLITION
B. DEMOLITION
B1.1. GENERAL
The scope of work of this section includes the demolition and removal of trees, structures, footings,
external paving, and parts of services effected by the Works as shown on the demolition plan WD01. The
demolition work includes the removal of all remnant vegetation (except as noted), surplus soil, materials
and rubbish together with the preparation and making good of the as required and necessary for the
construction of the new Works.
B1.2. EXTENT OF WORK

Demolish to the extent and in the location shown on Architectural Demolition Plan WD01 as necessary to
complete the works as follows:
 Demolition and removal of the existing carport & shed, including slab and footings.
 Demolition and removal of the part existing house as noted on WD01, including all slabs
and footings as noted on the Demolition plan
 Demolition and removal of all joinery and appliances.
 Demolition and removal of all wet areas. Water Supply to be sealed during works and as
required.
 Demolition and removal of all remaining hard scaping and paving, including driveway &
front porch.
 Capping & sealing of all existing services, including removal of all redundant pipework as
required for the Works.
 Removal of Trees, Shrubs, and Vegetation as noted on the Demolition Plan WD01.
 Scraping and levelling of site for removal of all remaining loose materials and rubbish.
 Demolition and Removal of driveway gate.
 Existing Internal Finishes, Features, Trim, Windows & Window Furnishings, Doors,
Fireplaces and Light Fittings to be protected and retained unless noted otherwise on WD01.
 Demolition and removal of asbestos material to be in strict accordance with regulations
governing such removal
B1.3. EXISTING SERVICES

Give all notices and pay all costs for disconnecting, sealing, diverting and/or removal of SW drains, hot
& cold water, sewer, gas, telephone and all other service lines as shown on drawings and/or
encountered during completion of the demolition work both within the area of demolition and as directed
by the Architect or by any relevant Authority.
The residence was previously connected to all these services and the new work includes removal,
extension, or alteration of the services to suit the location of all new fittings and fixtures. The demolition
work shall include the temporary cutting and sealing of the services and the removal of all redundant
pipes, cables, connection boxes and pits.
Prior to disconnecting or interrupting any services, confer with the Architect to ensure exact nature of
demolition work. Advise Architect and Owner 24 hours in advance of disconnection. Prevent damage or
interference to existing services adjacent to the site both above and below ground, which are to be
maintained for others.
B1.4. DEMOLISHED MATERIAL

Unless otherwise specified in Clause B1.5 all materials resulting from demolition work shall become the
property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site regularly and progressively during the
progress of the demolition work.
Any asbestos material will be removed from site in strict accordance with regulations governing such
removal
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page B-1 of 2

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section B
DEMOLITION
B1.5. ITEMS TO BE RETAINED

Remove and store, or retain and protect on site the following items for reuse in the works:
 Ceiling Cornice as per drawings.

 Structural members unless otherwise advised by engineer.
 Internal doors as scheduled.
 Windows & window furniture as scheduled.
 Fireplaces and mantles as per drawings.
 Existing front door furniture as noted.
 Existing Front Porch Lights as noted.
 All removed Doors, Windows, Architraves and Skirtings to front portion of house are to be retained.
Removal subject to Client Approval.
Retained Trees to be fenced off and mulched and builder to ensure adequate protection for the survival
of the trees and shrubs during construction.
Stack all items in suitable location with protection to avoid damage from other trades.
B1.6. MAINTENANCE
All original doors, fireplaces, timber trim and skirtings which are to be removed are to be retained for
inspection by architect / owner before disposal / storage. All items to be retained are to be adequately
protected or stored safely for the duration of the works. All original floorboards to be retained for
inspection by architect for re-use either onsite or elsewhere by owner where possible.
The following Maintenance schedule was compiled from a walk-through with the contractor prior to
Contract. Items in the Maintenance schedule have been confirmed as part of the fixed price with the
exception of floor levelling & hard plastering which are to be confirmed by way of variation against the
respective Provisional Sums prior to commencing work on each item. These variations will be assessed
taking into account the contractor's estimates against each item following the walk-through.
Refer to Maintenance Schedule Appendix Y11 for list of maintenance items.
B1.7. ITEMS DISCUSSED BUT CONSIDERED TO BE PART OF CONTRACT WORKS

Refer to Maintenance Schedule Appendix Y11 for list of items included in contract works.
B1.8. INDEMNITY & RESPONSIBILITY

The Contractor is liable for and is to indemnify the Owner against any claims or actions and for any
consequent delays, which may arise out of any nuisance caused by the demolition. Ensure that all
operations are safe and sufficient for the purpose and in full compliance with O H & S regulations and
accepted demolition practice. Minimise noise and provide all necessary temporary screens, hoardings,
railings and barriers to prevent damage, injury or nuisance. Comply with all regulations, guidelines and
other requirements of any authority having jurisdiction over the demolition Works. Ensure that no part of
the structure is rendered unsafe or in need of support during demolition. The demolition shall be carried
out with due consideration for the completed project, including protection of surrounding buildings,
adjacent property, public roads and pavements and all existing services and structures required to be
retained.
B1.9. DILAPIDATION SURVEY

The Contractor will be totally responsible for any damage caused to any adjoining residences, garden
areas, the public roads and walkways resulting from the demolition works. Prior to commencing any
demolition on site make a detailed inspection and record of all existing conditions surrounding the site
including damage, cracks, etc. The record shall be by way of written statements and photographs to
clearly show the conditions existing on site prior to commencement of any demolition works. This record
shall form a complete Dilapidation Survey to establish the current state of repair and condition of all
adjoining properties.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page B-2 of 2

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Gelndearg Grove, Malvern Section C
EXCAVATION & DRAINAGE
C. EXCAVATION & DRAINAGE
C1. SCOPE OF WORKS
The site will be handed over to the Contractor in its present condition. It will be the Contractor's
responsibility to prepare the site for excavation for all footings, column pad footings, drain and service
lines, pits, and trenches.
The excavation work will include all work as outlined on architectural drawings for the residence as
follows:
 Levelling of the site for the proposed new construction area.

 All excavation for pool.
 All excavation for garden beds, rear garden levels, driveway, drainage and sewer pits, and
associated works.
 All excavation for paving.
 All excavation for footings and slabs.
 Excavation for all proposed sanitary and stormwater reticulation and pits as well as Agi
pipes.
Earthworks shall include all cut, filled, graded, trimmed and compacted areas as required to construct
the Works to the finished design levels.
Confirm all existing site and proposed levels and datum with the Architect before commencing work.
The levels as shown on the drawings shall be taken as approximate and the Contractor shall check all
such levels before commencing work.
The Contractor will be responsible for any damage caused by or as a result of the construction of any
part of the Works to all existing roads, footpaths and public assets surrounding the site. Provide all
necessary protection to these public assets throughout the construction period and make good any
damage to the satisfaction of the Architect and as required by any relevant local authorities.
The extent of work under this section is shown on the drawings and specified here under but generally
includes for the following excavation works:
 Removal of top soil and subsoil as required to achieve proposed levels in area of the site
where the proposed additions are to be located, including pool. Top soil to be separated
and free of debris.
 All strip & pad footings, retaining garden walls, concrete slabs, edge and internal concrete
beams, stump holes, and bore hole for piers (if required - refer engineers drawings).
 All SW drainage lines, gratings, sumps, pits and strip drains, where required, connection to
LPOD as indicated on Civil Plans.
 Remove, Excavate & level to form new driveway from existing crossover to rear of car
space. Levels and setout of driveway to be generally as per the contract & civil drawings.
Final levels to be confirmed with architect on site prior to excavation. Refer to Section D
(Concrete).
 All new agricultural drains.
 All cold water, electrical, telecommunications and any other service line, pipe, conduit or
cables.
 All other drainage and service pipes, pits and all associated excavation, filling, backfilling,
bedding and compacting.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page C - 1 of 8

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
C2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
AS 3500 Plumbing and Drainage
All work and installations to be to Australian Standards, BCA requirements and current trade standards
C3. WORKMANSHIP
Carry out all work in a thorough and competent manner to the satisfaction and approval of all relevant
Authorities and the Architect.
Excavation shall be undertaken and completed by approved, competent, qualified first class trades
persons, licensed and/or registered as required for the particular service to be performed.
Drainage Services shall be installed by approved, competent, qualified first class trades persons,
licensed and/or registered as required for the particular service to be installed.
C4. GENERAL CLAUSES
C4.1. NATURE OF GROUND

The Contractor is assumed to have visited the site and made his assessment of all conditions likely to be
encountered in the detailed execution of the Works. To assist in the assessment of conditions a Soil
Report has been included in the Tender and Contract Documents. Upon signing the Contract the
Contractor agrees that he has obtained sufficient information and that all costs associated with all sub-
soil conditions to be encountered during the execution of the Works are included in the Contract Price.
Additional payment for any subsequent variations in sub soil conditions encountered during the
excavation of the site will only be considered where it can be demonstrated that the particular conditions
could not have been determined and allowed for at the time of tender. Refer to the soil report for water
table conditions.
C4.2. SETTING OUT

Prior to commencement of any excavation, the general areas of the building, all services and site works
shall be set out by suitable hurdles, pegs or markers. Levels shall be established and pegged from a
common datum. All setting out shall be carefully checked against the drawings and any discrepancies
clarified with the Architect before construction commences. Final locations and all floor levels shall be
established on site in the presence of the Architect. The Contractor shall be responsible for the setting
out and checking of all levels during construction. Any work found to be out of alignment or set at
incorrect levels shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Existing trees shall be protected in strict accordance to conditions set out in the town planning permit &
plans in addition to any requirements of the City of Stonnington.
C4.3. CLEARING
All rubbish, vegetation and demolition materials shall be removed from the site. Grub out or grind
stumps and roots over 75 mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500 mm below the sub grade under the
proposed bottom of any excavation for footings, stumps or column pads, and 300 mm below the
finished surface in unpaved areas.
Protect all existing fences, adjacent buildings, trees and any footings likely to be affected in any way by
excavation works.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
C4.4. SITE DRAINAGE

The Contractor shall ensure that the Works are free of surface and ground water at all times. Water must
not be allowed to accumulate or pond at any stage in any part of the Works. Temporary drains shall be
constructed where necessary to prevent water flowing onto the construction areas, adjoining buildings,
roads, footpaths and walkways. The drains shall be so arranged to take water away from the Works and
discharge into a permanent outfall. Precautions shall be taken to prevent surface water from entering
any excavations. Water entering or infiltrating into the excavations shall be removed immediately prior to
placing concrete. Pumps shall be provided where necessary to de-water excavations and drain any
surplus water.
C4.5. GENERAL EXCAVATION

Excavate and fill ground to depths shown and/or as specified for the site cut, pool, all footings, slabs,
walls, beams, posts, column pads, drains, water and other service pipes, sumps and other pits, as
necessary for floors and where necessary to comply with the requirements of the drawings and this
Specification. Excavate for all service lines including telephone, water supply, and electrical supply to
the proposed dwelling.
All excavations shall be to the sizes and dimensions indicated on drawings and/or shall be level with
stepped beds and cut plumb at sides. Where necessary, provide shoring, sheet piling, planking, bracing
or other satisfactory means to properly retain the earth at the sides and ends of all excavations.
Thoroughly drain the excavations and trenches as may be necessary during the course of the work to
prevent entry of water. Allow for cutting the ground to levels where required to support floors and paving
with filling materials, all well consolidated as further specified. Excavate for water, sewer, drainage and
other service pipes and pits having taken into account all service pipes require a minimum cover of 300
mm below final surface levels, and that some authorities may require more than this minimum cover. All
service pipes shall be laid clear of buildings except where indicated on the drawings or where necessary
to reach respective fittings.
The depth of foundations shown on the drawings will not necessarily be considered as final. Variation
for over excavation and bulk concrete fill to meet bearing requirements as shown on the structural
drawings will be at the Contractor's expense.
C4.6. TOPSOIL
Stockpile sufficient excavated topsoil for reuse in landscape areas. Protect stockpiles from
contamination by other excavated material, weeds and building debris. Provide additional filling to paved
area to achieve the finished levels shown on the drawings. All other surplus excavated material, surplus
topsoil and materials from the excavation work not required on site as fill shall be removed and disposed
of by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
C4.7. EXCESS EXCAVATION

Where over excavation occurs, low areas may be filled with approved material placed and compacted as
specified and to the required level to the satisfaction of the Architect. Where any unsuitable material is
encountered at the base of excavations the Contractor shall obtain the Architect’s approval before
excavating and making good as directed.
Should the Contractor excavate to a greater depth than that shown on the drawings he shall, at his own
expense, make good the excess excavation with fine crushed rock, bulk concrete or other approved
filling compacted up to the specified levels to engineers satisfaction. Any unsuitable material found at
the prescribed depths for strip and pad footings shall be removed, and the excavated area replaced with
15 Mpa binding concrete. Refer also to notes on the Structural Engineering drawings. Any soft areas
created by the construction process or by water or weather conditions consistent with the particular
construction period shall be cut out and backfilled with selected compacted backfill or 15 Mpa binding
concrete at no additional cost to the contract sum. Top soil shall be separated and removed from site as
required by Stonnington Council.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
C4.8. FOUNDATION LEVELS

Trenches and excavation for strip, pad, stump and column footings, and the like shall be carried down to
a firm base and/or to depths shown on the drawings. Sides of all trenches and holes shall be sharp, true
and conforming to concrete shapes. Base of all footings and trenches shall be levelled, stepped and/or
graded and pegged for concrete depths as required and noted on the drawings as determined by the
geotechnical site report together with the Structural Engineering drawings. All techniques as required to
excavate into the water table shall be allowed for, for all types of excavations.
C4.9. TERMITE PROTECTION

Stonnington Council is NOT classed as being in a Termite Zone. However termite protection of new
works by way of Kordon barrier to perimeter of extension and penetrations, including interface of existing
building.
C4.10. DEFECTIVE WORK

Where a section of the excavation work is rejected on the basis of inspection or test results, the Architect
may direct that part, or all of the section be removed, replaced and re-compacted as previously specified
until the required level of compaction is achieved.
C4.11. INSPECTIONS
All excavations shall be inspected and approved by the Architect before the pouring of any concrete
takes place. The Contractor shall be required to give the Architect three (3) clear day’s notice for specific
inspections of any excavated areas.
C4.12. PUBLIC ASSETS

The Contractor is to make good to the Architect's satisfaction all roads, walkways, and footpaths
adjacent to the site where disturbed by the excavation or building work. Patch coats will not be
acceptable and complete resurfacing of disturbed areas will be required. Provide proposal for making
good and obtain approval prior to commencement of any such damage to concrete, paved or asphalt
areas.
The Contractor is responsible for paying and holding any asset claim bond as required by the Municipal
Council or Governing body.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
C5. GENERAL MATERIALS
C5.1. SERVICE PIPES & PITS
C5.1.1. GENERAL
Make contact with all relevant authorities prior to commencing work, to ascertain the precise location of
the entry of all services to the site. Divert and/or protect the services as necessary in a manner to the
approval of the Architect during the progress of the work at all times.
Excavate for all new service lines to the positions shown for fittings and fixtures within the building
works. Wherever possible the Contractor shall plan service pipe installation to utilise common trenches
and reduce the need for separate excavation. Provide a 50 mm sand bed for all pipes as later specified
and fix pipes and conduits in trench for inspection prior to testing and back filling.
Locate all pits where shown and coordinate locations of pit covers, junction boxes, inspection openings,
meters, storm water gratings and other service points with proposed paving and other finished levels to
ensure completed works will be in accordance with the drawings and this Specification.
Ensure any in ground electrical cables or conduits are located with a minimum separation of 300 mm
from any other pipe or service.
C5.1.2. COLD WATER SERVICE

Provide lines to all fittings and taps, and all landscaped areas. Refer also to the Part N - Hydraulics
section of this specification as well as Civil drawings which outline all site reticulation requirements.
C5.1.3. BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES

Back filling shall be carried out only after all pipes and conduits have been inspected and approved by
the Architect. Trenches shall be back filled to 200 mm above the top of the pipe with Class 2 fine
crushed rock material placed in layers of 200 mm (loose depth) and mechanically compacted to not less
than 95% maximum dry density obtained in the Standard Compacting test to AS 1280.
If necessary, water shall be used to facilitate compacting and to assist in achieving the degree of
compaction specified. The remaining backfill shall be with excavated material, which shall be placed in
layers not exceeding 200 mm loose depth as above. Any service trenches located beneath the
crossover, driveway or paved areas shall be backfilled up to formation level with Class 2 fine crushed
rock compacted in layers to 100% standard density.
All backfill shall be placed uniformly on each side of and in such a manner that the pipe is not disturbed
or damaged. No rubbish shall be used in backfill and no rocks or stones of larger dimensions than 20
mm shall be used as fill. Ensure that normal drainage in and around service trenches is not interfered
with after completing the backfill. Make good any subsidence that occurs in the backfill before the end
of the Defects Liability Period.
C5.2. STORMWATER DRAINS
C5.2.1. SCOPE
This section describes the standards of material and construction required for the whole of the storm
water (“SW”) pipe drainage including pits, grating and all associated accessories required for the
completed storm water system drain to the proposed building area. The storm water system includes
collection of all roof drainage via the down pipes and all storm water from drains and gratings where
shown on the site plan.
Generally storm water collected from the new roof areas will discharge directly to the existing stormwater
pipes which connect to the Legal Point of Discharge as documented and to satisfaction of responsible
authority. (underground). Contractor to confirm existing stormwater connection is adequate and
functional prior to works.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
Provide all associated pits, pit covers, trench and other gratings as required to areas where shown on
the both the Civil and Architectural drawings.
C5.2.2. REGULATIONS
The SW system shall be installed in full compliance with the requirements of the BCA, the Victoria
Building Regulations, Stonnington Council Engineers Department requirements and to AS 3500.3.
C5.2.3. MATERIALS
SW drains shall be UPVC pipes to AS 1254 and AS 1260 as applicable with solvent weld or rubber ring
jointing. All pits & trench drains shall be selected with sufficient depth to cater for the anticipated run-of
collected storm water. Grating to be selected to cater for appropriate loadings with pedestrian loadings
on non-vehicle areas but sufficient for vehicles in all driveways, and ramps etc.
C5.2.4. CONSTRUCTION
Trenches shall be excavated to the correct line and level with vertical sides and 200 mm wider (100 mm
each side) than the outside diameter of the pipes to be laid in them. Sufficient extra width and depth
shall be excavated at each joint to allow the pipes to be properly jointed. Trenches shall be kept clear of
water at all times and timbered where necessary to prevent collapse of the trench before backfilling.
Excavate only sufficient length of new trench in advance of pipe laying to allow the latter work to
proceed without delay.
C5.2.5. LAYING
General pipe laying shall commence at the discharge end of the drain and proceed towards the inlet
end. Bedding materials or pipes shall not be laid on soft or water logged ground. Such ground shall be
allowed to dry out or shall be excavated to a sound bottom and replaced with compacted bedding
materials. The pipes shall be bedded on an 80 mm compacted depth of damp sandy loam or dusty
toppings extending the full width of the trench. Sockets to face upstream and the barrel shall bear evenly
for its full length of the bedding material. Bedding in soils having a clay content shall be crushed rock.
Trenches are to be backfilled as soon as the joints have hardened and have been approved. Backfill to
the underside levels of the pavements with compacted sandy loam or dusty toppings. All backfilling,
bedding material or filling to replace soft material removed shall be rammed in 200 mm loose layers to
the density of the adjoining natural undisturbed soil.
Filling material to be carried up evenly on each side of the pipe and shall be watered if this is necessary
to provide optimum conditions for compaction.
C5.2.6. AGRICULTURAL DRAINS

Agricultural drains (“AG”) shall be constructed to lines, grades and levels shown on drawings. Generally
to retaining walls and gravel drains. Trenches shall be 250 mm wide and excavated carefully to line and
grade with vertical sides. Pipes shall be slotted 90 mm diam. plastic pipes or Hume's 'Draincoil' type 1
(corrugated) or equal approved - Class 400, 1,000 and shall be laid in long lengths in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations. Trenches shall be filled to a depth of 150 mm below finished level
with 10 mm screening carefully packed around and above the pipes.
C5.2.7. DOWNPIPES
Connect all downpipes as specified in to new rainwater tank, retention system or sub ground drainage
system as indicated on Civil Plan. Generally downpipes shall discharge to UPVC pipe sockets, entering
centrally and shall rest on the bottom of the socket. Tops of sockets shall be level and finish 12 mm
below the surrounding surface. Seal between the downpipes and the socket with suitable sealant to
form watertight connection to drainage system. Refer also to Section L (Roofer) of this Specification.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
C5.3. DRAINAGE PITS
C5.3.1. GENERAL
Pits shall be constructed of precast concrete for larger pits or PVC for smaller pits all as scheduled and
fitted with grated or solid cover. Refer to relevant sections of this Specification for more details of service
pits and covers. Pits shall be precast concrete or formed up and poured on site to the sizes shown.
Formwork shall be timbered if necessary to prevent collapse and kept clear of water so that the concrete
can be properly placed. Bottoms of pits, which are or have become soft shall be excavated to a solid
bottom and refilled with blinding concrete. Finish the tops of the pits flush around with the abutting
paved or garden surfaces.
C5.3.2. GRATED COVERS

Grated Covers to be “Gatic” or equal approved by the manufacturer for precast pits & trenches. In all
cases covers shall be selected to take the anticipated loading for each location shown on drawings.
C5.4. FILLING
C5.4.1. GENERAL
Where filling and back filling is required it shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 200 thickness
before compacting and be compacted to obtain a uniform density of not less than 95% of the maximum
dry density at optimum moisture content as determined by the Dry Density tests set out in AS 1289
Part E.
C5.4.2. GRANULAR FILL AND BACKFILL

Granular fill shall be crushed from clean, hard, durable, angular fragments of rock, free from clay, loam
and organic or other deleterious substances. The grading shall comply with the following:
 100% passing 37.5 mm AS Sieve

 80% minimum passing 19.0 mm AS Sieve
 5% maximum passing 0.075 mm AS Sieve
The material shall be graded within these limits to enable all filling to be readily compacted. Such
granular fill as specified shall be used to make up levels or as backfill under concrete ground slabs and
paving.
C5.4.3. BEDDING SAND

Bedding sand shall be fine aggregate sand to AS 2858 Part 1, suitable for concrete manufacture.
C5.4.4. BASE COURSES

Selected filling for base course shall be Class 2 fine crushed rock nominal size 20 mm.
C5.4.5. ACCURACY OF FORMATION

The earthworks and filling included in the formation work shall be levelled to, within 10 mm of the levels
indicated on the drawings.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
C6. MATERIAL TABLES
C6.1. RETAINING WALLS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.3 External Items.
Timber sleeper retaining walls to be used for level changes as required to garden beds, paths or
boundary fences unless noted otherwise and where level change is greater than 300mm.
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

Sleeper Retaining Wall Timber Sleeper Garden Retaining Wall. 2.3 - External Items
Edging FORMBOSS 'ZAM' 2.0mm metal edging. 2.3 - External Items
C6.2. IN GROUND DRAINAGE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.5 Drainage.

PIT Concrete Pit with GATIC Style L/D Steel Grate Lid/Insert or 2.5 - Drainage
similar approved
DRAIN PVC AGI Pipe 2.5 - Drainage
TRENCH Plastic trench drain with GATIC style steel grating. 2.5 - Drainage
Refer to Civil Engineers Drawings and Architectural Drawing WD02 for location and setout of Pits, Pump
Pits and Trench Drains.
C7. CLEANING UP
On completion clean out all service lines, drains, gratings pits and other structures and leave in a neat
and tidy condition. On completion of building work remove all rubbish, excess excavated material,
concrete, bricks, etc from areas around the building and all landscaped areas. Grade the area
surrounding the building to levels shown on drawings to allow for proposed Landscape works.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section D
CONCRETE
D. CONCRETE
D1. SCOPE OF WORK
D1.1. GENERAL
The work specified in this section includes but shall not necessarily be limited to the performing of all
operations in connection with:
 Set out,
 Providing all formwork,
 Supply, forming up and placing reinforcement,
 Supply, mixing and placing concrete,
 Removal of formwork,
 Finishes,
 Inspections and tests,
 Tolerances.
D1.2. EXTENT OF WORK
And as shown on the drawings and as specified, complete and ready for use and/or subsequent
construction and carried out by competent tradesmen. Refer also to the specification notes and details
on the structural engineering drawings.
The concrete work in this section shall include:
 All reinforced concrete slab on ground & paving slabs.

 All reinforced concrete strip footings to walls.
 All reinforced concrete pond & pool shells.
 All column pads and footings including to fences & garden retaining walls.
 Concrete burnished screed finish.
 Blinding concrete as specified by structural drawings.
 General landscaping stairs, planters, footings and paving.
These works shall include all excavation, formwork, reinforcement and finishing's all as specified and
detailed. All reinforced concrete shall be in accordance with this Specification, the drawings and all
applicable Australian Standards. The characteristic compressive strength of the concrete shall be
determined statistically from compressive tests carried out in accordance with the appropriate parts of
AS 1012.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page D-1 of 13

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
D2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
The following Australian Standards shall apply to this section:
No. Title
AS 1012 Methods of Testing Concrete (all Parts)
AS 1052 Test Sieves
AS 1302 Steel Reinforcing Bars for Concrete
AS 1303 Hard-drawn Steel Reinforcing Wire for Concrete
AS 1304 Hard-drawn Steel Wire Reinforcing Fabric for Concrete
AS 1315 Specification and Methods of Test for Portland Cement
AS 1379 Ready Mixed Concrete
AS 1478 Chemical Admixtures for Use in Concrete
AS 1479 Code of Practice for the Use of Chemical Admixtures in Concrete
AS 1509 SAA Formwork Code
AS 1510 Code of Practice for Control of Concrete Surfaces - Part 1, Formwork.
AS 1554 SAA Code for Welding in Building - Part 3, Welding of Reinforcing Steel
AS 2758.1 Concrete Aggregates
AS 3600 Concrete Structures Code
AS 3610 Formwork for Concrete Code
ASTM C309 Chemical Curing Components
D3. WORKMANSHIP
All concrete works shall be undertaken and completed by approved, competent, qualified first class
trades persons, licensed and/or registered as required for the particular service to be performed.
D4. GENERAL CLAUSES
D4.1. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

The work shall be accurately set out, true to the positions, levels, shapes and dimensions shown on the
drawings. The tolerances noted below may, however, be allowed in the finished structural concrete.
 Cover to reinforcement where the nominal cover is 25 mm or more + 6 mm.

 Cover to reinforcement where the nominal cover is less than 25 mm + 6 mm - 3 mm.
Top surfaces of floor slabs shall be within ±3 mm in 6 M of the levels shown on the drawings and in not
more than 12 mm progressively. If the tolerances listed above are exceeded, the Contractor may be
required, at the discretion of the Architect, to remove and replace or modify the placed concrete before
acceptance.
D4.2. PREPARATION BEFORE PLACING
D4.2.1. BUILDING-IN & CO-ORDINATION

The Contractor shall co-ordinate all trades, in particular Electrical, Plumbing and other sub contractors to
effect the trimming of openings, the firm positioning of sleeves, inserts, bolts, pipes, conduits, brackets,
frames, dowels and pipe work and anything else that needs to be built-in prior to concrete placement.
Holding down bolts and timber column base supports shall be positioned with templates. All fixings and
conduits shall be positioned to the tolerances specified. Recesses, pockets, openings, and sump shall
be formed as shown on the drawings or as approved.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
D4.2.2. CONDUIT
Conduit layouts shall be approved prior to installation and the clearances between conduits and
reinforcement shall not exceed the dimensions specified and the conduits shall in no other way interfere
with the reinforcement. The voids in sleeves, inserts and/or slots and all other items into which grout
may penetrate shall be filled with readily removable blocking material. Allowance shall be made for
clearance holes and sleeves to suit pipes with flanges were applicable. Conduits and piping in concrete
floors shall be above bottom steel and below top steel. Where brickwork abuts vertical concrete faces,
ties shall be built-in to the concrete, as specified.
D4.2.3. INSPECTIONS & APPROVALS

The Contractor shall give 24 hours notice of the time and location that concrete is intended to be placed
in any section previously inspected and approved. The placing of concrete shall not be started without
approval, which shall not be given unless the work can be completed in daylight or an adequate system
of lighting is provided and approved. Adequate time shall be allowed for completing the surface
treatment and commencement of the curing procedure. Approval of placing shall be withheld or
withdrawn if damage by rain or dust may possibly result, or if the forecast temperature is greater than
35°C. If the forecast temperature exceeds 29°C, retarding agents shall be added, subject to the
Architect's approval, and at the Contractor's expense. Curing compounds will not be permitted.
D4.2.4. COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

When concreting in cold weather, precautions shall be taken to prevent the concrete from freezing at
any time during the curing period. When the air temperatures falls below 5°C the concrete shall be
maintained at a temperature of at least 5°C until the expiration of the curing period. Concrete placed
when the temperature of the surrounding air is below 5°C shall have a temperature not lower than 10°C
when placed in forms. Salts or other chemicals shall not be used for the prevention of freezing.
D4.2.5. HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

In hot weather, (ie. when the air temperature is anticipated to exceed 29°C) precautions shall be taken to
avoid premature stiffening of fresh mix and to reduce water absorption and evaporation losses. When
the temperature of the surrounding air is higher than 32°C the following provisions shall apply:
1. The formwork shall be continuously sprayed with cold water in advance of the concreting.
Excess water shall be removed from the inside of the forms immediately prior to the concrete
placement. The reinforcement and the formwork, if metal forms are used, shall be protected
from the effects of hot winds and direct sunlight.
2. Concrete shall have a temperature not higher than 32°C when placed, either following the use of
chilled mixing water, or by water spraying of the coarse aggregate, or both, and if necessary by
covering the container in which the concrete is transported to the form.
3. The concrete shall be mixed, transported, placed and compacted as rapidly as possible, and the
element of structure shall then be covered with an impervious membrane or with wet sand or
wet hessian.
4. Curing compounds may be used as an alternative to the requirements of paragraph (3) above
subject to prior approval of the Architect.
D4.3. PLACING OF CONCRETE
D4.3.1. GENERAL
All concrete shall be placed in accordance with A.S. 3600, A.S. 1379 & A.S. 1510. Concrete shall be so
placed as to avoid segregation. The placing of concrete in a section shall be carried on continuously
until that section is completed, provided that when unforeseen circumstances prevent this, a
construction joint as specified, shall be made and care shall be taken that concrete which is partially set
in the form is not subsequently displaced. During the placing operation the concrete shall be thoroughly
compacted and shall be worked around any reinforcement and embedded fixtures into the corners of
the formwork.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
Compaction of all insitu concrete shall be carried out in the best possible manner, so as to produce a
homogeneous concrete of uniform density and of the required strength. Immersion type vibrators shall
be used to assist in the compaction of the concrete. Immersion vibrators shall not be held against forms
or reinforcing steel, nor shall they be used for flowing or spreading concrete across a horizontal surface.
Experienced operators and supervision by the Contractor shall be provided and the forms shall be
designed to withstand the action of the vibrators.
D4.3.2. RESTRICTIONS
Time - all concrete shall be in its final position within 90 minutes of the beginning of the hydration
process.
Height - concrete shall not be dropped freely from a height in excess of 3 M. It may only be placed into
greater depth if the arrangements to prevent the segregation of the materials has been approved by the
Architects.
Weather - all concrete work in hot or cold weather conditions shall comply with the restrictions and
requirements of this Specification and the appropriate Australian Standards.
Suspended slabs and slabs on ground designed as suspended shall be placed in the one operation
between approved construction or control joints (if any) as shown on the detail drawings
D4.3.3. PUMPING
Submit the following information for consideration and approval prior to pumping any concrete:
 Description of equipment.
 Concrete mix design including slump and maximum aggregate size.
 Stand by arrangements.
D4.3.4. COMPACTION
Care shall be taken in all cases to ensure that the reinforcement is thoroughly surrounded by concrete
and that no voids or cavities are left. Concrete shall be compacted by means of approved high
frequency mechanical vibrators of the immersion type.
Vibrators shall be used in sufficient numbers to keep pace with the rate of placing of the concrete, and
shall be handled by trained operators to ensure that the pattern of inserting the vibrator produces even
and regular compaction. Vibrators shall be sized to suit the available spacing in respect of formwork,
reinforcing steel and all other details.
D4.3.5. JOINTS
Control joints shall be formed where detailed on the drawings and shall include all work associated with
the supply of jointing materials and the making and forming of all joints
Joints to the ground slab shall generally consist of two basic types: -
1. Formed joints using precut Wrimcofoam or equal approved closed cell 10mm wide polyethylene
sheet with a 12mm deep precut top section. This section shall be removed prior to placing the
joint sealants. Joint width shall be 10mm and the top section of the joint shall be completed
using Vulkem 230 or equal sealant applied in accordance with the recommendations of Wrimco.
Formed joint shall be installed to all external edges of the floor slabs as detailed.
2. Sawn joints shall be sawn in the slabs as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to
permit sawing without damage by blade action to the surface or to concrete adjacent to the joint,
and not later than 24 hours after casting. Light, not excessive, ravelling along the joint edge is
permissible (this usually indicates that sawing is being performed at the earliest possible time).
The sawing of a joint shall be stopped if a crack develops ahead of the saw, and the saw operator shall
continue immediately with the next joint and the crack shall be routed and sealed with liquid sealer.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
Joints shall be flushed with water and/or air under pressure immediately after sawing to remove all
residue before it hardens. Immediately following sawing and cleaning, the joints shall be covered with
wet hessian, waterproof paper, or plastic until curing is complete. Curing compound shall not be used
until sealing is complete. Sawn joins shall be thoroughly cleaned and sealed with Vulkem 230 or similar
approved Sealant following the completion of the curing period.
If placing is interrupted by unforeseen circumstances, it shall not re-commence until the surfaces of the
placed concrete have been adequately prepared to the satisfaction of the Architect, so that the joints will
develop the necessary strength.
Before fresh concrete is placed against hardened concrete at construction joints or before concrete is
placed against concrete surfaces previously constructed, the joint surfaces of the hardened concrete
shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned so that all loose or soft material, all foreign matter, laitance
and any oily substances, curing compounds, or substances likely to affect adhesion, are removed.
Immediately, before the fresh concrete is placed, the joint surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted with clean
water and shall not be allowed to dry out before the placing of fresh concrete.
D4.3.6. DEFECTIVE PLACEMENT

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for employing effective methods of mixing, placing, protecting
and curing concrete and for the adequacy of false work and forms. Approval of any such work or
methods by the Architect will be tentative only and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.
Concrete which is not placed and completed in accordance with this Specification or which, in the
opinion of the Architect, is defective shall be removed and replaced to his satisfaction at the Contractor's
expense.
D4.4. CURING
D4.4.1. GENERAL
Curing shall commence immediately the surfaces are sufficiently hard as not to be damaged by carrying
out the curing method. The Contractor shall ensure that the curing arrangements remain effective
during the entire curing period and shall carry out periodic checking during non-working times and
remedy any curing methods, which have become ineffective. All formwork left in place during the curing
period and subjected to direct exposure to the sun shall be keep wet continuously to eliminate heat
transfer to the concrete. All concrete surfaces shall be adequately cured in accordance with the
applicable documents for at least seven (7) days.
D4.4.2. HORIZONTAL SURFACES

All surfaces shall be kept ponded with water to a depth of 25mm unless otherwise approved. The
Contractor shall be responsible for constructing and maintaining retaining dams for this purpose and
shall be responsible for any damages arising therefrom. Alternately, curing shall consist of wet hessian
or an impervious membrane laid continuously over the entire concrete surface securely held in position
and weighted down to prevent lifting.
D4.4.3. CURING COMPOUNDS

The use of curing compounds shall be subject to the Architect's approval. Prior to the application of
curing compounds, the Contractor shall provide the following information in relation to the proposed
curing compound.
 Brand name of compound.

 Chemical composition.
 Manufacturer.
 Rate of application
 Areas to be treated
 The effect the compound will have on subsequent surface applications
 Generally the compound shall comply with ASTM C309
 Wax or oil-based compounds will not be approved

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
D4.4.4. INADEQUATE CURING

Inadequate or insufficient curing may result in irreparable damage to the concrete structure. If, in the
Architect's opinion, the curing methods are inadequate, the Contractor shall modify the methods as
directed.
D4.4.5. LOAD ON CURING CONCRETE

Where the passing of traffic and the storage of materials cannot be avoided in the interest of Works
progress, approved precautions shall be taken to avoid any damage to the concrete.
D4.5. DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

Any portion of the concrete placed in the work may be classed as defective at the sole discretion of the
Architect if any of the following faults are applicable to that portion of the Works:
 The materials used do not conform with the acceptance criteria as specified and defined in
the applicable documents.
 The Contractor did not obtain the prior approval of materials and work.
 The finished concrete dimensions do not conform with those shown on the drawings
subject to the tolerances as specified.
 There is evidence of segregation of the components within the concrete mix, or air voids in
the concrete.
 There is evidence of damage to the concrete caused by removal of formwork, or operation
of plant or storage or transporting of materials.
 There are shrinkage cracks in the concrete caused by insufficient curing or any other
reason.
 It is porous, segregated or honeycombed.
 A construction joint has been required at a location or made in a manner not in accordance
with the drawings and Specification as a result of an interruption to casting of concrete.
 Concrete or embedded reinforcement has been disturbed after the initial set has taken
place.
 The strength finish required has not been achieved.
 The strength test result is below the specified strength.
 The concrete is otherwise defective or does not meet the requirements of this Specification.
Portions of the work having defective concrete shall be rectified or completely removed and replaced by
the Contractor at his own expense, under the direction and to the complete satisfaction of the Architect.
Repairs shall be subject to all specified requirements including curing. Repairable defects shall be
patched immediately after removal of forms, subject to agreement by the Architect. The method of
patching shall be agreed with and approved by the Architect.
D4.6. SURFACE FINISHES
D4.6.1. GENERAL
Concrete surfaces or finishes which do not achieve the standards and tolerances set out in A.S.3600,
A.S.3610 or as specified shall be classed as defective concrete. Surface repair work of any kind will not
be permitted unless approved in writing by the Architect and shall only be given for non-critical surfaces
such as for Class 4 formwork. The recommended practices in A.S.3610 for achieving colour control shall
be mandatory.
D4.6.2. UNFORMED SURFACE FINISHES

Concrete surfaces such as tops of sills, and horizontal offsets adjacent to formed surfaces shall be
floated and trowelled as necessary to the same texture as the adjacent formed surface.
D4.6.3. SCREEDED FINISH

Concrete surfaces which are to receive an applied bonded finish, unless otherwise specified or
scheduled, shall, after proper compaction be screeded to the required levels and wood floated to an
even uniform surface within the tolerances specified for rendered surfaces in AS 1509. Board-on-edge
roughening and pitting of the surface before the concrete has set will not be permitted.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
Composition
The concrete floor finish / screed at Ground Floor level FF02 shall be Self Consolidating Concrete (SCC)
with Resin Polish Finish as below. 2 layers Insulation Type 02 Bradford 'Thermofoil' reflective sheeting or
equal approved may be installed instead of underslab foam Insulation Type 01, with reflective side up
between FF02 and structural slab substrate.
Note: Hydronic system, in floor heating cables and mats and set downs to accommodate other finish
types are to be allowed for as per Architectural drawings to FF02. The screed is to be generally 70mm
thick to Engineers Specifications.
The screed mix of FF02 shall be:

 GP Cement with 9% black oxide and with 7-14mm black aggregate. Samples to be
approved by architect prior to works commencing.
Additives
Recommended additives as follows:
 Replace cement with White Silica Fume (or 10% of binder)
 Polycaboxylate super plasticiser
 De-foaming agent
 Water Reducing Agent (HDWR)
 Viscosity modifying agent (VMA)
 H2O no greater than 0.35 or at dose as recommended by the manufacturer.
Ample concrete needs to be batch delivered to continuous intervals. Screed to be poured in one
continuous form. Finish with Stainless Metal Blades. Cold joints will not be accepted.
Curing
Cover screed with GeoTEX fabric for 24 hours with running sprinkler.
Polish
The polishing sequence of the screed finish is to be as follows:
Stage 1 (within 72 hours of screed pour)

1. Pre-polish using twister system pads in colour sequence
2. Apply Colloidial Silica Densifyer to manufacturer's specifications
3. Pre seal with Aqua wet look penetrator
4. Re-cover with GeoTEX fabric and 5mm ply protective covering for duration of construction.
Stage 2 (Pre fit off)
5. Apply Colloidial Silica Densifyer to manufacturer's specifications
6. Re-polish entire floor area with full resin pad in sequence order. No metal diamonds to be used
7. Apply Lithium Densifyer to manufacturer's specifications
Stage 3 (Prior to Hand over)
8. Pre-polish using twister system pads in colour sequence
9. Apply Lithium Densifyer to manufacturer's specifications and buff with white 40% gloss buff pad.
D4.6.4. MONOLITHIC FINISHES

Monolithic Finishes shall be completed in one continuous operation to a uniform surface to the required
level within a tolerance of 1 in 1000. After proper compaction and screeding the concrete surface shall
be monolithically finished by the application of a basic floating process commenced within two hours of
the initial pour followed by a smoothing process. The basic floating process consists of thoroughly
working the concrete surface with machine floats and hand finishing with steel trowels where necessary
to provide a uniform, smooth and medium grained textured surface to the slopes, elevations and
tolerances as shown and specified. The use of bluestone dust and/or cement driers shall not be
permitted.
1. Steel Trowelled Monolithic Finish shall be applied after the concrete surface has hardened
sufficiently to prevent fine material from working to the surface. The surface shall be brought to
a hard, dense, smooth finish, free from defects and blemishes. This operation may be
combined with the basic machine floating process subject to the Architect's approval.
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
2. Wood Floated Monolithic Finish shall be applied to all areas to be tiled after the concrete surface
has hardened sufficiently to prevent fine material from working to the surface. The surface shall
be brought to a hard, dense, even slightly textured surface free from defects and blemishes as a
basic floating process, without the use of steel floats.
3. Broomed Finishes shall be provided to trafficable sloping surfaces where specified. After
finishing the concrete with wooden floats, horizontal grooves be made across the surface using
a stiff yard broom or rake to provide a non slip surface.
D4.6.5. EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISHES

Remove, Excavate & level to form new driveway replacing existing driveway from existing crossover and
including proposed carport. Final levels and setout of driveways, to be confirmed with architect on site
prior to excavation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
D5. GENERAL MATERIALS
D5.1. GENERAL
The standard and storage of all materials shall conform with the relevant applicable Australian Standard
unless otherwise shown on the drawings and/or specified. Cement and aggregate shall be stored
separately in a manner such as will prevent deterioration and the introduction of foreign matter. Any
materials, which have deteriorated or have been damaged shall not be used for construction purposes.
D5.2. CEMENT
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement complying with A.S. 3972. The minimum cement content for
all concrete shall comply with the requirements of AS 3600 and as set out in Section C14 of the
structural engineering drawings to achieve the strength (MPa) and slump levels shown
D5.3. AGGREGATE
All aggregate shall be dense natural material in compliance with A.S. 2758.1 except where specifically
described otherwise for some special requirement or finish. The continuous gradation for all concrete
aggregate shall be based on a maximum aggregate size of 20mm and this size shall not be varied
without the Architect's approval. Where differing size aggregate is considered necessary by the
Contractor, an appropriately modified mix design shall be submitted for approval which will only be
given where it can be substantiated that the specified size of the aggregate is unsuitable under the
circumstances. Aggregates used shall be free from deleterious materials likely to affect adversely the
strength or durability of the concrete or corrode the steel reinforcement. Under no circumstances
whatsoever shall slag type aggregate be used.
D5.4. READY MIXED CONCRETE

All ingredients for ready mixed concrete shall be weigh batched and completely mixed before loading
into agitator type trucks. Delivery of concrete shall be in accordance with Australian Standard Code A.S.
1379 'Ready Mixed Concrete'. Under no circumstances will the addition of water be permitted after the
batch of concrete has left the plant. Each load of ready mixed concrete shall have a Delivery Docket
from the supplier to show the time at which the concrete was placed in the agitator barrel, the specified
strength and slump of the concrete. The Delivery Docket will also state the following information:
- Date and time of dispatch - Ordered strength in f’cs at 28 days

- Delivery truck number - Cement content per cubic metre
- Number of cubic metres in load - Max. aggregate size
D5.5. WATER
Water shall be free from matter harmful to concrete and reinforcement. In particular, it shall be free from
vegetable or organic matters and from acid or alkaline substances in solution or suspension.
D5.6. SLUMP & WATER/CEMENT RATIO

The slump of concrete at the time of placing in the work as determined by the Architect or his authorised
representative using the procedure in A.S. 1012, Part 3 shall not exceed the slumps indicated on the
drawings or 80mm. Concrete not complying with the above shall be liable to rejection.
D5.7. ADMIXTURES
Admixtures are expressly prohibited unless special consent for their use is given in writing by the
Architect.
D5.8. TESTING
Concrete testing shall be carried out in accordance with A.S. 3600, Clause 20.7 except as varied by this
Specification. The cost of all testing shall be borne by the Contractor. The frequency of sampling and
age at which testing is required shall be varied at the Architect's discretion.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
D5.9. FORMWORK
Excepting the undersides of slabs, foundations, ground beams or similar components which are to be
placed on the ground or on any of the specified underlay, barrier or membrane, all concrete shall be
placed in formwork unless specified otherwise. The design and construction of all formwork shall
conform to the requirements of A.S. 3600 and A.S. 3610 or as otherwise specified.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the sufficiency of the whole of the formwork. Temporary
openings shall be provided at the base of all forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate
cleaning and inspection immediately prior to placement of concrete. The plywood forms shall be in large
sheets and laid out with a minimum number of tight fitting joints in a pattern which shall be approved by
the Architect and which shall be framed and formed to prevent deflection and distortion. Edges of
surfaces that will remain exposed to view shall have 25 x 25 chamfers.
D5.10. REINFORCEMENTS
D5.10.1. GENERAL
All reinforcement shall be free of rust and cut, bent and delivered to the site and fixed and spliced in
accordance with AS 600 subject to additional requirements as specified. Reinforcing bars shall be of the
types, grades, sizes and dimensions, and shall be bent to the shapes as shown on the drawings and as
specified. Bundles of fabricated bars shall be securely bound and legibly tagged before delivery to the
site. The preparation of bending schedules is not mandatory and, when required, shall be prepared at
the Contractor's expense.
D5.10.2. FIXING
Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed as shown on the drawings. If the tolerances are exceeded, the
reinforcement shall be relocated or modified before the placement of concrete. All reinforcement shall be
securely fixed in position by means of approved stirrups, stools, chairs, hurdles, distribution bars,
approved concrete or plastic blocks or similar, to prevent displacement before or during the
transporting, placing and compacting of concrete. Supports shall be located at max 750 mm centres.
The use of wood, brick, stone or similar unapproved materials for spacers or chairs shall not be
permitted and any stocks of unapproved supports shall be removed from site. Supports and spacers
made entirely from plastic shall be used in all walls and shall be secured to the reinforcement. Where
steel supports are approved, they shall be plastic tipped.
All reinforcement shall be securely tied at laps, at alternate intersections in slab reinforcement, and all
intersections in the case of ligatures and stirrups with 1.2mm annealed soft steel wire. Where splices for
reinforcing bars in excess of those shown are found necessary, the Contractor shall submit the details of
proposed splices to the Architect and obtain approval before placement of the reinforcing bars. Where
lap splicing is not permitted by the Architect bars in tension shall be full-strength welded. Cutting of
reinforcement for other trades shall not be permitted except by special permission of the Architect in
which case, additional reinforcing bars shall be inserted as directed.
D5.10.3. MECHANICAL SPLICES

Where mechanical splices are shown on the drawings, or where their use has been approved, they shall
be 'G-Loc' mechanical splices installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The end
bearing surfaces of bars to be spliced shall be saw cut at 90 ° to the axis of the bar with a maximum
tolerance of 2 °. When positioning the bars for splicing, the best possible fit within the tolerance shall be
obtained by rotating the bar about its axis. Reinforcing bars may be tack welded subject to the
Architect's approval. Such tack welding shall be carried out by qualified and experienced operators and
will be subject to testing at the Contractor's expense.
D5.10.4. INSPECTION AND APPROVALS

When the fixing of the reinforcement has been entirely completed, it shall be inspected by the Architect
and the Contractor shall give 24 hours notice in this respect. Subsequent work shall not proceed unless
the Architect has approved the in place reinforcement.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
D5.11. CONCRETE
D5.11.1. CONCRETE PROPERTIES

The structural design requires the concrete to have minimum characteristics as shown on the drawings.
D5.11.2. MIX DESIGN

Submit mix designs including the mixes necessary for pumping (if approved) showing necessary details
of all ingredients and their proportions to the Architect for approval. Irrespective of the compressive
strength specified or any strength results obtained, no concrete shall contain less than the minimum
cement content shown on the drawings.
D5.11.3. SUPPLY
All concrete shall be ready mixed concrete supplied by an approved firm and delivered in accordance
with the requirements of A.S. 1379. Site mixed concrete shall be subject to approval, which shall only be
given to provide for emergencies and for non-critical applications. The approval shall be accompanied
by detailed mixing Specifications, which shall then govern all approved site mixing.
D5.11.4. TESTING
All concrete testing shall be carried out in accordance with A.S. 1012 & A.S. 3600 by an approved
independent N.A.T.A. testing laboratory. Certified records of the results of all compressive tests shall be
submitted to the Architect immediately they are available after the cylinders have been broken. As a
variation to the requirements in respect of the number of standard cylinders to be taken, three cylinders
shall be taken from each sample.
One of these cylinders shall be tested at seven days and the results made available to the Architect
within 24 hours of that seven day test having been carried out. The other cylinders being tested at
28 days, with results forwarded to the Architect immediately they are available. If the results of
compressive strength tests do not comply with the requirements of A.S. 3600 at least 3 samples for
check testing may be cut from the structural concrete and tested. In the event of failure of any two such
pieces to reach the specified design strength, the Architect may require additional curing, strengthening
or replacement as set out in Clause D.9 `Defective Concrete'.
D5.12. CONCRETE ELEMENTS
D5.12.1. DRAINAGE AND SERVICE PITS

Provide all pre-cast concrete pits for all services as specified. Provide covers as described to suit level
anticipated in area of pit location. Sizes and other details of all pits are to be as described on Civil
Drawings. Provide SW and AG drains as shown on the drawings. Coordinate pit construction with
plumber and waterproof membrane subcontractors.
D5.12.2. SLABS
Refer to Engineers drawings for extent and location of reinforced concrete slabs. Set finished level of
slab to take selected finishes (including timber flooring direct fixed to slab, tiles, carpet & burnished
concrete screed) prior to construction. Confirm set down depth required for all selected finishes prior to
the establishment of all finished levels. Allow for all set-downs, rebates and cut-outs for all services
including set downs required for in floor heating. Allow graded concrete screeds under wet areas with
tiled floor finish. Screeds to allow fall to shower drains and floor wastes as indicated on drawings. Also
allow for all necessary penetrations and set downs required for showers and shower waste channel and
other drains.
D5.12.3. GATE & RETAINING WALL FOOTINGS

Allow for excavation and pouring of concrete pad footings to all fencing. Concrete footing to all gates
and associated garden retaining walls as per Engineers specifications and as outlined in this
specification.
D5.12.4. EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT BASES

Supply and install 200mm thick reinforced thick paving slab with edge beams to allow stiff base suitable
for External AC and Pool Equipment as located on Proposed Site Plan WD02.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
D5.12.5. CROSSOVER
Crossover to be protected and retained. If damaged during construction it is to be reinstalled at
contractors cost including pedestrian footpath in strict accordance with local authority requirements.
Builder to be responsible for obtaining all crossover permits. Confirm grade of crossover with owner
prior to pouring to ensure selected car does not bottom out.
D5.12.6. SERVICES
Refer to Electrical and Services Plans for indicative location of selected slab & electrical components or
penetrations.
Refer to Civil drawings for indicative locations of Hydraulic and Stormwater Services & penetrations.
Refer to Pool Consultant for indicative location of pool services fittings and penetrations.
All cabling, conduits and chasing to be provisioned and all cut outs and recesses allowed for
installations of all required fixtures and fittings.
D6. MATERIAL TABLES
D6.1. CONCRETE FLOORS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 1.1 Floor Types.

FLOOR TYPE 2 Reinforced Concrete Slab on Compacted Fill 1.1 - Floor Types
D6.2. WATERPROOF MEMBRANES TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 1.4 Waterproofing.

WATERPROOF Vapour Barrier to underside of Concrete Ground slabs 1.4 - Waterproofing
MEMBRANE 1
WATERPROOF Wet Area Waterproofing System (To be used in External 1.4 - Waterproofing
MEMBRANE 2 Terrace)
WATERPROOF Pool and Retaining Wall Tanking as required. 1.4 - Waterproofing
MEMBRANE 5
D6.3. CONCRETE LANDSCAPE ELEMENTS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.3 External Items

FLOOR TYPE 1 Reinforced Concrete Paving Slab on Ground 1.1 - Floor Types
D6.4. CONCRETE FORMED PITS


PIT Concrete Pit with GATIC style L/D Gal Steel Grate Lid/Insert or 2.5 - Drainage
similar approved

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CONCRETE
D6.5. INTERNAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 4.1 Internal Floor Finishes. Section
R - External And Internal Finishes of this specification.

FF02 Burnished Concrete Screed with hydronic heating. 4.1 - Internal Finishes
D6.6. EXTERNAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.1 External Floor Finishes.
Section R - External And Internal Finishes of this specification

PV01 Exposed Aggregate Concrete to Driveway 3.1 - External Finishes
D7. COMPLETION
All formwork, excess materials, debris and waste to be removed from site. All drains and pits to be left
clean and free of debris. Complete work in accordance with instructions and written variation orders.
Contractor to provide a Warranty covering satisfactory performance of the complete installation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section E
STRUCTURAL STEEL
E. STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
E1. SCOPE OF WORKS
E1.1. GENERAL
Allow for the supply, fabrication, delivery and erection of all structural steelwork as shown and in
accordance with all requirements of the Architectural Drawings, the Structural Engineer's Drawings and
all associated detail drawings. The structural steelwork shall include all structural beams, channels,
columns, plates, cleats, bolts, washers, nuts and all steelwork, mounting, fixing, erecting and painting
required for the completion of the Works of this contract, including provision for the fixing of allied timber
members.
E1.2. EXTENT OF WORK

The structural steel work in this section shall include: :
 Reinforcing to all concrete, footings, walls and slabs.

 All steel columns, floor beams and roof beams to the House.
E2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
The materials, methods, techniques and workmanship used in the supply, fabrication and erection of
structural steelwork shall conform with the applicable requirements of current editions of Australian
Standard Specifications and Codes, including the following:
E2.1. Codes
AS 4100 Steel Structures Code
AS 1511 High Strength Structural Bolting Code
AS 1538 Cold-formed Steel Structures Code.
AS 1554 Code for Welding in Building.
AS 1796 Certification of Welders.
AS 2327 Composite Construction Code.
E2.2. Materials
AS 3678 Hot Rolled Structural Steel Plates, Floor Plates and Slabs.
AS 3679 Hot Rolled Structural Steel Bars and Sections.
AS 1397 Hot-dipped Zinc coated or Aluminium / Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet in Coil and Cut
lengths.
E2.3. Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Washers
AS 1214 Hot Dip Galvanised Coating on threaded fasteners.

AS 1110 ISO Metric Hexagon Precision Bolts and Screws.
AS 1111 ISO Metric Hexagon Commercial Bolts and Screws.
AS 1252 General Grade High-strength Steel Bolts with associated Nuts and Washers
for Structural Engineering (ISO Metric Series).
BS 3410 Metal Washers for General Engineering Purposes.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page E-1 of 5

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
STRUCTURAL STEEL
E2.4. Electrodes
AS 1553 Covered Electrodes for Metal-arc Welding of Medium High Tensile Structural
Steel.
BS 639 Low Carbon Steel Covered Electrodes for Manual Metal-arc welding.
E2.5. Surface Treatment

AS 1627 Code of Practice for Preparation and Pre-treatment of Metal Surfaces
AS 1650 Galvanised Coating on Ferrous Articles.
AS 2310 Glossary of Paint and Painting Terms.
AS 2312 Guide to the protection of Iron and Steel
AS 2603 Paints for Steel Structures.
E2.6. Availability of Codes

One copy of each of AS 1250 and AS 1554 shall be kept available for reference in the Contractors' site
office and the steel fabricators' Workshop.
E3. WORKMANSHIP
All structural steel works shall be undertaken and completed by approved, competent, qualified first
class trades persons, licensed and/or registered as required for the particular service to be performed.
E4. GENERAL CLAUSES & MATERIALS
E4.1. STEEL
Unless otherwise specified or permitted by the Architect all steel used in the Works shall be of Australian
manufacture, conforming with the applicable requirements of Australian Standard Specifications and free
from damage and other unacceptable defects.
E4.2. SUBSTITUTIONS
If steel sections of the required sizes are not available, the Architect may permit substitutions from
available stocks. As soon as practicable after commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall notify
the Architect of any steel sizes which are not available and shall submit a list of possible substitutions
which could maintain structural adequacy and Architectural detailing. No substitution of steel members
shall be made without the Architect's written approval. No variation or extensions of time will be
permitted as a result of the adoption of any substitutions for designed sections.
E4.3. CERTIFICATES
Steel manufacturers' certificates, indicating the composition and tensile properties of the steel supplied,
shall be submitted to the Architect. All costs, fees and charges for certification or testing incurred shall
be paid by the Contractor and the reports submitted to the Architect as soon as they are available. If the
test reports indicate that any or all of the proposed steel members are unsuitable for the intended use,
the affected members shall be rejected and other members of satisfactory quality and strength supplied
instead.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
STRUCTURAL STEEL
E4.4. DEFECTIVE MATERIALS

Inspections by the Architect shall not, in any way, relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing
steelwork of the required quality. Defective materials and unsatisfactory steelwork shall be liable to
rejection at any time prior to final acceptance of the work. The Contractor shall remove all rejected
materials and workmanship and supply new materials and reconstruct the steelwork to a standard of
quality satisfactory to the Architect. No variation or extensions of time will be permitted as a result of
rejection of materials or workmanship.
E4.5. FABRICATION
All steel structural members shall be cut to required sizes, fabricated and prepared in accordance with
the requirements of the Structural and Architectural drawings and as necessary for the satisfactory
construction and completion of the Works. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the steel
members are correctly aligned, true to shape and dimensions, and free from damage and unacceptable
defects. Unless additional splices are authorised in writing, members shall be spliced only in positions
indicated by the approved shop drawings
E4.6. TOLERANCES
Steelwork shall be fabricated within the permissible tolerances specified in AS 1250 and any further
tolerances or modifications indicated on the structural drawings.
Where a clearance exceeds 2 mm, the Architect shall be notified and may, in certain circumstances,
approve the insertion of suitable drilled mild steel packing pieces during assembly and fixing.
E4.7. STRAIGHTENING
If straightening is necessary or specified it shall be done by methods which will not injure the metal or
the surface coating. It if is necessary to heat metal for straightening, heating shall not be to a higher
temperature than 650 degrees C. After heating, cool the metal slowly. Galvanised sections will be
subject to regalvanising after any heat treatment and as directed by the Architect.
E4.8. CUTTING
All steel members, brackets, plates and other components shall be accurately cut to size and shape by
sawing, shearing or cropping. Gas cutting may be permitted provided that full sizes of sections are
maintained without distortion or rough edges. If any cutting methods are considered to be
unsatisfactory for a particular detail, other approved methods shall be adopted as directed. All rough
sheared and cropped edges shall be ground off to a neat smooth finish, and shall be free from distortion
where metal-to-metal contact of parts is required. All cutting to be kept to a minimum in marine
environment. Where cuts to galvanized steelwork are unavoidable, the subsequent damage to the zinc
coating shall be repaired by the application of a prime coat followed by two coats of an approved zinc
rich paint applied by brush to clean surfaces to prevent any corrosion.
E4.9. DRILLING AND PUNCHING

All holes shall be drilled. Flame cutting shall not be permitted. Slotted holes for bolts shall be provided
only in positions designated on the structural drawings. Holes in members up to an including 10 mm
thickness may be punched full size, provided that the diameter of the punching die is not more than 2
mm larger than the nominal diameter of the bolts, and that surface depressions are not formed around
the holes. The maximum taper or draw of punched holes shall conform with the following table:
Material Thickness Increase in Diameter due to Draw

up to 6 mm 1 mm
6 mm to 10 mm 2 mm
All drilling and punching to be kept to a minimum in marine environment. Where drilling and punching to
galvanized steelwork is unavoidable, the subsequent damage to the zinc coating shall be repaired by
the application of a prime coat followed by two coats of an approved zinc rich paint applied by brush to
clean surfaces to prevent any corrosion.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
STRUCTURAL STEEL
E4.10. WELDING
All welding and preparation of joints shall conform with the applicable requirements of AS 1554 and
AS 1250. The fabrication of welded connections shall be performed in a manner, which will avoid or
minimise distortion. All Welding to be kept to a minimum in marine environment. Where welding to
galvanized steelwork is unavoidable, the subsequent damage to the zinc coating shall be repaired by
the application of a prime coat followed by two coats of an approved zinc rich paint applied by brush to
clean surfaces to prevent any corrosion.
E4.11. BOLTING
Unless specified or noted otherwise, all bolts used in the steelwork shall be commercial bolts
conforming with AS 4100, fitted with nuts conforming with AS 1112. Holding down bolts and nuts shall
also conform with the applicable requirements of the above standards. All bolts washers and nuts shall
be hot dipped galvanised. Select bolts for correct length. No bolts shall be cut. No zinc plated bolts,
washers, or nuts shall be used on any part of the works or any components fabricated for the works. All
commercial bolts shall be fitted with approved type washers. Tapered or bevelled washers shall be used
where the surfaces of the bolted parts are not normal to the axes of the bolts. After assembly and
adjustment of the connected members, the bolts shall be tightened to ensure rigid jointing. The bolts
shall be long enough to project through the nuts by at least one thread.
E4.12. SHOP ASSEMBLY

The component parts of steel fabrications shall be assembled and connected in a manner which
conforms with the requirements of the structural drawings, and which ensures that they will withstand
twisting, warping, bending or overstressing during transporting and handling. Temporary braces shall
be provided where necessary to prevent possible damage. All members weighing 2 tonnes and heavier
shall be fitted with suitable clearly marked lifting points to facilitate correct handling. Where required,
cambers shall be formed as indicated on the structural drawings. All match marks shall be removed after
completion of assembly and fixing of connections.
E4.13. GALVANISING
All exposed steelwork shall be hot-dip galvanised in accordance with the requirements of AS 1650 -
Galvanised coatings on ferrous articles. All steelwork shall be free of loose rust, loose mill scale, dirt,
soil and grease prior to galvanising. Steelwork shall be galvanised by the hot-dipped process such that
the zinc coating shall be metallurgically bonded to the base metal and shall provide a tough, durable
and continuous coating. The coating shall be of uniform thickness not less than 0.086 mm
corresponding to a coverage of 0.61 kg of zinc per square metre of surface area and shall be subject to
testing by the methods specified in AS 1650.
To ensure optimum results steel shall be abrasive blast cleaned to Class Sa.3 , approximate profile
height 60 um, using chilled cast iron grit or ilemenite sand, flash pickled after abrasive cleaning. Allow to
remain in the galvanising bath after “boil off” i.e. the time taken to reach the galvanising bath operating
temperature. All welding shall be completed prior to galvanising.
Galvanising shall be carried out in such a manner so as to prevent undue distortion of the fabricated
member or component. Provide holes in hollow sections for galvanising. Locate holes to ensure water
and salt laden air cannot enter hollow sections when stored on site after erection and installation as part
of the structural frame of the residence. Avoid Gal process for reactive steels containing silicon, or
combination of both silicon and phosphorous
All members and components which exhibit distortion or twist after galvanising, in excess of the
tolerances set out in AS 4100, shall be straightened to the satisfaction of the Architect or shall be
replaced. Where galvanised steelwork is required to be field welded, the subsequent damage to the
zinc coating shall be repaired by the application of a prime coat followed by two coats of an approved
zinc rich paint applied by brush to clean surfaces, all to the satisfaction of the Architect. All galvanised
steelwork shall be connected with galvanised nut, bolts and washers galvanised in accordance with AS
1214.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
STRUCTURAL STEEL
E4.14. ERECTION
All structural steelwork shall be assembled and installed in correct position in accordance with the
requirements of AS 1250. The Contractor shall ensure that the steelwork is delivered to the site in
planned sequence to ensure correct order of construction.
E4.15. STEEL LINTELS

All lintels to both external and internal openings shall be hot dip galvanised. Lintels to be as shown on
the structural and architectural drawings and as follows subject to loadings above:
 Openings up to 950mm 75 x 10 MS bar, 100mm min. bearing each end.

 Openings up to 1200mm 75 x 75 x 6 MS angle, 100mm min. bearing each end.
E4.16. JOINERY STEEL

Where steel is specified to be part of joinery units or fascia plates internally, the sheet steel shall be flat
without distortion or twisting and free of loose rust, loose mill steel, dirt, soil and grease and undergo an
abrasive blast clean prior to powdercoating. 3mm express joins will be tolerated to ensure plate and
sheet metal is installed as required true and level with no imperfections. Architect to approve location
express joins.
The Steel Structure of the Kitchen Island Bench if required is to be confirmed as adequate by the
Contractor for the intended use.
E5. MATERIAL TABLES
E5.1. STEEL STRUCTURE

All exposed Structural and Non-Structural steel, except when used in joinery items is to be Hot Dip
Galvanised (HDG). All exposed Steel to be HDG and painted with selected metal etch primer. (Refer
Section U -Painting of this specification)
All bolts, cast in plates and connections are to be verified and installed to avoid clashes with selected
window frames and detailing. All structural steel is to allow for necessary penetrations required for
services installation as required.
E6. COMPLETION
Remove all metal filings and rust-promoting scraps upon completion of steelwork installation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section F
MASONRY
F. MASONRY
F1. SCOPE OF WORKS
F1.1. GENERAL
Work required under this section includes the supply of all materials, accessories and the laying of all
masonry walls as drawn and as specified herein including all solid block, block veneer, brick veneer,
solid brick, Dincel walls and fences as specified. Contractor to establish proposed slab rebate depth,
window heights and wall heights to be approved by Architect. Note: All steel reinforcing is not to
remain exposed and is to be adequately covered pre and post pouring of concrete to avoid corrosion
of any kind.
F1.2. EXTENT OF WORK
The masonry work in this section shall include:
 All brick infill, brick veneer and solid masonry walls and footings.
 New face brickwork.
 Repair to existing brick walls and footings.
F2. STANDARDS & REGULATION
Comply with applicable portions of the current Standards including the following, unless Drawings or
Specifications require a higher standard.
AS 1315 Portland cement

AS 1316 Masonry cement (metric units)
AS 1500 Concrete Blocks for Buildings
AS 1640 Rules for Masonry in Buildings
AS 1672 Building limes.
AS 2699 Wall ties for masonry construction.
AS 2701 Methods for sampling and testing mortar,
AS 2975 Accessories for masonry construction.
AS 3700 Masonry in buildings (known as the S.A.A.Masonry Code).
BS 1014 Pigments for Portland cement and Portland cement products.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page F-1 of 6

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MASONRY
F3. WORKMANSHIP
All masonry works shall be undertaken and completed by approved, competent, qualified first class
trades persons, licensed and/or registered as required for the particular service to be performed.
F3.1. GAUGE
Build brick work to uniform gauge as per AS 3700. All joints shall be ruled and of uniform width
nominally 10mm wide ±2mm tolerance.
F3.2. BOND
All work, unless otherwise specified or directed, shall be in stretcher bond with ruled joints to the
approval of the Architect.
F3.3. CUTTING
The cutting of bricks shall be reduced to a minimum by the skilful setting out of the brick work so as to
avoid irregular or broken bond, particularly at openings and in piers. bricks shall only be cut with a
masonry saw provided there is no shattering of the brick.
F3.4. CHASES & SLEEVES

The cutting of holes and chases shall be carried out only by the brick-laying subcontractor. So far as
is practicable, sleeves and chases shall be provided during the erection of the brick walls in order to
minimize cutting away and making good for late services.
F3.5. BUILDING IN
Build-in hoop iron straps, anchor bolts, plugs, fastenings, frames, fittings, etc., as work proceeds and
as required by the other trades. Build-in all ties and anchors to door frames and reinforcing etc. Build-
in all structural ties, bolts, lintels and metalwork as detailed for the completion of the Works and as
required by other trades. Door frame straps shall be built into brick work, be plumb. Coordinate with
other trades for building in PVC sleeves and other pipe work.
F3.6. SEALANT AND JOINTS

Sealant materials shall be Selleys, Dow Corning or other approved non-hardening silicone mastic as
recommended by the manufacturer for masonry jointing. Acrylic sealants will not be permitted. Seal
heads, jambs and door frames, finishing evenly and neatly using sealant coloured to match
surrounding masonry joints.
F3.7. LINTELS
Provide lintels to all openings as shown on drawings. Lintels for all openings shall be hot dip
galvanised and shall be of the sizes shown on the lintel schedule. Refer to structural drawings and
Metalworker section of this Specification.
F3.8. CLAY BRICKS

Set out brick work accurately, plumb, level and properly bonded. Carry walls up evenly, no part rising
more than 900mm above any other. Maintain plumb faces true to line with horizontal joints level and
perpends vertically over each other. Set out face work to avoid the off cut bricks at corners or
openings. All corners, jambs and reveals shall be true and plumb. All solid walls shall be bonded or
tied together. Fill with waterproof mortar as previously specified and as noted on Structural drawings.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MASONRY
F3.9. TANKING
An applied tanking system is required to all Masonry, retaining and garden bed walls. Tanking system
to be Bentonite installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as per engineers
specifications.
The system shall have current certification from the Australian Building Product and Systems
certification scheme as issued by the Australian Building Codes Board or have a current "Technical
Opinion" issued by the Australian Building Systems Appraisal Council (CSIRO) stating that the system
is suitable for use as a weatherproofing system for all external concrete and reinforced concrete walls
proposed for this Project. Particular attention on waterproofing to all cold joints.
Ensure all penetrations up stands, imperfections and connections are sealed with a waterproof sealing
membrane recommended by the tanking manufacturer such as polyethylene compound or similar.
Agi drains to run to base of footing of all retaining walls as per architectural details.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MASONRY
F4. GENERAL CLAUSES
F4.1. TESTS
Provide for sampling and testing materials as directed in accordance with AS 3700. Sampling and
testing will not exceed 0.1% of deliveries.
F4.2. SAMPLES
A sample range of blocks and bricks shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before deliveries
commence, and approved samples shall be held by both the Contractor and the Architect. All block
and brick walls shall be within the range of approved samples.
F4.3. INSPECTION
Give a minimum of one (1) days notice to the Architect to inspect the following stages of work:
 Completion of First Course Set out.

 D.P.C’ s and or weephole flashings
 Lintels
F5. GENERAL MATERIALS
F5.1. BLOCKWORK & BRICKWORK

All work to be carried out in accordance with AS 3700. Blocks and Bricks shall be unloaded carefully
from the trucks and stacked neatly on the site. Tipping of blocks/bricks will not be permitted. Stack
all blocks/bricks neatly on site on timber pallets free from contact with ground, Ensure that handling is
reduced to a minimum. Lay blocks/bricks on a full bed or mortar with perpends and other joints
completely filled with mortar. Joints shall be lightly raked after laying to the approval of the Architect.
Flick jointing will not be permitted. Finish with round tool to achieve a ruled joint to match approved
sample. All perpends shall be kept true, all angles plumb, and all courses horizontal. All blocks/bricks
shall be properly bonded.
Avoid all wood and concrete staining of block/brick work by protecting work with Sisalcraft or other
membrane during construction. Block/Brick work shall be set out and built according to the
dimensions, thickness and heights shown on the drawings and shall be built perfectly true in straight
lines and in level courses. Before commencing any block/brick work, consult with all other trades to
ensure that all required materials will be built into the work and properly set or provisions made to
place materials in position without damaging either that material or surrounding work. Leave openings
or cut-outs for, and make good, after other trades.
Blocks/Bricks shall be uniform in shape, colour, size and free from defects and shall be selected first
quality smooth faced as manufactured by Boral or equal approved and conforming to AS 3700.
F5.1.1. MORTAR
Water, sand, cement and hydrated lime shall conform to the relevant Australian Standard. Mortar shall
be accurately proportioned using gauge boxes, machine mixed and shall be used within 45 minutes of
mixing. Laticrete Latabond (for all walls) and water proofing agents (for all below ground block/brick
work) shall be added to the mortar mix as specified in this section.
Mortar shall be to match existing mortar where brickwork is part of a renovation or rectification to
existing walls

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MASONRY
Re-tempering will be permitted only in strict accordance with the code and all pallets shall be struck off
clean at lunch break and knock off time. Mortar shall be machine mixed immediately prior to use. The
colour selected shall be uniform and fully conform to the colour approved in the sample wall and
match any exposed face block/brick work. Where dry hydrated lime is used, the mixer shall first be
charged with water after which the cement and sand shall be added and mixed for not less than two
minutes. The lime shall then be added and mixing continued for as long as necessary to obtain a
uniform mixture, but in no case for less than six minutes.
F5.1.2. WATERPROOF MORTAR

Shall consist of cement mortar with waterproof paste added to water in proportion of 1 quart per bag of
cement. Waterproof mortar shall be used in all block/brick work below ground up to two courses above
ground and in all external walls and piers.
F5.1.3. COMPO MORTAR MIX

Unless otherwise specified mortar mix for all block/brick walls above grade shall be proportioned by
volume in the ratio of 1 Cement : 1/2 Hydrated Lime : 4 1/2 Sand To all mortar include Laticrete
Latabond added in proportions as recommended by the manufacturer to provide added strength and
resistance to wind erosion. Arrange for sufficient supply of sand from the same pit to ensure that the
mortar colour will be uniform throughout the project. No other additives shall be added to the mortar
without the approval of the Architect.
F5.1.4. CAVITY FLASHING

Reliance on silicone alone as a flashing medium will not be accepted and conventional flashings are
required for full perimeter of all openings in block/brick walls as shown on detail drawings. Provide
Alcor or equal approved bitumen and grit coated aluminium flashings and carry across the cavity to all
window, door and other openings in all cavity and block/brick veneer walls and install in full
compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Flashings shall be continuous around full
perimeter of frame or opening including head, jambs and sills. Form weep holes at 1200 centres at all
head and sill sections of cavity flashings. Head flashings to overlap jamb flashings and jamb flashings
to overlap sill flashings.
F5.1.5. TANKING
An applied tanking system is required to all Retaining, Garden Bed walls, Roof walls, Wet Area walls.
 Tanking system to retaining walls to be Aqueous Bituman or similar approved system

installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as per engineers
specifications.
 Tanking system to Garden walls to be Aqueous Bitumen installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and as per engineers specifications.
 Tanking system to Wet Area walls to be Cormix Elastoclad System installed in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations and as per engineers specifications.
 To outside face of Blockwork walls with applied cladding finish installed in accordance
with engineers specifications.
F5.1.6. TIES
All block/brick ties shall be Abey or equal approved stainless steel and shall fully comply with AS
3700. Ties shall be selected as recommended to suit the particular application and be installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
F5.1.7. SEALANTS
All sealants shall be Dow Corning, Selleys or equal approved silicone based neutral silicone as
recommended by the manufacturer for masonry wall control joints, coloured to match wall finish, for all
movement control joints and other areas as shown on the detail drawings.
F5.1.8. LINTELS
All exposed lintels shall be hot dipped galvanised mild steel angles, flats and other sections as shown
and as scheduled on the Structural Engineer's drawings.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MASONRY
F5.1.9. MOVEMENT JOINTS

Construct vertical movement joints where shown and at the junction of the new block/brick and
block/brick veneer walls. Provide Abey or similar stainless steel ties to provide sideways restraint while
allowing movement in the plane of the wall at movement joints. Provide ties in all other locations to
secure all block/brick work to comply with requirements of AS 3700. Select ties to suit location and fix
ties to steel, timber or concrete all as recommended by wall tie manufacturer.
F5.1.10. DAMP COURSE

Lay all walls to the residence below grade using waterproof agent as previously specified. Install Alcor
or equal approved damp proof courses in the bed courses at floor level and carry across the cavity at
block/brick veneer wall bases. Form weep holes at 1200 centres above DPC.
F5.2. SERVICES
Refer to Electrical and Services plans for indicative location of selected wall mounted lighting &
electrical components.
Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans for indicative location of wall mounted mechanical services and
penetrations.
Refer to Civil drawings for indicative locations of Hydraulic and Stormwater Services & penetrations.
Refer to Pool Consultant for indicative location of pool services fittings and penetrations.
All cabling, conduits and chasing to be provisioned and all cut outs and recesses allowed for
installations of all required fixtures and fittings.
F6. MATERIALS TABLES
F6.1. MASONRY WALLS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 1.2 Wall Types.

WALL TYPE 02 Brick Veneer Wall – 110mm Brickwork with render externally, 1.2 - Wall Types
50mm cavity, 90mm timber stud wall internal.
WALL TYPE 03 Masonry Wall - 110mm tied to existing wall or with Brick Piers 1.2 - Wall Types
as required or 230mm double brick wall.
F7. COMPLETION
F7.1. CLEANING DOWN

On completion of work clean down all Masonry work to remove all mortar splashes, etc. remove any
excess mortar off lintels, door and window frames and all other surfaces. The Contractor shall make
good any Masonry work damaged by other trades at no extra cost and to the Architect's satisfaction.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section G
METALWORK
G. METALWORK
G1. SCOPE OF WORKS
G1.1. EXTENT OF WORK
This section includes but is not limited to the following metal work items including the supply and
installation of:
 Powdercoated aluminium window, door & flyscreen frames & associated hardware, tracks &
coverplates.
 Metal/Steel brackets, supports & storage racks.
 Metal Gates.
 Gate hardware & furniture.
 Fireplace, flues, seals, bracing & trims.
 Access Panels.
 Window Furniture.
 Door furniture.
 Sanitary and Joinery Accessories and Hardware.
 Letterboxes, clotheslines and other equipment.
G2. STANDARDS, REGULATIONS & CODES
Materials and workmanship shall comply with the current edition of the relevant Australian Standards
and Codes. Stainless steel shall be 316 grade.
AS 1163 Structural steel hollow sections.

AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Anodized coatings for architectural applications.
AS 1365 Tolerances for flat-rolled steel products.
AS 1397 Steel sheet and strip - Hot-dipped zinc-coated or aluminium / zinc- coated.
AS 1449 Wrought alloy steels - Stainless and heat resisting steel plate, sheet and strip.
AS 1553 Covered electrodes for welding.
AS 1554.1 Welding of steel structures.
AS 1594 Hot-rolled steel flat products.
AS 1595 Cold-rolled unalloyed, steel sheet and strip.
AS 1627 Metal finishing - Preparation and pre treatment of surfaces.
AS 1650 Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on ferrous articles.
AS 1664 SAA Aluminium structures code.
AS 1734 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate.
AS 1866 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow shapes.
AS 2047 Aluminium windows for buildings.
AS 2048 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of aluminium windows in
buildings.
AS 2312 Guide to the protection of iron and steel against exterior atmospheric corrosion.
AS 2837 Wrought alloy steels - Stainless steel bars and semi-finished products.
AS 3678 Structural steel - Hot-rolled plates, floor-plates and slabs.
AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural applications.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page G-1 of 8

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
METALWORK
G3. WORKMANSHIP
Use skilled tradesmen, competent in the relevant field, for all work. All fabrication and assembly work
shall be carried out in the shop unless otherwise specified or permitted. Fabricate, supply and install the
metal work items scheduled and/or shown on the drawings. Fully weld all steel members. Grind edges
and welds smooth and remove any burrs or projections. Conceal fixings where practicable. Use fixings
of matching finish and counter sunk screws and/or bolts flush where exposed. All welding, fixings and
joints shall be ground flush before galvanising and shall be fabricated in long lengths to minimise welds.
G3.1. CORROSION PREVENTION

All metalwork items shall be constructed in a manner, which will avoid electrolytic action between
dissimilar metals, rusting, and other forms of corrosion, which could otherwise occur at any time during
and after the currency of the Contract. Ferrous metals unless otherwise specified shall be hot dip
galvanised. Aluminium shall be powder coat finished with selected colour as detailed. All other metals
shall be protected from chemical, mortar and other staining during manufacture and installation, by the
use of approved material. All temporary protective coverings shall be removed before the date of
Practical Completion.
G3.2. ITEMS FOR OTHER TRADES

Provide all steel, aluminium and ironwork specified in conjunction with items in other trades required to
construct and complete the whole of the Works.
G4. GENERAL CLAUSES
G5. MATERIALS
G5.1. STEEL LINTELS

All lintels to both external and internal openings shall be hot dip galvanised. Lintels to be as shown on
the structural and architectural drawings and as follows subject to loadings above:
 Openings up to 950mm 75 x 10 MS bar, 100mm min. bearing each end.

G5.2. ACCESS HATCH COVERS AND LOUVRED GRILLES

Provide access covers to equipment, plumbing and other service ducts as shown on drawings, as
specified under other trade sections, and as per Pool, Mechanical, Hydraulic & Civil Drawings.
Contractor to confirm discrete location prior to installation. Covers shall be Trafalgar with wet wall
surround or equal and approximately 300 x 300mm and securely fixed to adjacent wall & ceiling
surfaces.
G5.3. FLY SCREENS

All opening sashes to windows shall be fitted with fixed steel mesh type fly screens. All fixed and sliding
screens shall be stainless steel powder coated black mesh fixed in powder coated aluminium frames of
selected colour to match window frames.
Location of flyscreens to be confirmed with Architect prior to fabrication.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
METALWORK
G5.4. METAL PICKET FENCING & GATES & ASSOCIATED FIXINGS

All metal picket gates as detailed on Architectural drawing WD10 and located according to the
Architectural Site Plan WD02. The contractor is to ensure structural adequacy to all gates and fences. All
steel is to be Hot Dip Galvanized and finished with Metal Etch Primer as per the Painting Schedule in this
Specification. All gates and fence posts to be cleated to concrete footings. Size and no. of support rails
and posts to be sufficient to make the fence and pickets rigid and free of noticeable movement under
normal loadings or pressures at all points. Spacing of pickets, rails and posts to be reviewed by Architect
prior to fabrication.
G5.5. SHELF BRACKETS

To all exposed joinery shelves Hafele or equal approved stainless steel angled shelf bracket fixed to
walls as located on plans but not limited to, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Conceal bracket by sleeving into shelf and concealing behind wall framing prior to cladding where
shown on Architectural Drawings.
G5.6. FLUES / COVER SLEEVES

Flues to all to extraction fans and pool gas heater to be Zincalume Ultra with Colorbond ‘Monument’
finish. Flue diameter, height, and installation to be in strict accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Flue & sleeves to be fitted with anti-down draught chimney cowl in finish to match
flues. Flues to be minimum height of 600mm above parapet level to roof, 2000mm above trafficable area,
or higher as required by Manufacturer & Australian Standards. Flues to have appropriate sleeve and
bracing as required for required location & height.
G5.7. CURTAINS & BLINDS

Contractor to allow for Window Furnishings as per the Window Furnishing Specification Appendix
and Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans & Electrical Plans for Blind and Curtain locations. All tracks and
blind mechanisms to be installed in strict accordance with manufacturers specifications.
G5.8. FIREPLACES
All installations and attachments in strict accordance with manufacturers specifications. Ensure all wall
and roof penetrations are weather tight and sealed as required. Ensure all fire rating requirements have
been met.
Damper seals to be installed to existing fireplaces as required by Energy Report.
G5.9. CLOTHES LINE

Supply and install 1x no. fold down powdercoated clothes lines to Drying area as indicated on WD02.
Clothes lines to be fixed to wall using suitable galvanized screw/bolt fixings as recommended/directed
by manufacturer.
G5.10. LETTERBOX
Electrical /Automation contractor to supply and install custom made stainless steel letterbox with
stainless steel box sleeve to front fence along Western Boundary. Front face of letterbox to be flush with
street face of masonry rendered finish to wall. Contractor to confirm with architect exact location, height
and detailing prior to fence and letterbox fabrication/installation. Refer to WD10 for extent and design.
G5.11. TRIMS AND COVERPLATES

Supply and install Metal Trims and coverplates as noted on Architectural drawings and as described
below:
 Steel trim plates Hot Dip Galvanized and fully welded with grinded exposed joints to ensure
flush and even finish. Secret Fix, inlay or glue as required.
 All exposed internal steel plate trims to have Paint finish as per Section U- Painting of this
specification. Allow 3mm express joints to ensure flat surface.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
METALWORK
Aluminium trims to have applied powdercoat finish to match aluminium windows and glazed doors. Trim
is to finish flush to adjacent surfaces and securely fastened and sealed.
G5.12. GRILLES
Exhaust and AC bar grilles to be flangeless and installed flush with adjacent plasterboard, or joinery
finishes.
G6. MATERIAL TABLES
G6.1. EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.4: Equipment and Part 2.6
Miscellaneous.

LETTER BOX Custom Fabricated Letterbox and face plate 2.6 - Miscellaneous
CLOTHESLINE Fold Down Metal Clothesline 2.6 - Miscellaneous
G6.2. ROOFING FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.4 Roof Finishes. Also refer to
Section L - Roof and Roof Plumbing of this Specification.

RF01 0.6 BMT LYSAGHT "Trimdek' Zincalume Roof Sheeting @ 2 3.4 - Roof Finishes
degree pitch. Colourbond Finish
G6.3. ROOFING TRIMS & FLASHINGS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.5 Trims, Gutters & Downpipes.
Also refer to Section L - Roof and Roof Plumbing of this Specification.

FL01 General Flashing - Zincalume with Colorbond Finish. 0.6 BMT 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
minimum. 200mm min. overlap for flashing. 35mm max. return
for capping.
FL02 Custom Window/Door Head and Sill Flashing - Zincalume with 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
Colorbond Finish. 0.6 BMT minimum. 200mm min. overlap for
flashing. 35mm max. return for capping.
FL03 Roof Penetration Flashing - DEKS Dektite flashing to suit Roof 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
profile/Material
CAP01 Ridge Capping - Zincalume Ridge Capping with Colorbond 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
finish. 0.6 BMT minimum. 200mm min. overlap for flashing.
CAP01 Parapet Capping - Zincalume Parapet Capping with Colorbond 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
35mm max. return for capping.
TRIM 1 Folded aluminium coverplate with Powdercoat finish to suit 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
location and finish flush and true to adjacent surfaces. 3mm
min in size. Aluminium Parapet Capping to Butlers Roof edge.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
METALWORK
G6.4. GUTTERS & RAINWATER GOODS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.5 Trims, Gutters & Downpipes.
Also refer to Section L - Roof and Roof Plumbing of this Specification.

GU01 Fabricated Box Gutter with Sump 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
GU02 General Eaves Gutter - Lysaght Quad Gutter with Colorbond 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
finish.
DOWNPIPE 01 PVC Downpipe - Concealed PVC downpipe. Size as per Civil 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
Engineers Drawings
DOWNPIPE 02 Zincalume Downpipe - Circular zincalume downpipe with 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
Colorbond finish. Size as per Civil Engineers Drawings
OVERFLOW Custom Overflow to Box Gutter Sump. Custom formed 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
overflow to be full width of sump and to extend past face of
wall/fascia as required. Zincalume with Colorbond finish to
match wall cladding.
RWH Rainwater head.
G6.5. METAL TRIMS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 4.4 Trims

TRIM 01 Aluminium Coverplate 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
G6.6. JOINERY HARDWARE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 5.2 Joinery Hardware.

JOINERY HANDLE 02 Lip Pull Handle with rebate. Powdercoated to match door 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
colour. Size: 20x35x1100mm
JOINERY HANDLE 03 Lip Pull Handle with return. Powdercoated to match door 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
JOINERY HINGE 01 Cupboard Hinge - Blum "Clip Top" Blue Motion joinery hinges 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
DRAWER RUNNER Blum Tandem full extension drawer runners with Blumotion 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
DRAWER INSERT Blum Cutlery drawer inserts as required 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
SLIDING DOORS Sliding Robe door runners with no bottom track. 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
KITCHEN BASKET HAFELE Base unit internal extension, arena classic 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
Kesseböhmer clever storage
LAUNDRY BASKET HIDEAWAY SCL160D-W 60l soft close pull out laundry basket 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
integrated to joinery.
TEA TOWEL RAIL 2 Arm pull out Tea Towel Rail 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
WINE RACK INDI wine racking insert to joinery above fridge. Custom 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
fabricate to suit size. Powdercoated.
ROBE RAIL Clothes Hanging Rail to closed robes 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
PULL DOWN RAIL Hafele Wardrobe rail 15kg 805.24.330 or approved. 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
TV MOUNTING TV Wall Bracket to suit size of TV 7.4 - Equipment
BRACKET
BINS Door mount waste bin with blum runners. HAFELE one2five 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
2x26L 500mm.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
METALWORK
G6.7. SANITARY ACCESSIORES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 6.4 Sanitary Accessories. Refer
also to Section P - Electrical, of this specification for further information regarding electric heated towel
rails.

TOWEL RAIL 1 KADO 'QUAD' 830 electric heated towel rail to 3x in Master 6.4 - Sanitary Accessories
Ensuite.
TOWEL RAIL 2 Single Towel Rail. 450mm 6.4 - Sanitary Accessories
TOWEL RAIL 3 KADO 'QUAD' 830 non-heated towel rail to 3x in Ensuite 2 & 6.4 - Sanitary Accessories
bathroom.
TOILET ROLL Milli Glance Toilet Roll Holder 9503884 6.4 - Sanitary Accessories
HOLDER
SOAP DISPENSER FRANKE Soap Dispenser SD319 6.4 - Sanitary Accessories
MIRR 1 Installation of 800 dia CLIENT SUPPLIED MIRROR 5.2 - Mirrors
MIRR 2 Installation of 900 dia CLIENT SUPPLIED MIRROR 5.2 - Mirrors
G6.8. AC GRILLES
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 7.3 Mechanical, Hydraulic and
Ventilation. Refer also to Section Q - Mechanical, of this specification.

A/C GRILLE TYPE 01 Air Conditioning supply, return & exhaust Diffuser. Holyoake 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
LD Series Flangeless Linear Bar Diffuser. Powdercoat to match Ventilation
ceiling / wall colour.
A/C GRILLE TYPE 02 Air Conditioning round ceiling Diffuser. Powdercoat to match 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
ceiling colour. Ventilation
RETURN AIR Air Conditioning Hinged Return Air Bar Grille. Holyoake LD 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
(GRILLE 01) Series Flangeless Linear Bar Diffuser. Ventilation
G6.9. HYDRONIC HEATING PANELS

Ventilation. Refer also to Section Q - Mechanical, of this specification. Position as required by
mechanical contractor.

HYDRONIC 9 x Korado Flat Wall Panel Radiator (Ground and First Floors) 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
RADIATOR PANEL Ventilation
G6.10. EXHAUST GRILLES

Ventilation. Refer also to Section Q - Mechanical, of this specification.

EXHAUST GRILLE Linear Slot Diffuser 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
(GRILLE 01) Ventilation
Size as required by mechanical contractor.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
METALWORK
G6.11. ALUMINIUM WINDOW TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.2 Windows. Refer also to
Architectural Door and Window Schedule.

WINDOW TYPE 01 Double glazed aluminium fixed window system. Powdercoat 8.2 - Windows
finish. Centre Pocket fixed aluminium system.
WINDOW TYPE 02 Double Hung sashless double glazed window system. 8.2 - Windows
Aluminium window frame insert, powdercoat finish. Limit
opening to 100mm to pool enclosure to comply with AS1926.
WINDOW TYPE 03 Double glazed aluminium awning window system. Alspec Pro- 8.2 - Windows
tilt awning/casement insert. Square edge sash frame.
Powdercoat finish.
WINDOW TYPE 04 Double glazed aluminium fixed window system. Alspec 8.2 - Windows
'Proglide' Double glazed sliding door system. Powdercoat
finish.
WINDOW TYPE 05 Single glazed internal fixed window system. Frameless glazing 8.2 - Windows
channel. Powdercoat finish.
G6.12. ALUMINIUM SKYLIGHT TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.3 Skylights. Refer also to

SKYLIGHT TYPE 2 Fixed Aluminium Skylight into existing slate roof. 8.3 - Skylights
SKYLIGHT TYPE 3 Fixed Aluminium Skylight into existing slate roof. 8.3 - Skylights
G6.13. ALUMINIUM DOOR TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.4 Doors. Refer also to

DOOR TYPE 3 Double glazed Aluminium Swing / Hinge door 8.4 - Doors
G6.14. DOOR HANDLES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.5 Door Handles. Refer also to
Door Hardware Schedule in the Specification Appendix and Architectural Door and Window Schedule.

DOOR HANDLE 1 Lever door handle on round rose or narrow stile to aluminium 8.5 - Door Handles
door.
DOOR HANDLE 2 Flush pull door handle with integrated privacy set to internal 8.5 - Door Handles
sliding Door
DOOR HANDLE 3 Full height aluminium angle pull handle to sliding aluminium 8.5 - Door Handles
framed glazed sliding doors by window fabricator.
REFER TO DOOR HARDWARE SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE
G6.15. DOOR HINGES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.6 Door Hinges & Openers. Refer
also to Door Hardware Schedule in the Specification Appendix and Architectural Door and Window
Schedule.

HINGE 1 Standard Door Hinge 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
HINGE 2 Door Hinge with Lift Off pin 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
HINGE 3 Standard Duty Gate Hinge 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
METALWORK
G6.16. SLIDING DOOR TRACKS


TRACK 1 Concealed top hung sliding track to Ensuite 2. Ceiling 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
mounted.
SLIDING ROBE 2700mm high top hung sliding door with no bottom track. 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
DOORS Allow 20mm gap to top and bottom for ventilation.
SLIDING TRACK Sliding Track for aluminium sliding window system. Recessed 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
into floor
G6.17. DOOR STOPS AND CATCHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.6 Door Hinges, Openers &
Catches. Refer also to Door Hardware Schedule in the Specification Appendix and Architectural Door
and Window Schedule.

DOOR STOP Floor or wall mounted magnetic door stop 8.6 - Door Hinges, Openers & Catches
G6.18. DOOR & WINDOW LOCKSETS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.7 Locksets. Refer also to Door
Hardware Schedule in the Specification Appendix and Architectural Door and Window Schedule.

DOOR LOCKSET 1 Internal passage set. 8.7 - Locksets
DOOR LOCKSET 2 High Security Mortice Lock. 8.7 - Locksets
DOOR LOCKSET 3 High Security Sliding Mortice Lock. 8.7 - Locksets
DOOR LOCKSET 4 High Security Mortice Lock with Electric Strike. 8.7 - Locksets
DOOR LOCKSET 5 Internal Privacy lock. 8.7 - Locksets
WINDOW LOCKSET Push key Lock to all Windows. 8.7 - Locksets
G6.19. WINDOW AND DOOR FURNISHINGS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.8 Flyscreens & Blinds. Refer also
to Window Furnishing Specification in the Specification Appendix. Refer also to Electrical and Reflected
Ceiling plans for location of blind types

FLYSCREEN Black powder coated metal mesh to all opening windows 8.8 - Flyscreens & Blinds
G7. COMPLETION
Clean all materials installed to the satisfaction of the Architect. Remove all temporary protective coatings.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section H
CARPENTRY
H. CARPENTRY
H1. SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of the carpentry works to be as shown on drawings and as necessary to complete Works and
generally as follows:
 all deck, floor, wall, roof, ceiling & bulkhead framing.

 all roof framing.
 plasterboard and fibre cement sheet to walls, ceilings and soffits.
 joinery works, fitments and fixtures.
 all doors.
 all associated framing as necessary to complete the Works.
 all insulation to floors, walls, ceilings and roof cavities.
 selected skirting boards, architraves, jambs, coverplates and associated door and window
framing.
 selected pre-finished engineered timber flooring.
 selected pre-finished engineered timber ceiling and soffit lining.
 all timber sleeper retaining walls.
H2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
All materials and framing shall be in accordance with the Light Timber Framing Code A.S. 1684 and its
current supplements and amendments, except where varied by this Specification or as indicated on
drawings.
AS 1684 Residential timber-framed construction.

AS 1859 Reconstituted wood-based panels
AS 1859.1 Particleboard
AS 1859.2 Medium density fibreboard (MDF)
AS 1859.3 Decorative overlaid wood panels
AS 1859.4 Hardboard.
AS 1859.5 Fibre insulating board (insulation board).
AS 2131 Adhesives - For bonding decorative thermosetting laminates (contact adhesives)
AS 2269 Structural plywood
AS 2270 Plywood and blockboard for interior use
AS 2271 Plywood and blockboard for exterior use
AS 2289 Glossary of terms used in the plywood industry
AS 2329 Mastic adhesives for fixing wallboards
AS 2754 Adhesives for timber and timber products
AS 2754.1 Adhesives for plywood manufacture
AS 2754.2 Polymer emulsion adhesives
AS 2754.3 Adh esives for non-structural applications
AS 2924 Decorative thermosetting laminated sheet
AS 4491 Timber - Glossary of terms in timber related Standards.
H3. WORKMANSHIP
All carpentry work shall conform to AS 1684 and shall be of the best trade practice, using competent
tradesmen, equipment and materials with all incidental work to produce the finished product. Each
member shall be spaced at centres not exceeding those specified or indicated on drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any damage due to shrinkage of timbers and shall replace or make
good affected areas to the Architect’s satisfaction. All timbers shall be in long lengths. Each dressed
timber surface shall be finished smooth even and free from machine marks using machine and hand
sawing.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page H-1 of 10

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
H4. GENERAL CLAUSES
H4.1. WALL FRAMING

Unless otherwise specified or shown on details or approved by the Architect, all scantlings shall be of
the following sizes or as shown on drawings: Construct walls with scantlings as specified above. Wall
plates shall be continuous from corner to corner and connected with nailing plates at changes of
direction. Check studs for 90 x 45 door heads – generally internal doors without heads with jambs to run
to ceiling. Nog straight walls at 750. Nog all walls at door heads and as required to provide fixings for
wall lining sheet edges, towel rails, W.C. pans, access panels, fitting of cabinets and shelving, power
outlets, skirting coves, taps, tv brackets, etc.
Materials
MEMBER SIZE GRADE TIMBER
STUDS 90 x 45 or as per Engineers Specifications F7 Pine
TOP PLATES 90 x 45 or as per Engineers Specifications F7 Pine
BOTTOM PLATES 90 x 45 or as per Engineers Specifications F7 Pine
NOGGINGS 90 x 45 or as per Engineers Specifications F7 Pine
BRACING 6 mm or as per Engineers Specifications F11 Ply
FLOOR BATTENS 90x45 or as per Engineers Specifications F17 Pine
LINTELS As per Engineers Specifcations
All walls shall, when erected, be sufficiently rigid and free of noticeable movement under normal
loadings or pressures at all points, including door jambs and adjustment devices at floors. All vertically
straight walls and stud work shall be erected truly plumb, horizontal and square. Top plates shall be
joined, checked and spiked over a stud or the joint supported by a nogging hard under the plate, spiked
through each stud.
H4.2. ROOF FRAMING

Roof framing shall be all timber roof and gutter framing members laid over the top of the concrete roof
slab as specified by engineer and associated drawings to comply with the Victoria Timber Framing
Manual. The Contractor shall allow for supply and installation of the framing together with all additional
battens, ties, bracing and trims as required to complete the roof framing system and provide support for
all proposed ceilings, fascias, soffits, ceiling mounted mechanical units & access hatches etc.
Fix ceiling and roof battens as specified. Where furring channels are used for ceiling battens and eave
lining, the fixing clips shall be sized to suit the roof construction and provide adequate support for board
lining to finish in a flat and horizontal plane.
H4.3. CEILING FRAMING
H4.3.1. PLASTERBOARD CEILINGS

Suspended plasterboard ceiling lining shall be fixed to 28 mm Rondo 129 furring channel hung from
Rondo 394 fixing clip fixed to underside of timber framing & trimming or concrete slab. Trim and nog as
required to provide perimeter support for ceiling linings and for bulkheads where shown and to provide
additional fixing for isolated battens and batten ends to ensure level plane for fixing of plasterboard
sheeting.
Direct fixed ceiling plasterboard lining shall be fixed to metal plasterboard furring channels fixed to
underside of. Ensure all ceiling framing is level and true before fixing ceiling lining.
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
H4.3.2. LINED CEILINGS

Suspended ceiling lining shall be fixed to 28 mm Rondo 129 furring channel hung from Rondo 394 fixing
clip fixed to underside of timber framing & trimming or concrete slab—or additional as required by
manufacturer. Trim and nog as required to provide perimeter support for ceiling linings and for
bulkheads where shown and to provide additional fixing for isolated battens and batten ends to ensure
level plane for fixing of ceiling lining.
H4.4. DUCTS, HOBS & BULKHEADS

Frame up ducts, hobs & bulkheads with 90 x 45 top and bottom plates, studs at 600 mm max. and
provide all noggings, trimmers etc. as required to complete the frame secure and ready for the lining as
shown and detailed. Nog as required for fixing of sanitary fittings, rails, taps, reticulation piping, etc. For
ceiling bulkheads make provision for all recessed down-lights as shown and indicated on electrical plan.
Trim all wall and ceiling framing for flues, vents, pipes, exhaust fans, light fittings, hand rails, sanitary
fittings and service pipe shafts as required. Where any waste and vent pipes etc., are exposed on
internal walls and ceiling surfaces, they shall be completely enclosed in plasterboard faced duct
constructed from 70 x 35 F5 pine frame left ready for the plasterer and/or tiler. Provide all necessary
access openings to ducts with cover plates located to match service openings in pipes etc. Frame up
ducts for all service and supply lines, conduits and other cables with 90 x 45 top and bottom plates and
90 x 45 studs at 600 mm max. centres. Provide all noggings, trimmers etc. as required. Nog as required
for fixing of sanitary fittings, rails, taps, reticulation piping, etc.
H4.5. FRAMED RECESSES

Frame up parts of stud wall framing to take wardrobes, cupboards fittings and fixtures as detailed and
shown on drawings. Take delivery and arrange with joinery subcontractor for installation of all joinery
fitments into the recesses provided. Coordinate installation with other trades to ensure junction of all
fitments with adjacent surface complies fully with details.
H4.6. SERVICES
After completion of all timber stud framing and masonry brick walls prior to the fixing of any linings,
provide neatly cut holes and make all necessary provision for all services including electrical cables, TV,
telephone data cable, thermostat, mechanical services and other service lines, all general and sanitary
plumbing, water and other service pipes, all as specified and noted on drawings. After installation of the
service line, pipe or cable fill penetrations, close openings and generally seal all surfaces to ensure no
transfer of sound or vibration, water hammer or other problems will occur with the installation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
H5. MATERIALS
H5.1. TIMBER
All structural timber shall be branded, colour coded and stress graded to a standard not less than those
listed below. All seasoned timber shall have a moisture content of 10% -15% by weight.
Materials
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
HARDWOOD Shall be merchantable grade F11 hardwood, in accordance with AS 2082, 100% heartwood.
PINE Shall be kiln dried radiata pine F5 in accordance with AS 1490.
STRUCTURAL KDHW Shall be F17 kiln dried and reconditioned.
JOINERY KDHW Shall be select joinery grade kiln dried hardwood. Exposed KDHW shall be 100% free of sapwood
and gum veins or pockets.
CYPRESS PINE Shall be Cypress Pine (Callitris Glauca), stress grade F7, select grade, kiln dried, free from loose
knots.
WINDOW & DOORS Vic Ash KDHW
FEATURE TRIMS Vic Ash KDHW
Should the Contractor wish to use a higher grade of any timber as specified, the Architect may approve
sizes for that grade in accordance with Australian Standard A.S. 1684 - 1975 or later associated
documents. Each piece of timber purporting to comply with this Specification shall be colour marked not
less than 400mm from one end and shall have legibly and indelibly impressed or marked on one face or
on one edge the manufacturer's name or registered mark.
Rain forest timbers shall not be used on any part of the project without the approval of the Architect. Any
timber showing the slightest trace of active white ant infestation or other major imperfections shall be
condemned, immediately removed from site and replaced by Contractor at no additional cost to the
Contract price.
H5.2. PARTICLEBOARD
Structural
All structural particleboard shall be in accordance with Class 1 Flooring section of AS 1859 - 1980 and
shall be 19 mm Pyneboard Structaflor Yellow Tongue or equal approved with yellow edge.
Non Structural
Shall be in accordance with AS 1859 - 1980and when used in wet areas shall be CSR Hydropanel or
similar approved HMR board and shall conform to APMA Industry Standards.
H5.3. MEDIUM DENSITY FIBREBOARD (“MDF”)

Shall be CSR Fibron or equal approved premium grade for general use and High Moisture Resistant
(“HMR”) for wet areas.
H5.4. FIBRE CEMENT SHEETING

Where shown or noted on drawings as “FC” sheeting shall be Hardies Villaboard or equal approved fibre
cement sheeting of thickness as specified and to AS 2908.2. Where shown as “CFC” material shall be
Hardies or equal approved compressed fibre cement sheeting of thickness as specified. Structural floors
in wet areas shall be 24mm thick compressed fibre cement sheet equal to Hardies HardiePanel.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
H5.5. FASTENINGS
All anchorages and fixings to concrete, brick or steel members such as brackets etc associated with
timber framing shall be “Loxin”, “Dynabolt” or approved equal stainless steel masonry anchors. All
particle board, compressed sheeting and plywood shall be fixed according to manufacturer’s
recommendations. Bolts and masonry anchors shall be 12 dia. unless otherwise shown, with washers.
Refer to the Structural Engineer's drawings for specification of timber connectors and fasteners.
Adhesives and fillers shall be compatible with the finished coatings where specified. Oil or PVA
materials are generally not satisfactory. Epoxy and formaldehyde adhesives and materials shall
therefore be selected in preference to PVA or oil to ensure compatibility with finished coatings and
surfaces.
H5.6. INSULATION
All thermal and acoustic wall, floor and ceiling insulation as per the Energy Report and Insulation table in
part H6 of this specification. Insulation by Kingspan or CSR Bradford or equal approved, shall be
installed to ceilings, walls floors and soffits as required and nominated in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
H5.7. SARKING
Reflective foil sarking shall comply with AS 1903 and shall be double sided glass reinforced moisture
permeable aluminium foil equal to Bradford Thermoseal or equal approved. Thermoseal product
selection to be appropriate and fit for purpose. Fix foil where shown on details and as follows:
 To roof battens below roof sheeting or tiles.

 Behind all external cladding.
 To cavity of all external block veneer walls.
Ensure sarking is lapped 150 mm at joints and overlapped as recommended by manufacturer to prevent
any entry of moisture to inside face of wall or roof areas
H5.8. FLASHINGS
Reliance on silicone alone as a flashing medium will not be accepted and conventional sheet flashings
are required for full perimeter of all openings in brick and stud framed walls as shown on detail
drawings. Vertical flashings shall be placed so they overlap horizontal flashings at sills but are fixed
below head flashings and all flashing material shall be continuous to provide an effective and total seal
to all areas where flashings are required.
Provide Alcor or equal approved bitumen and grit coated aluminium flashings and carry across the
cavity to all window, door and other openings in all cavity and brick veneer walls and install in full
compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations to ensure there are no gaps between frame and
adjacent lining. Flashings shall be continuous around full perimeter of frame or opening including head,
jambs and sills.
Supply and Install folded Zincalume flashings with colorbond finish to all window and door rebates as
per drawings. Flashing to be taped and securely fixed to terrace waterproofing.
H5.9. SILICONE SEAL

In addition to Alcor flashings provide secondary seal with silicone mastic all heads, jambs and sills of
windows and door frames at junctions with brickwork, FC sheeting, timber or other trims. Caulking to be
silicone mastic as recommended by sealant manufacturer and finished evenly and neatly. Provide drips
on all sills and ensure they function correctly.
H5.10. SKIRTING, ARCHITRAVES, TRIMS & CORNICES

Skirting Architraves, Trims & Cornices shall be as indicated on drawings and generally as follows:

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
All cornices, skirts and architraves to be spray or powdercoated finished with selected paint. All
plasterboard ceilings to be Square set or have shadow line where butting into a rendered surface or new
plaster cornices and hardware architraves and skirts to match existing.
H5.11. TIMBER FLOORING

Allow for supply and installation of new timber flooring as per Architectural Plans. Boards to be T & G
secret nail profile, direct fixed to slab in compliance with AS 1684 in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications or fixed over existing timber floor or new ply substrate. Ensure all floor
surfaces and types are level and as per manufacturers specifications.
Refer to Specification Part R - Floor, Wall and Ceiling Claddings and Finishes and Part H6 of this section
of the specification
H5.12. WALLS
H5.12.1. PLASTER LININGS

Generally all new internal walls shall be lined with 10mm plasterboard fixed directly to timber framed
walls as shown and noted on Architectural drawings or Hard Plaster direct to internal Masonry walls.
Install all linings in full compliance with AS 3740 and recommendations as set out in technical manual
published by wall sheeting manufacturer.
Provide selected square set ceiling & wall junctions and at intersection with bulkheads to extent shown
on Reflected Ceiling Plan. Provide selected square set cornice, skirting and architraves to ceiling, wall,
floor and door junctions to extent shown on reflected ceiling plan and other related plans.
Refer also to Section R of this Specification.
H5.12.2. WET AREAS

In Wet Areas where tiled walls, stone clad walls or splashbacks are required, line walls with 6 mm
Villaboard CFC sheeting installed in full compliance with AS 3740 and recommendations of James
Hardie Building Products. At corners of walls and at floor/wall junctions build in 75 x 75 mm PVC or 0.5
mm aluminium flashings to ensure complete waterproof seal to entire splashback and tiled area to
adjacent surfaces.
Refer also to Section R of this Specification.
H5.12.3. MIRROR PANELLING

Supply, install & fix 6mm minimum thickness Silvered Float glass mirror panels to walls as located on
Architectural Internal Documents or as required per AS 1288 or AS 2208. Fix mirror panels direct to wall
using neutral based adhesive providing adequate strength as required to ensure panels are secured to
wall.
Refer to Specification Part M - Glazing & Part R - Floor, Wall and Ceiling Claddings and Finishes
H5.12.4. TIMBER LINING OR PANELLING
Allow for supply and installation of new timber wall cladding as per Architectural Plans. Boards to be T &
G secret nail profile, direct fixed to wall frame in compliance with AS 1684 in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications. Wall panels to have lapped joints taped behind and direct stainless
countersunk screw fixed to wall frame in compliance with AS 1684 in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications. Ensure all wall surfaces and types are level.
Refer to Specification Part R - Floor, Wall and Ceiling Claddings and Finishes and Part H6 of this section
of the specification.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
H5.13. SOFFIT AND CEILINGS
H5.13.1. PLASTERBOARD LININGS
Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans for location of finishes to soffits and ceilings. All timber trimming and
framing to be allowed for as required.
Refer to Part R of this Specification for information regarding Finishes to plasterboard soffits.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
H6. MATERIALS TABLES
H6.1. TIMBER FLOOR FRAMING

Refer Engineer’s Specifications.
Contractor is to allow adequate time to verify spans of Posi-Strut or similar approved system with
manufacturer prior to order.

FLOOR TYPE 3 Timber Framed floor with particleboard / structural ply / 1.1 - Floor Types
compressed fibre cement flooring.
H6.2. TIMBER WALL FRAMING

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 1.2 Wall Types.
Refer Structural engineer’s Specifications.

WALL TYPE 1 Timber Framed Wall 1.2 - Wall Types
WALL TYPE 2 Brick Veneer Wall 1.2 - Wall Types
H6.3. TIMBER ROOF FRAMING

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 1.3 Roof Structure and structural
engineering.
Contractor is to allow adequate time to verify spans of Trusses or similar approved system with
manufacturer prior to order.

ROOF TYPE 1 Framed Skillion Roof with steel roof sheeting over. Insulation 1.3 - Roof Structure
03 to ceiling cavity. Membrane 03 to external side of frame.
ROOF TYPE EX Existing hip timber framed roof with slate finish. Insulation 03 to 1.3 - Roof Structure
ceilings. Membrane 3 to external side of frame.
H6.4. WATERPROOF MEMBRANES TO TIMBER STRUCTURE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 1.4 Waterproofing.

WATERPROOF Reflective Foil sarking to timber framed walls, soffits, and roofs. 1.4 - Waterproofing
MEMBRANE 3
H6.5. INSULATION
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 1.5 Insulation. All insulation is to
comply with Energy Rating Report Appendix Y6

INSULATION TYPE 1 Underslab Insualtion. Foamular Metric 250 extruded 1.5 - Insulation
polystyrene insulation.
INSULATION TYPE 2 Bulk Wall Insulation. 90mm R2.7 Bradford Gold Hi-Performance 1.5 - Insulation
wall insulation to external walls and services areas.
INSULATION TYPE 3 Bulk Ceiling Insulation. 260mm R6.0 Bradford Gold Hi- 1.5 - Insulation
Performance Ceiling insulation to new pitched roofs and
existing areas with new ceilings.
INSULATION TYPE 4 Underfloor insulation. R2.5 90mm Bradford Optimo Floor Batts 1.5 - Insulation
to upper floors and existing areas with new floors.
INSULATION TYPE 5 Bradford Soundscreen R2.5 Batts for internal walls & floors. 1.5 - Insulation

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
H6.6. TIMBER DECK FRAMING

Refer Engineer’s Specifications.
Contractor is to allow excavation and drainage for adequate sub-floor ventilation.

FLOOR TYPE 4 Timber Framed Class 1 Hardwood deck. 1.1 - Floor Types
H6.7. TIMBER FENCES AND GATES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.1 Screens, Gates, Fences.

FENCE TYPE 1 Existing Timber Picket Fence with New Paint Finish where not 2.1 - Screens, Gates, Fences
covered in creepers.
FENCE TYPE 2 Existing brick fence with brick piers. New brick piers where 2.1 - Screens, Gates, Fences
front gate cut in as required. New Paint Finish.
FENCE TYPE 3 Timber paling fence with 300mm max timber sleeper retaining 2.1 - Screens, Gates, Fences
to base as required. New paint finish.
FENCE TYPE 4 Channel fixed toughened glass pool fencing. 2.1 - Screens, Gates, Fences
GATE TYPE 1 Steel Picket Gate 2.1 - Screens, Gates, Fences
GATE TYPE 2 Automated Swing Steel Picket Driveway Gate. 2.1 - Screens, Gates, Fences
GATE TYPE 3 & 4 Timber Paling Gate.
GATE TYPE 5 Glass to Glass Glazed Pool Gate. 2.1 - Screens, Gates, Fences
In cases where timber fences are required to adjoining neighbours, Treated timber paling fences will be
1.8m high with plinth boards as required supported by 75 x 100mm posts and 3no x 70 x 35mm rails.
Any subsequent retaining to adjoining boundaries shall be allowed for with treated timber sleeper plinth
boards. PVC Cell Matt waterproofing membrane to be installed when retaining with Ag. Pipe connected
to stormwater network as required.
Make Good all existing fences and prepare for new paint finish to areas without creepers. Where
Boundary fences are within the Pool Enclosure, Fences are to be min 1.8m high (measured internally)
and top 900mm internally non-climbable strictly in accordance with AS1926-2012.
H6.8. EXTERNAL TIMBER DECK FINISH

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.1 External Floor Finishes. Refer
also to Section R - External And Internal Finishes of this specification

DK01 Iron Bark 130 x 32mm select grade 3mm pencil round edge 3.1 - Floors
decking.
H6.9. EXTERNAL TIMBER WALL FINISH

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.2 External Wall Finishes. Refer

WC05 42 x 42mm dressed KDHW battens securely fixed to 12mm 3.2 - Walls
marine grade ply substrate over battens with MEMBRANE 03
under to stud wall.
H6.10. INTERNAL TIMBER FLOOR FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 4.1 Internal Floor Finishes. Refer

FF01 Pre-finished Engineered FETHERS 'Maison Grey Stone' 4.1 - Floors
floorboards. Laid over existing floor or new substrate.
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
CARPENTRY
H6.11. INTERNAL TIMBER WALL FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 4.2 Internal Wall Finishes. Refer

WFEX Hard Plaster. Gyprock Hardwall plaster. 15mm build 4.2 - Walls
WF01 CSR Supercheck 10mm Plasterboard. 4.2 – Walls
WF02 CSR Aquacheck 10mm Plasterboard 4.2 – Walls
WF04 Porcelain tile, La Suite 'Cemento' 4.2 – Walls
WF05 Porcelain tile, Belga 'Charcoal' 4.2 – Walls
WF06 Porcelain tile, Gigacer Krea Green Patchwork Pattern C 4.2 – Walls
H6.12. TIMBER TRIMS

SKIRT EX Existing Solid timber period skirting to match existing 4.4 - Trims
SKIRT 01 New KDHW timber skirting. Paint finish to match wall. 4.4 - Trims
ARCHITRAVE EX Existing or New Solid timber period jamb, head and sill to 4.4 - Trims
period windows and doors. New to match existing
ARCHITRAVE 01 New 45mm thick solid timber jamb with 10mm rebate for door. 4.4 - Trims
Paint finish to match wall
H6.13. TIMBER JOINERY FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 5.1 Joinery Finishes. Refer also to
Section K - Joinery of this specification
H7. COMPLETION
Clean all materials installed to the satisfaction of the Architect. Remove all temporary protective coatings.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section I
I. (DELETED)
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page I-1 of 1

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section J
DOORS
J. DOORS
J1. SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of the doors to be as shown on drawings and as necessary to complete Works and generally
as follows:
 all timber swing, sliding, pivot, bifold doors.

 all aluminium framed glazed swing sliding doors.
 all electrical work for electric locks and motorized doors and gates.
 all external gates and lock boxes.
 all door hardware.
 selected skirting boards, architraves, jambs, coverplates and associated door and window
framing.
J2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
drawings.
AS 1684 Residential timber-framed construction.

AS 1859.4 Hardboard.
AS 1859.5 Fibre insulating board (insulation board).
AS 2269 Structural plywood
AS 2271 Plywood and blockboard for exterior use
AS 2754.3 Adhesives for non-structural applications
J3. WORKMANSHIP
All carpentry work shall conform to AS 1684 and shall be of the best trade practice, using competent
tradesmen, equipment and materials with all incidental work to produce the finished product. Each
member shall be spaced at centres not exceeding those specified or indicated on drawings. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any damage due to shrinkage of timbers and shall replace or make
good affected areas to the Architect’s satisfaction. All timbers shall be in long lengths. Each dressed
timber surface shall be finished smooth even and free from machine marks using machine and hand
sawing.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page J-1 of 9

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DOORS
J4. GENERAL CLAUSES
J4.1. GENERAL
Supply and install all internal and external doors as shown and as detailed. Doors shall conform to AS
2688 and shall be installed according to AS 1909. Timber used shall be select grade, well seasoned and
reconditioned with stable equilibrium content to suit conditions required. All solid core doors shall comply
with AS 1908 and have paint quality veneer facings with waterproof plywood for external doors.
All doors shall be of such construction to allow for insertion and secure attachment of all hardware &
furniture as scheduled. External doors shall be equal to Corithan or Cemac first quality waterproof ply
with solid core and matching KDHW frames, styles and rails. Doors shall be manufactured with bottom
clearance to suit floor finishes. Semi solid doors shall be fitted with lock blocks 120 deep by 600 long,
centred on the lock stile of the door. Fit locks, latches, closers and all other accessories to each door
noted on the door schedule.
Dimensions for all doors are nominal only and should be checked to fit frame sizes. Acceptable fitted
tolerances are 3 mm for any one corner when set flat on a plane surface. Door thickness tolerance is
3 mm provided that is constant for all doors of the one type. Additional frame members shall be provided
where necessary to take fasteners for hardware, including items such as locks, latches, push plates, pull
handles, kick plates, door closers, etc. as shown on the drawings and or specified herein. Protect doors
during manufacture, delivery, installation and in position to prevent any damage to face and all edges.
Any damage so caused will result in rejection and replacement of door at no additional cost.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DOORS
J5. MATERIALS
J5.1. DOOR AND GATES
J5.1.1. DOOR TYPES

Contractor to allow for the supply and installation of all internal & external door systems as specified and
detailed in the door type table in section J6 of this specification:
Refer to Specification Section M - Glazing for full glazed door specification. All external glazed door
units to comply with energy rating and glazing value requirements. Installation is to be in strict
accordance with manufacturers specifications.
Contractor to supply and install weather seals to all external doors. All door sizes listed in the above
schedule are nominal only and are to be confirmed by Contractor prior to ordering and installation.
All external pivot doors are to have provision for brush seals to be built into the door head. Brush seals
to sides and base of door are to be built into door leaf.
J5.1.2. GATE TYPES

Contractor to allow for the supply and installation of all external gates as specified and detailed in the
gate type table in section J6 of this specification.
J5.2. FITTINGS & HARDWARE
The Contractor shall supply and install all hinges & hardware in accordance with the Door & Gate
Schedules and in accordance with the following schedule to ensure the correct operation of the door
having taken into account the relevant door weight, construction and exposure location.
Refer to Appendix "Door Hardware Specification" for full door hardware specification.
The Contractor shall allow for the SUPPLY and INSTALLATION of all hardware including but not limited
to the following items to complete the installation of all doors, gates, and windows required for the
project:
 Floor/Wall mounted magnetic door stops

 Push and pull plates
 Buffers
 Indicator bolts
 Flush bolts
 Latches
 Locks
 Pivots
 Closers
 Handles
 Hinges
 Tracks
 Draught & Weather seals
Unless otherwise indicated all hardware shall be satin chrome finish and all external hinges and
external hardware shall be stainless steel and fixed pin. Check final location of hardware items with
Architect before installation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DOORS
J5.3. DOOR FRAMES

All door frames shall be as shown in Door Schedule details. Glazed doors shall generally be supplied as
part of window framing system. Fix all frames to stud, masonry walls with bolts and screws as
recommended by manufacturer of frames. Use stainless steel fixings for all external applications. Frames
shall be selected to suit swing, heights and types of doors as indicated on the drawings. The finish to all
door frames shall be as specified in door schedule. Refer to Specification Section T - PAINTING for
finish, colour & selection of each door.
J5.4. DOOR JAMBS

All door frames shall be as shown in Door Schedule details. Typically, new door jambs are to be solid
timber floor to ceiling with rebated door stop as per plan details. No top jamb for full height doors. In
cases where doors heights are lower than ceiling level, a head jamb matching the profile of the side
jambs is to be installed. In cases where the ceiling heights on either side of the door differ, the underside
of the head jamb is to be flush with the lower ceiling height.
New doors to match existing or relocated to have jambs and architraves to match existing. Fix all jambs
to stud, masonry walls with bolts and screws as recommended by manufacturer of frames. Jambs shall
be selected to suit swing, heights and types of doors as indicated on the drawings. The finish to all door
jambs shall be as specified in door schedule. Refer to Specification Section T - PAINTING for finish,
colour & selection of each door.
J5.5. INTERNAL HINGED DOORS

Contractor to allow for supply and installation of all hinged doors. All units to comply with relevant
Australian Standards. Contractor to ensure that hinged doors are installed in strict accordance with each
manufacturers specifications. Hardware and locking for aluminium doors to be supplied by window
manufacturer as required.
J5.6. INTERNAL SLIDING DOORS

Contractor to allow for supply and installation of all sliding doors. All units to comply with relevant
Australian Standards. Contractor to ensure sliding door tracks are installed in strict accordance with
each manufacturers specifications. Hardware and locking as per gate and door schedule and as
required. Top tracks and door hangers are to be concealed.
J5.7. GLAZED SWING DOORS

Contractor to allow for supply and installation of all glazed swing doors. All units to comply with relevant
Australian Standards and Energy Rating Requirements. Contractor to ensure glazed doors and gates are
installed in strict accordance with each manufacturers specifications. Hardware and locking to be
supplied by window manufacturer or door hardware supplier as required.
J5.8. ENTRY GATES

Contractor to allow for supply and installation of all steel framed entry gates. All units to comply with
relevant Australian Standards. Contractor to ensure gates are adequate construction suitable for spans
of members and nature of operation. Automated gates are to be sized according to weight and achieve
safe and practical opening and closing speed. All automatic openers are to be installed in strict
accordance with each manufacturers specifications. Hardware and locking as per gate and door
schedule and as required. Automated gates are to be fitted with sensors to ensure safe opening and
closing operation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DOORS
J5.9. GLAZED GATES

Refer to Specification Section M - Glazing for full glazed door hardware. Hardware and locking to be
supplied by window manufacturer as required.
J5.10.COVER PLATES
Contractor to supply and install aluminium cover plates to window frames where detailed to structural
posts and window frames. Cover plates to be 3mm thick generally but sized to ensure verticals create
thickness as required to match head and sill of framing details. Aluminium to be Ext Paint 06 finish as
per the Painting Schedule in this Specification, and to match colour of window frames. Ensure sealed
and watertight where required.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DOORS
J6. MATERIALS TABLES
J6.1. GATES
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.1 Screens, Fences & Gates.

GATE TYPE 1 Steel Picket Gate. 2.1 - Screens, Gates, Fences
GATE TYPE 2 Automated Swing Steel Picket Driveway Gate. 2.1 - Screens, Fences & Gates
GATE TYPE 3 & 4 Timber Paling Gate. 2.1 - Screens, Fences & Gates
GATE TYPE 5 FRAMELESS IMPRESSIONS toughened glass pool gate. 2.1 - Screens, Fences & Gates
J6.2. TIMBER DOOR JAMBS


ARCHITRAVE EX Existing or new solid timber period jamb to match existing 4.4 - Trims
period windows and doors
ARCHITRAVE 01 New 45mm thick solid timber jamb with rebate for door. Jamb 4.4 - Trims
to run floor to ceiling with no head & protrude 20mm from face
to wall. Finish to match wall.
J6.3. DOOR TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.4 Doors. Refer also to

DOOR TYPE 1 Internal 40mm Solid Core hinged Door 8.4 - Doors
DOOR TYPE 2 Solid timber panelled hinged door to match existing. 8.4 - Doors
DOOR TYPE 3 Internal Top Hung Timber Sliding Door. 8.4 - Doors
DOOR TYPE 4 Double glazed Aluminium framed Swing/Hinge Door. 8.4 - Doors
DOOR TYPE 5 Aluminium swing / hinge door 8.4 - Doors
DOOR TYPE EX01 Existing Solid Timber hinged Door with glass lead light. 8.4 - Doors
DOOR TYPE EX02 Existing Solid timber panelled hinged door. 8.4 - Doors
Contractor to supply and install weather seals to all external doors. All door sizes listed in the above
schedule are nominal only and are to be confirmed by Contractor prior to ordering and installation.
All external pivot doors are to have provision for brush seals to be built into the door head. Brush seals
to sides and base of door are to be built into door leaf.
J6.4. DOOR HANDLES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.5 Door Handles. Refer also to
Door Hardware Schedule in the Specification and Architectural Door and Window Schedule.

DOOR HANDLE 1 Lever door handle on round rose or narrow stile to aluminium 8.5 - Door Handles
door.
DOOR HANDLE 2 Flush pull door handle with integrated privacy set to internal 8.5 - Door Handles
sliding Door
DOOR HANDLE 3 Full height aluminium angle pull handle to sliding aluminium 8.5 - Door Handles
framed glazed sliding doors by window fabricator.
REFER TO DOOR HARDWARE SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DOORS
J6.5. DOOR HINGES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.6 Door Hinges & Openers. Refer
also to Door Hardware Schedule in the Specification Appendix Y7 and Architectural Door and Window
Schedule.

HINGE 1 Standard Door Hinge 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
HINGE 2 Door Hinge with Lift Off pin 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
HINGE 3 Standard Duty Gate Hinge 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
J6.6. SLIDING DOOR TRACKS


TRACK 1 Concealed top hung sliding track to Ensuite 2. Ceiling 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
mounted.
SLIDING ROBE 2700mm high top hung sliding door with no bottom track. 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
DOORS Allow 20mm gap to top and bottom for ventilation.
SLIDING TRACK Sliding Track for aluminium sliding window system. Recessed 8.6 - Door Hinges & Openers
into floor
J6.7. DOOR STOPS AND CATCHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.6 Door Hinges, Openers &
Catches. Refer also to Door Hardware Schedule in the Specification Appendix and Architectural Door
and Window Schedule.

DOOR STOP Floor or wall mounted magnetic door stop 8.6 - Door Hinges, Openers & Catches
J6.8. DOOR & WINDOW LOCKSETS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.7 Locksets. Refer also to Door
Hardware Schedule in the Specification Appendix and Architectural Door and Window Schedule.

DOOR LOCKSET 1 Internal passage set. 8.7 - Locksets
DOOR LOCKSET 2 High Security Mortice Lock. 8.7 - Locksets
DOOR LOCKSET 3 High Security Sliding Mortice Lock. 8.7 - Locksets
DOOR LOCKSET 4 High Security Mortice Lock with Electric Strike. 8.7 - Locksets
DOOR LOCKSET 5 Internal Privacy lock. 8.7 - Locksets
WINDOW LOCKSET Push key Lock to all Windows. 8.7 - Locksets

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DOORS
J7. DOOR AND GATE SCHEDULES
J7.1.1. Door Schedule - New & Existing Doors
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix Y1 - Material Specification. Refer also to Door Hardware
Schedule in the Specification Appendix and Architectural Door and Window Schedule.
No. LOCATION DOOR SIZE GLAZING HARDWARE REMARKS

D-EX-01 ENTRY EXISTING REF. EXISTING HANDLE 01, HINGE01, REMOVE SCREEN DOOR.
01 DRAWING LOCKSET 02 DOOR & SURROUND
GLAZING TO BE
REPLACED. RETAIN
LETTERBOX.
D-EX-02 SITTING EXISTING ~810x2060 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
02 LOCKSET01
D-EX-03 BED 2 EXISTING ~810x2060 - HANDLE01, HINGE01, PRIVACY SNIB
02 LOCKSET05
D-EX-04 STUDY EXISTING ~810x2060 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
02 LOCKSET01
D-EX-05 POWDER 1 EXISTING ~760x2060 - HANDLE01, HINGE02, PRIVACY SNIB
02 LOCKSET05
D-EX-06 BED 1 EXISTING ~810x2060 - HANDLE01, HINGE01, PRIVACY SNIB
02 LOCKSET05
D-GF-01 DELETED
D-GF-02 GYM TYPE 04 900 x 2700 TYPE 01 HANDLE01, HINGE01, DEADLATCH.

LOCKSET02 NARROW STILE
LOCKSET.
D-GF-03 LAUNDRY TYPE 01 900 x 2700 TYPE01 HANDLE01, HINGE01, DEADLATCH.
LOCKSET04 ELECTRONIC STRIKE.
NARROW STILE
LOCKSET. LOCKABLE
LARGE DOG DOOR
D-GF-04 BUTLERS TYPE 04 1000 x TYPE 01 HANDLE01, HINGE01, DEADLATCH. NARROW
2700 LOCKSET02 STILE LOCKSET.
D-GF-05 LAUNDRY TYPE 01 820x2650 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
LOCKSET01
D-GF-06 ENSUITE 2 TYPE 03 ~900x2700 - HANDLE02, TRACK01 PRIVACY SNIB
D-GF-07 GYM TYPE 02 ~810x2060 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,

LOCKSET05
D-GF-08 WIR TYPE 02 ~810x2060 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
LOCKSET01
D-GF-09 ENSUITE 1 TYPE 02 ~810x2060 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
LOCKSET05
D-FF-01 RUMPUS TYPE 01 820x2700 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
LOCKSET01
D-FF-02 BED 4 TYPE 01 820x2700 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
LOCKSET05
D-FF-03 BATH TYPE 01 720x2700 - HANDLE01, HINGE01, PRIVACY SNIB
LOCKSET05
D-FF-04 LINEN TYPE 01 720x2700 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
LOCKSET05
D-FF-05 BED 3 TYPE 01 820x2700 - HANDLE01, HINGE01,
LOCKSET05
Refer to WD10 in the architectural drawing set.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
DOORS
J7.1.2. Gate Schedule
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix Y1. Refer also to Door Hardware Schedule in the Specification
Appendix and Architectural Door and Window Schedule.
No. LOCATION GATE SIZE GLAZING HARDWARE REMARKS

GATE 01 ENTRY PATH 900 x N/A HANDLE 01, LOCK BOX
1800mm LOCKSET 04 ELECTRIC
STRIKE
GATE 02 DRIVEWAY 2500 x N/A REMOTE OPERATE

1800mm SWING GATE MOTOR
GATE 03 BIKE STORE 900 x N/A HANDLE 01, LOCK BOX
2400mm
GATE 04 REAR YARD 900 x N/A HANDLE 01, LOCK BOX
2400mm
GATE 05 POOL 850 x POOL GLASS TO GLASS POOL GATE & HARDWARE TO
1200mm FENCE SAFETY HINGE, POOL COMPLY WITH AS 1926
GATE LATCH
Refer to WD10 in the architectural drawing set.
J8. COMPLETION
On completion of all door installations, all frames, hardware, door panels and glazing are to be cleaned
and polished as required using techniques suitable to avoid the possibility of scratching and surface in
any way whatsoever. Ensure all doors, glass and hardware are protected from damage and thoroughly
cleaned prior to hand over at Practical Completion. Complete work in accordance with instructions and
written variation orders, Contractor to provide a Warranty covering satisfactory performance of the
complete installation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section K
JOINERY
K. JOINERY
K1. SCOPE OF WORKS
The Contractor shall coordinate the completion of the installation of all joinery items including but not
limited to, Carcasses, Cupboard shelving, Benchtops, Splashbacks, TV units / brackets, Feature Wall
Panelling, Vanity Units, Benches, Desks and any other units in locations indicated on Architectural
drawings and arrange other trades to fit-off equipment and services associated with the completed
cupboard units. Arrange delivery and installation of all units to suit progress of the Works.
K2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
drawings.

AS 2754.3 Adhesives for non-structural applications
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page K-1 of 4

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
JOINERY
K3. WORKMANSHIP
Joinery Fittings shall be framed up with all timbers properly housed together securely plugged to walls
and finished in a neat and workman like manner. Cupboards generally to be constructed with elements
listed below except where specifically noted on drawings. Where medium density fibreboard (“MDF”)
elements are specified as part of joinery units to wet area the material shall be of high moisture resistant
type (“HMR”).
K3.1. CONSTRUCTION
ELEMENT MATERIALS
Carcass Bottoms, sides and divisions to be 18 mm (MDF) with 0.8 mm melamine surface.
Provide with matching PVC edge strips to all exposed edges. Where parts of carcase
are exposed (ie no cupboard doors) it shall be faced and edged in MDF suitable for
paint finis
Backs 18 mm melamine faced MDF.
Fixed Not Exposed - 18 mm MDF with 0.8 mm melamine surface. Provide matching PVC
Shelving edge strips to all exposed edges.
Adjustable Not Exposed - 18 mm MDF with 0.8 mm melamine surface. Provide matching PVC
Shelves edge strips to all exposed edges.
Shelf Support all adjustable shelving on stainless pins with matching ferrules set in carcase
Supports at maximum 100 centres to allow for full adjustment of all shelving. Shelf supports to
be Hettich Code 28 and matching ferrules Code 129 or equal approved.
Kicker 18 mm MDF faced and edged in selected laminate sealed at junction with floor finish
with silicone sealant.
Kitchen The Contractor shall take delivery and install each item in full compliance with the
Equipment appliance manufacturer’s recommendations.
The Joinery subcontractor shall provide integrated doors to both dishwashers and fit to
appliances as part of cupboard install
Sinks, Provide cut-outs for all supply and waste pipes together with suitable flanges to seal
Basins and pipe openings within cupboard carcase. Refer also to Sanitary Fittings schedule for
Troughs free-standing wall mounted vanity basins with exposed bottle traps.
Hanging To be Hafele or equal approved steel tube rail supported on satin chrome end and
Rails - centre pillars fixed to carcass walls and underside of overhead shelving. Removable
Wardrobes rails as noted.
Pin Board To be Designer Pinboards or equal pinnable felt of selected colour fixed to wall where
shown on Architectural drawings
Steel Plate To be steel sheet, flat and without distortion or twisting and free of loose rust, loose mill
steel, dirt, soil and grease and undergo an abrasive blast clean prior to powdercoating
or painting. 3mm express joins tolerated to ensure plate and sheet metal

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
JOINERY
K4. MATERIALS
Refer to Architectural internal drawings for all joinery layouts, elevations and details.
K4.1. JOINERY FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 5.1 Joinery Finishes

JF01 Water Resistant Melamine Carcass with matching ABS edge 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
strips – Matt White
strips – Matt Black
JF03 2-Pack Fibre Cement Joinery. 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
JF04 Laminate Finish - LAMINEX Natural on water resistant MDF 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
sheet with ABS edge Strips Polar white finish
JF05 2-Pak Joinery Finish on Moisture Resistant Square Edged MDF 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
sheet substrate. Colour 'A' "Lexicon Half" matt 2-pack.
JF06 Pre-finished Timber veneer on 18mm MDF Laminate. Oak rift 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
white wash. Lignapal VIBRANT OAK SILVER GREY 163.54.
JF07 CLEAF 'Yosemite' prebonded melamine on Moisture resistant 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
MDF substrate. "Light Carbon".
JF08 FORBO 'Bulletin Board' 2209 "Black Olive" (charcoal) 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
JF09 Aluminium Coverplate with Powdercoat Finish. EPT06. 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
JF10 Glass shelf toughened. 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
K4.2. SPLASHBACK AND MIRROR FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 5.2 Splashbacks and Mirrors

SB01 De Chirer Bianco Tile splashback. 5.2 - Benches, Splashbacks & Mirrors
SB02 Caeserstone CS 4004 Raw Concrete 20mm thick engineered 5.2 - Benches, Splashbacks & Mirrors
stone on moisture resistant MDF base.
SB03 De Chirer Bianco Tile BBQ bench & splashback. 5.2 - Benches, Splashbacks & Mirrors
MIRROR Viridian 'Mirra' superclear silver back mirror. 5.2 - Benches, Splashbacks & Mirrors
K4.3. JOINERY HARDWARE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 5.3 Joinery Hardware
JOINERY HANDLE 02 Lip Pull Handle with rebate. Powdercoated to match door 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
JOINERY HANDLE 03 Lip Pull Handle with return. Powdercoated to match door 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
JOINERY HINGE 01 Cupboard Hinge - Blum "Clip Top" Blue Motion joinery hinges 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
DRAWER RUNNER Blum Tandem full extension drawer runners with Blumotion 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
DRAWER INSERT Blum Cutlery drawer inserts as required 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
SLIDING DOORS Sliding Robe door runners with no bottom track. 5.3 - Joinery Hardware
KITCHEN BASKET HAFELE Base unit internal extension, arena classic 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
LAUNDRY BASKET HIDEAWAY SCL160D-W 60l soft close pull out laundry basket 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
TEA TOWEL RAIL 2 Arm pull out Tea Towel Rail 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
WINE RACK INDI wine racking insert to joinery above fridge. Custom 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
fabricate to suit size. Powdercoated.
ROBE RAIL Clothes Hanging Rail to closed robes 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
PULL DOWN RAIL Hafele Wardrobe rail 15kg 805.24.330 or approved. 5.4 - Joinery Hardware

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
JOINERY

TV MOUNTING TV Wall Bracket to suit size of TV 7.4 - Equipment
BRACKET
BINS Door mount waste bin with blum runners. HAFELE one2five 5.4 - Joinery Hardware
2x26L 500mm.
K5. COMPLETION
On completion of all joinery installations, all finishes, hardware, door panels, drawers, fixed panels and
carcasses are to be cleaned and polished as required using techniques suitable to avoid the possibility
of scratching and surface in any way whatsoever. Ensure all finishes and hardware are protected from
damage and thoroughly cleaned prior to hand over at Practical Completion. Complete work in
accordance with instructions and written variation orders. Contractor to provide a Warranty covering
satisfactory performance of the complete installation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section L
ROOFER
L. ROOFER
L1. SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply all materials, labour, tools and plant necessary to complete the roofing and associated works.
The work shall be executed in the best trade practice by tradesmen from approved firms specializing in
this trade, all strictly in accordance with the roof sheet manufacturer's recommendations.
The extent of work under this section includes:
 all Zincalume metal roof sheeting with selected colorbond finish

 all box gutters, eaves gutters, gutter boards, down pipes, rainwater heads, flashings,
spreaders & all other associated rainwater goods with colorbond finish
 all associated flashings, cappings and trims
 all associated sarking
 all existing Slate Roof finishes to existing pitched roofs
L2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
Comply with the following Australian Standards in the supply, manufacture and installation of the
complete roofing system -:
AS 1170 Minimum design loads on structures (known as the SAA Loading Code).
Dead and live loads. Part 2: Wind Forces.
AS 1650 Galvanised coatings.
AS 1736 Code of practice for pliable roof sarking.
AS 1562 Design & installation of sheet roofing and wall cladding ( Three Parts)
AS 3500.3 Plumbing and drainage - Stormwater drainage
L3. WORKMANSHIP
All roofing work shall be carried out by a firm approved by the roof sheeting manufacturers, who are
specialists in installing tray colorbond roofs to timber and/or steel sub frames.
The work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Architect. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the correct alignment of all roof framing to ensure that a reverse fall does not occur and shall prevent
'ponding' or pools of water remaining on the roof after rain. Construct all gutters, downpipes, flashings,
cappings, etc., in the longest lengths practicable. Short off-cuts shall not be used. Roof plumbing shall
be shop fabricated and machine formed wherever practicable. The work under this section shall include
all jointing materials, nails, wedges, straps, collars, fastenings, etc., necessary to properly complete the
work and make the complete roofing system entirely water and weather tight. Do all lapping, jointing,
riveting, seaming, soldering and sweating. Changes in direction of down pipes and spreaders, shall be
carried out with easy bends. Cut openings neatly in roof cladding to suit all penetrations including roof
lights, pipes, support brackets and other items penetrating the roof surface.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd \ Page L-1 of 6

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ROOFER
L4. GENERAL CLAUSES
L4.1. RESPONSIBILITY
Before commencing work the roofing sub contractor is to satisfy himself that all framing is to his
satisfaction, regarding straightness and level. Commencement of roofing work will be taken as
acceptance of roof framing being correctly constructed and that the roof slope, performance and
guarantee will be achieved upon completion of this trade.
L4.2. WARRANTY
The Contractor shall provide a warranty covering the water tightness of the roof and roof plumbing for a
period of Ten (10) years from the date of the occupancy permit being issued as per the Building Act.
The warranty shall include the roof sheeting, roof plumbing, cappings, flashings, gutters and downpipes
and shall cover leaks in, and displacement of, roofing where due to faulty workmanship or material. For
the duration of the warranty period should any damage be caused through leakage of the roof or roof
plumbing or because of defective workmanship or materials the Contractor shall immediately make
good any such damage.
L4.3. ROOF PITCH

The roof slope or pitch shall be as shown on the drawings. Before commencing any work the roofing
subcontractor will satisfy himself that he can achieve the design falls to gutters without endangering in
any way his obligations under the Warranty clause. On completion, the roof shall be tested to the
satisfaction of the Architect, to ascertain that the roof meets with the specified falls and conforms to the
requirements of this Specification.
L4.4. DISSIMILAR METALS

Ensure that electrolytic or similar corrosive actions are eliminated by physical separation of any
dissimilar metals and by avoiding the puncturing of roof sheeting or damaging the surface finishes.
Install sheeting to ensure there will be no trapping of condensation between roof and foil sarking below.
Fix all roof sheeting and flashings using brackets, clips and accessories as recommended by roofing
manufacturer and made from compatible materials. Any dissimilar metals shall be separated and
protected with suitable materials to ensure they cannot come in contact with each other. Any proposed
separation method shall be to the prior approval and satisfaction of the Architect.
L4.5. TESTS
Test completed roof together with all gutters and downpipes . Testing shall be carried out as the work
proceeds and before gutters and down pipes are concealed or built-in. Tests shall be done by plugging
outlets and completely filling with water. Gutter grades shall be tested by running water with a hose
from the roof surface.
L4.6. COMPLIANCE & WARRANTY

On completion of the roofing installation provide a Certificate of Compliance stating the entire roof
system including all tanking, roof sheeting, flashings, cappings, gutters, sumps, overflows, and
downpipes have been installed in accordance with the requirements of AS3500.3, the Contract
documents, this Specification, the drawings, and to the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction
over this part of the works.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ROOFER
L5. MATERIALS
All the materials to be used in the completion of the roof as specified in this Section shall be approved,
the best obtainable quality, free from all defects and shall conform to the relevant Australian Standards.
L5.1. ROOFING
All roofing shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturers roofing or tanking specifications to
falls as indicated on drawings. Fix waterproof membrane to framing to underside of sheeting.
L5.2. RAINWATER GOODS

Unless otherwise specified, all associated rain water goods including eaves gutters, box gutters, valley
gutters, ridge cappings, flashings, trims, rain water heads, and over-flashings shall be 0.60 Zincalume
Colorbond sheeting and conform to AS 2179 and AS 2180.
L5.3. PENETRATIONS & FLASHINGS

All penetrations for service pipes, vents, roof mounted equipment, fireplace flues, support columns and
brackets as required for other trades shall be completed by the Roofing subcontractor as part of the
construction of the roof. Where possible prefabricated flashing systems such as Decktite will be used
and installed in full compliance with manufacturers recommendations. Where purpose made openings
are required the roofing subcontractor will cut the opening and provide the upstand flashing to ensure
the pipe, flue, support column or item of equipment, once installed on the roof (complete with its own
over-flashing) does not jeopardise the integrity of the roof system and the warranty to be provided by the
Contractor.
Provide where necessary, form and fix all flashings in continuous lengths to the sizes and shapes
required to render the building watertight and as shown on the drawings. Material to be Zincalume
Colorbond coated steel sheet 0.60 mm thick or to match rainwater goods and roofing material. Apron
flashings to any penetrations through roof cappings must be adequately supported and have cross fall
to prevent ponding. Include all ridge and barge cappings and flashings to roof lights, pipes, services
and adjoining block work all as shown on drawings. Seal roof against entry of rain, moisture, or any form
of water at ends, ridges and gutters with pre formed standard moulded closure strips and associated
profile flashings.
L5.4. BOX GUTTERS

All box gutters shall be 0.60 zincalume colorbond sheeting, folded and returned to form gutters no less
than 100mm deep and width as per drawings. Box gutter sheeting to be overflashed and returned to
allow separation between flashings.
Box gutters shall be continuous in length and supported by zincalume corrugated sheet box gutter
boards or galvanized steel hangers allowing a minimum fall of 1:100 to sump drainage points with
overflow to Civil Engineers and Hydraulics Engineers details.
L5.5. EAVES GUTTERS

All eaves gutters shall be 0.60mm Zincalume Colorbond of sizes as detailed to match existing, mitred
and gusseted at all angles, lapped and riveted with pre-formed outlets for downpipes and spreaders
where shown. All brackets, fascias and/or clips shall be of Zincalume Colorbond to match gutter colour.
L5.6. DOWN PIPES

Downpipes to roofing shall be 90mm Round PVC, Zincalume Colorbond 125mm with spreader where
exposed, or as required by Civil Engineer & AS3500.3. Where downpipes are exposed it is to be
colorbond in colour to match walls as per the Painting Schedule in this Specification. Downpipe runs to
be in long lengths with minimum joints, all solvent welded, fully sealed and watertight.
Fix to walls using Abey or equal Zincalume Colorbond brackets in colour to match downpipes where
required.
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ROOFER
All downpipes to connect to charged stormwater system discharging to rainwater tank as per Civil
Engineers drawings. Stormwater inlet to rainwater tanks to be 800mm minimum below the level of the
lowest gutter inlet as per Civil Engineer's specification.
Refer Specification Section N - Hydraulics for details of the rainwater tanks and pumps.
L5.7. ROOF SUMPS & RAINWATER HEADS & OVERFLOWS

All roof sumps shall be fully tanked with falls internally to prevent ponding. Sump grate with integrated
puddle flange and clamp ring to be installed as required to manufacturer's specifications to ensure sump
is fully watertight. Overflows to be full width of box gutter with depths and heights as required under
AS3500.5.
Refer Civil Engineer Notes.
L5.8. ROOF INSULATION

Reflective foil sarking and insulation blanket shall comply with AS 1903 and shall be medium duty
double sided glass reinforced moisture permeable aluminium foil sarking—Bradford Thermoseal with
Bradford High Performance Ceiling Batts or equal approved with a rating. Fix foil sarking to entire roof
area as shown on details to roof battens below roof sheeting with bright side of thermoseal in downward
direction to still air space below roof. Ensure blanket is lapped 150 mm at joints and overlapped as
recommended by manufacturer to prevent any entry of moisture to inside face of ceiling areas.
Refer Appendix Y6 Energy Rating Report for total roof insulation requirements. Refer to Specification
Section H - Carpentry for details of all insulation to underside of slab, ceilings and framing.
L5.9. SKYLIGHTS
Refer to Specification Section M - Glazing for details of skylights Fully tank hobs to skylights, and lap
minimum 300mm up wall cladding / & parapet capping to roof.
L5.10. FLUES / COVER SLEEVES

Refer to Specification Section G - Metalwork for details of fireplaces.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ROOFER
L6. MATERIALS TABLES
L6.1. ROOF TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 1.3 Roof Structure.
Contractor is to allow adequate time to verify spans of Posi-Struts / Trusses or similar approved system
with manufacturer prior to order.

ROOF TYPE EX Existing timber framed hip roof with slate finish. Insulation Type 1.3 - Roof Structure
3 to ceilings for new ceilings. Membrane 3 to external
underside of frame where slate is lifted.
ROOF TYPE 1 Framed Skillion Roof with steel roof sheeting over. Insulation 1.3 - Roof Structure
type 3 to ceiling cavity. Membrane 3 to external underside of
frame.
Note: Existing Roof to Repair damaged or uneven tiling, fill gaps and make watertight. Refer
maintenance Schedule in Specification. Refer Maintenance Schedule in Specification. Allow new
Insulation 03 to areas where ceiling is replaced and Membrane 03 to areas where slate is replaced.
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.4 Roofs.
L6.2. ROOF FINISHES

RFEX Existing slate roofing to be repaired and made watertight. 3.4 - Roofs
RF01 New Metal Roof Sheeting. Lysaght ‘Trimdek’ Zincalume with 3.4 - Roofs
colorbond finish.
L6.3. FLASHING TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.5 Trims, Gutters & Downpipes

for capping.
profile/Material
L6.4. CAPPING TYPES


for capping.
profile/Material
CAP01 Ridge Capping - Zincalume Ridge Capping with Colorbond 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
CAP01 Parapet Capping - Zincalume Parapet Capping with Colorbond 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ROOFER

35mm max. return for capping.
TRIM 1 Folded aluminium coverplate with Powdercoat finish to suit 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
location and finish flush and true to adjacent surfaces. 3mm
min in size. Aluminium Parapet Capping to Butlers Roof edge.
L6.5. GUTTER TYPES


GU01 Fabricated Box Gutter with Sump - Zincalume Box Gutter with 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
Colorbond finish to match roof finish. 0.6 BMT minimum. 80mm
deep minimum. 400mm wide minimum. 20mm Marine Ply
gutter board laid to falls to sump
GU02 General Eaves Gutter - Lysaght Quad Gutter with Colorbond 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
finish.
L6.6. RAINWATER GOODS


DOWNPIPE 01 PVC Downpipe - Concealed PVC downpipe. Size as per Civil 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
Engineers Drawings
DOWNPIPE 02 Zincalume Downpipe - Circular zincalume downpipe with 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
Colorbond finish. Size as per Civil Engineers Drawings
OVERFLOW Custom Overflow to Box Gutter Sump. Custom formed 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
overflow to be full width of sump and to extend past face of
wall/fascia as required. Zincalume with Colorbond finish to
match wall cladding.
RWH Rainwater head. 3.5 - Trims, Gutters & Downpipes
Note: Downpipes to be connected to Rain Water Tanks as per Site Plan. Plumber to confirm runs of
pipes and logic for reuse of harvested rain water.
L7. CLEANING
Progressively clean the roof as work proceeds and leave the roof and gutters free of off cuts, filings, and
fastenings.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section M
GLAZING
M. GLAZING
M1. SCOPE OF WORKS
This section includes but is not limited to the following metal work items including the supply and
installation of ;
 All window and door glass

 Mirrors
 Shower screens
 Pool Fences and Gates
 Glazed Joinery Finishes
 Skylights
M2. STANDARDS, REGULATIONS & CODES
Materials and workmanship shall comply with the current edition of the relevant Australian Standards
and Codes.
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Anodized coatings for architectural

applications.
AS 1288 Glass in buildings - Selection and installation.
AS 1664 SAA Aluminium structures code.
AS 1734 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate.
AS 1866 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow shapes.
AS 2047 Aluminium windows for buildings.
AS 2048 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of aluminium windows in
buildings.
AS 2208 Safety glazing materials in buildings.
AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural applications.
BS 5889 Specification for one-part gun grade silicone-based sealants.
M3. WORKMANSHIP
Use skilled tradesmen, competent in the relevant field, for all work. All fabrication and assembly work
shall be carried out in the shop unless otherwise specified or permitted. Fabricate, supply and install all
glass items scheduled and/or shown on the drawings.
M4. GENERAL CLAUSES
All glazed units to be in full compliance with the requirements of energy rating. Alternative window
manufacturer/suppliers will only be considered on the basis they strictly comply with the specified
energy rating requirements and are subject to approval by the Architects prior to installation. All glazing
shall be carried out in accordance with AS.1288, Installation of Glass in Buildings. Glazing to windows
and doors forms part of the sub contract for supply and installation of windows and doors as previously
specified in this section. For details of single and double glazed sections refer to the Glazing Schedule in
this Specification.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page M-1 of 7

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
GLAZING
M5. MATERIALS
M5.1. SHOWER SCREENS

Shower screens are required to Master Ensuite, Ensuite 2 and Bathroom. All Screens shall be of the
frameless type and incorporate Glazed Shower Screen doors as drawn. Height of glass screens to be
Floor to Ceiling as per Internal Wet Area Drawings.
All dimensions to be checked on site. Provide aluminium channels recessed between tiles to support
side panels and to doors at perimeter walls. Glass shall be clear 10 mm toughened Type A laminated
safety glass minimum and in full compliance with AS 1288 glass. Aluminium channel to be installed after
waterproofing and fixings to be sealed as required to ensure watertight.
M5.2. MIRRORS
Supply and install Silvered Float Glass mirrors to Walk in Robe and where drawn elsewhere in
Architectural Internals Drawings. Thickness as required from height and width of panel to ensure safety
and fit for purpose installation. To comply with AS1288.
M5.3. POOL FENCE AND GATES

The glazed perimeter to the pool enclosure comprises of Fence Type 04 with associated Gate Type 05.
These are to be constructed from toughened Grade A safety frameless glass fence panels in accordance
with Australian Standards to a minimum height of 1200mm above the adjoining paved surface or
ground. All Glass fences and gates are to have Sealant Type 03 to pool side. Glass thickness to be as
required.
Glazed gates are to have POLARIS Satin 316 Grade Stainless Steel soft close hinges and Latches in
accordance with AS 1296 / 2012 & AS 2208.
Fence Type 04 is to be fixed into FRAMELESS IMPRESSIONS channel recessed to paving slab or deck
framing. Top of glazing channel to be flush with tile, paver or decking. Installation to be in strict
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Frameless glass to be toughened Type A laminated safety glass in full compliance with AS 1288 and AS
2208. Pool fencing to be minimum 1200mm high and comply with the Building Code of Australia and AS
1926-2012 as detailed. Refer to details and sections on Architectural drawings.
M6. MATERIAL TABLES
M6.1. GLAZED FENCES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.1 Screens, Fences & Gates.

FENCE TYPE 4 Glass Pool fence in concealed floor channel 2.1 - Screens, Fences & Gates
GATE TYPE 5 Glass pool gate with Stainless Steel hinges and latches 2.1 - Screens, Fences & Gates
M6.2. MIRRORS AND GLAZED WALL CLADDING

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 5.1 Joinery Finishes and Part 5.3
Mirrors and Splashbacks.

WF05 Viridian 'Décor mirror' Superclear silver back mirror. 5.2 – Mirrors

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
GLAZING
M6.3. GLAZING TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.1 Glazing

GLAZING TYPE 01 Double Glazing to Fixed / Awning Window System - 8.1 - Glazing
6mmClear/12AirGap/6mmClear
GLAZING TYPE 02 Double Glazing to Sashless Fixed Window System – 8.1 - Glazing
4mmClear/8mmAirGap/4mmClear
GLAZING TYPE 03 Clear Frameless Glazing. Toughened Grade A Safety Glass 8.1 - Glazing
M6.4. WINDOW TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.2 Window
Glazed window systems shall be as specified and as shown in the schedules below:
Contractor to allow Zincalume folded flashing with Colorbond finish to all window and sliding door
rebates as per typical details. Note: All Glazed window systems are to comply with the Energy Report -
Refer Specification Appendix.

WINDOW TYPE 01 Double glazed aluminium fixed window system. 8.2 - Windows
WINDOW TYPE 02 Sashless double hung double glazed window. 8.2 - Windows
WINDOW TYPE 03 Double glazed aluminium awning window system. 8.2 - Windows
WINDOW TYPE 04 Double glazed aluminium sliding door system. 8.2 - Windows
WINDOW TYPE 05 Single glazed channel fixed window system. 8.2 - Windows
M6.5. SKYLIGHT TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.3 Skylights
Contractor to allow Zincalume folded flashing with Colorbond finish to all skylight flashings as per typical
details. All Roof penetrations are to be flashed and made fully waterproof. Build up Skylight housing to
allow for installation of skylights at minimum 15 degree pitch. Note: All Glazed skylight systems are to
comply with the Energy Report.

SKYLIGHT TYPE 2 Fixed Aluminium Skylight into existing slate Roof 8.3 - Skylights
SKYLIGHT TYPE 3 Fixed Aluminium Skylight into existing slate Roof 8.3 - Skylights
M6.6. GLAZED DOOR TYPES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.4 Doors
Contractor to allow Zincalume folded flashing with Colorbond finish to all window and sliding door
rebates as per typical details. Note: All Glazed door systems are to comply with the Energy Report

DOOR TYPE 4 Aluminium Swing/Hinge Door 8.4 - Doors
DOOR TYPE EX Existing Solid Timber Door with new glass light. 8.4 – Doors

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
GLAZING
M6.7. APPLIED SEALANTS TO GLAZING

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 9.3 Sealants.

SEALANT TYPE 03 Protective coating for Glazing 9.3 - Sealants
To shower glass and inside pool area

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
GLAZING
M7. GLAZED WINDOW AND DOOR SCHEDULES
Contractor to allow for supply and installation of all glazed window and door systems. All windows and
doors to comply with relevant Australian Standards and Energy Rating Requirements. Contractor to
ensure windows and doors are installed in strict accordance with each manufacturers specifications. All
glazing systems are to be free of imperfections and impurities and treated to avoid thermal fracture.
Refer to Specification Section J - Doors for door type schedule.
All glazing to external windows & doors shall be Viridian units or equal approved as specified in the
glazing type schedule below. Glass type & thickness noted is minimum only—glazing is to comply with
Australian Standards and Building Codes including AS 1288 & AS 2208. Contractor to contact Architect
if glazing films present different colours.
Contractor to allow Zincalume folded flashing with Colorbond "Monument" finish to all window and
sliding door rebates, and skylight flashings as per typical details.
M7.1. WINDOW SCHEDULES

Contractor to allow Zincalume folded flashing to all window and sliding door rebates as per typical
details.
M7.1.1. NEW & EXISTING WINDOW SCHEDULE
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification & Architectural drawings.

No. LOCATION WINDOW SIZE GLAZING HARDWARE REMARKS
W-EX-01 FRONT EXISTING REF. EXISTING WINDOW LOCKSET EXISTING GLAZING TO
PORCH DRAWING BE PROTECTED
W-GF-01 BED 2 TYPE EX REF. TYPE EX WINDOW LOCKSET EXISTING GLAZING TO
DRAWING RELOCATED BE PROTECTED
W-GF-02 ENSUITE 2 TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
DRAWING
W-GF-03 DELETED
W-GF-04 BUTLERS TYPE 01 & REF. TYPE 01 WINDOW LOCKSET

ENTRY TYPE 03 DRAWING
W-GF-05 LIVING EAST TYPE 04 REF. TYPE 01 HANDLE03,
DRAWING LOCKSET 03
W-GF-06 LIVING EAST TYPE 01 & REF. TYPE 01 WINDOW LOCKSET
TYPE 03 DRAWING
W-GF-07a LIVING TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A BUTT JOINTED
EAST/NORTH DRAWING CORNER
W-GF-07b LIVING TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A BUTT JOINTED
EAST/NORTH DRAWING CORNER
W-GF-08a LIVING TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A LOWLIGHT WINDOW
NORTH DRAWING
W-GF-08b LIVING TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A LOWLIGHT WINDOW
NORTH DRAWING
W-GF-09 LIVING WEST TYPE 02 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
DRAWING

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
GLAZING
No. LOCATION WINDOW SIZE GLAZING HARDWARE REMARKS

W-GF-10a STUDY TYPE 02 REF. TYPE 02 WINDOW LOCKSET 100mm MAX OPEN
DRAWING
W-GF-10b STUDY TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
DRAWING
W-GF-11 WIR TYPE 02 REF. TYPE 02 WINDOW LOCKSET 100mm MAX OPEN
DRAWING
W-GF-12 LIVING TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
DRAWING
W-FF-01 STAIR VOID TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A HIGHLIGHT WINDOW
a,b,c,d WEST DRAWING
W-FF-01e STAIR VOID TYPE 03 REF. TYPE 01 LOCKING WINDER HIGHLIGHT WINDOW
WEST DRAWING
W-FF-02 STAIR TYPE 03 REF. TYPE 01 WINDOW LOCKSET 100mm MAX OPEN
SOUTH DRAWING
TYPE 01
W-FF-03a BED 4 TYPE 02 REF. TYPE 02 WINDOW LOCKSET 100mm MAX OPEN
DRAWING
W-FF-03b BED 4 TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
DRAWING
W-FF-04a BATH TYPE 03 REF. TYPE 01 WINDOW LOCKSET
DRAWING
W-FF-04b BATH TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
DRAWING
W-FF-05a BED 3 EAST TYPE 03 REF. TYPE 01 WINDOW LOCKSET 100mm MAX OPEN
DRAWING
W-FF-05b BED 3 EAST TYPE01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
DRAWING
W-FF-06 VOID EAST TYPE 01 & REF. TYPE 01 N/A
TYPE 03 DRAWING
W-FF-07a VOID NORTH TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
EAST DRAWING
W-FF-07b VOID NORTH TYPE 01 REF. TYPE 01 N/A
EAST DRAWING
W-FF-08 RUMPUS TYPE 05 REF. TYPE 03 N/A BUTT JOINTED GLASS
PLAN
M7.2. GLAZED DOOR TYPES

Glazed door systems shall be as specified and as shown in the schedule below.
Contractor to supply and install weather seals to all glazed window and door systems where required. All
window and doors sizes listed in the above schedules are nominal only and are to be confirmed by
Contractor prior to ordering and installation.
Contractor to allow Zincalume folded flashing with Colorbond "Monument" finish to all window and
sliding door rebates, heads and sills as per typical details.
Refer to Specification Part J - Doors for Door Types.
M7.3. GLAZED DOOR SCHEDULE

D-EX-01 ENTRY EXISTING REF. EXISTING HANDLE 01, HINGE01, REMOVE SCREEN DOOR.
01 DRAWING LOCKSET 02 DOOR & SURROUND
GLAZING TO BE
REPLACED. RETAIN
LETTERBOX.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
GLAZING

D-GF-02 GYM TYPE 04 900 x TYPE 01 HANDLE01, HINGE01, DEADLATCH.
2700 LOCKSET02 NARROW STILE
LOCKSET.
D-GF-03 LAUNDRY TYPE 01 900 x TYPE01 HANDLE01, HINGE01, DEADLATCH.
2700 LOCKSET04 ELECTRONIC STRIKE.
NARROW STILE
LOCKSET. LOCKABLE
LARGE DOG DOOR
D-GF-04 BUTLERS TYPE 04 1000 x TYPE 01 HANDLE01, HINGE01, DEADLATCH. NARROW
2700 LOCKSET02 STILE LOCKSET.
M8. COMPLETION
On completion of all glazing operations replace any damaged glass, clean and polish the glass and
mirrors using techniques and suitable cleaners to avoid the possibility of scratching the surface in any
way whatsoever. Ensure all glass is protected from damage and thoroughly cleaned again just prior to
hand over at Practical Completion.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section N
HYDRAULICS
N. HYDRAULIC SERVICES
N1. SCOPE OF WORKS
The work includes the furnishing of all materials, labour, and other items necessary for the fabrication
and completion of the plumbing, gas fitting, storm water, drainage and sewerage systems for the
residence. The hydraulic services includes for the provision, installation and connection of all plumbing
and gas services as shown on the drawings and as required as follows:
 Hot & cold water service in PVC

 Provision for new instantaneous gas hot water system
 Supply and installation of all fixtures and tapware
 All sanitary plumbing work
 Installation of complete sewer drainage system and connection to main
 Connection to Legal Point of Discharge
 All storm water and agricultural drains, pits and gratings
 Co-ordination of hydraulic services with all other trades
 Connection and approval of all hydronic heating & hot water services
 All gas plumbing, fitting and approval including to gas appliances
 Installation and supply of plumbing, drainage, filtration and heating service to pool
 Connection of H & C water supply to washing machine and dishwashers
The following work will be carried out by other trades:
 cut outs for basins and sinks in benches

 access openings as required for hydraulic pipes including structural beam and wall
penetrations
 electrical connection supply and cabling for heating unit, and air conditioning unit
 electrical supply to pumps forming part of water reticulation system
N2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
AS 3500 Plumbing and Drainage
All work and installations to be to Australian Standards, BCA requirements and current trade standards.
N3. WORKMANSHIP
Authorities and the Architect. Hydraulic Services shall be installed by approved, competent, qualified
first class trades persons, licensed and/or registered as required for the particular service to be installed.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page N-1 of 14

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
N4. GENERAL CLAUSES
N4.1. APPROVALS
The works shall be completed in accordance with all Victorian water supply, sewerage and Plumbing
Regulations, AS 3500 and any other relevant local council or authority by-law, regulation or other
requirement of any relevant authority. All plumbing work is to be tested to the requirements of AS 3500
prior to concealment. The Builder shall pay all costs involved in obtaining approvals, permits,
inspections and certificates and in observing all other requirements of the Authorities and for checking of
drawings by Authorities.
N4.2. WARRANTY
The contractor provides a warranty that the plumbing work and all fixtures will remain without defects in
materials and workmanship for the period from the date of Practical Completion as required under the
Building Act and requirements for registered builders under the Domestic Building Act.
N4.3. PENETRATIONS
All penetrations through concrete floor slabs, walls, & beams will be sleeved prior to pouring to the
requirements of the Architect, Structural Engineeer, and Hydraulic Engineer. Obtain approval for the
location of all penetrations prior positioning or to cutting any holes.
N4.4. CONCEALMENT
Unless specified otherwise all pipe work shall be concealed and shall not appear on external or internal
walls. Where necessary construct suitable ducts, bulkheads or other covering to conceal the pipe runs
having made due allowance by way of covers, manholes etc to provide full access to all service points, I
O’s etc. with access panels min. of 300 x 300 as manufactured by Trafalger or equal approved.
Locations to be approved by the Architect.
N4.5. DIMENSIONS
All levels and dimensions shall be confirmed on site prior to commencement of work or prefabrication of
pipe work to ensure connection to supply services and correct cover and gradients.
N4.6. NOISE INSULATION

In the event that any hot, cold or sanitary pipe has been positioned in a noise sensitive location, provide
insulation to pipework as appropriate to reduce noise. Suitable insulation would be ACI “Heatlock” or
equal approved, 38mm thick and foil faced preformed fibreglass section with 450 Sisal foil facing sealed
on all joints. Ensure all supply and drainage pipes are isolated from studwork, ceiling framing and floor
construction to prevent transfer of sound or water hammer by vibration to any part of the project.
N4.7. EXCAVATION
Arrange for the removal from the site of any excess soil during, and after, completion of excavation and
backfilling of all hydraulics work. Maintain, in a well drained condition, all excavations and ensure no
bedding material or pipe work is placed in the excavations containing standing or running water. Make
good and clean up all features damaged in the vicinity of the site caused by the execution of the
Hydraulic Services using materials to obtain a finish equal to and matching existing on the site. Top soil
shall be separated.
N4.8. EXISTING SERVICES

Make contact with relevant power authority prior to commencing work, to ascertain the precise location
of all services where they enter and run inside the site and protect the services as necessary during the
progress of the work at all times. Any damage to existing services shall be made good to the relevant
Supplier/Authority's requirements and approval of the Architect at no additional cost to the Contract.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
N4.9. WORK BEYOND SITE BOUNDARY

All work outside the site of the works, shall be carried out with the permission and to the requirements of
the controlling Authority with particular reference to Stonnington City Council unless otherwise directed
by the relevant Authority, where piping is laid under pavements, the existing pavement shall be sawn to
a depth of at least 100mm and then removed with pneumatic tools. No earth, rubbish or materials shall
be deposited upon pavements, footpaths or crossings. Pavements and roads shall be reinstated strictly
in accordance with the Authorities’ requirements, and to approval of the Architect.
N4.10. SETTING OUT

Set out pipe work as shown on the drawings. Locate pipes clear of each other and so that they are
easily replaceable for their full length where enclosed in ducts. Pipes shall not be buried in inaccessible
locations. Coordinate services with all others and check for conflicts or discrepancies before any work is
carried out, and notify the Architect immediately such conflicts are discovered.
N4.11. TESTING
Provide all necessary labour and equipment to carry out all tests as specified. Give AAT or equivalent
least one (1) day’s clear notice to the Architect of intention to carry out the tests. All pipe work shall
remain uncovered until tested and approved. Tests shall be carried out as described in the relevant
sections of this Specification. Remake all faulty joints and retest to the satisfaction of the Architect.
N4.12. PIPE INSTALLATION
N4.12.1. GENERAL
Pipes shall be set out generally 25mm clear of walls and installed in straight lines with constant
gradients. All pipe work shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of all authorities, this
Specification and as indicated on the drawings. Accurately establish penetration locations prior to
commencement of structural works. Where practicable, pipe work shall be constructed in the longest
possible continuous lengths.
Where dissimilar metals may come in contact, they shall be separated or insulated. Where such
materials are required to be connected, a comparable isolating connector shall be used to make the
connection. Full bores of pipes and fittings shall be maintained throughout and no internal projections or
obstructions permitted. All joints shall be fully sealed and water-tight. All pipes and fittings shall be kept
thoroughly clean at all times and the ends temporarily plugged, until connected, in order to prevent entry
of earth, rubbish, and other contaminating materials. Provide purpose-made covers of pressed steel or
rigid plastic. Do not use rags, paper or wood plugs.
N4.12.2. PIPE SUPPORTS

Piping shall be supported from the structure at constant gradients in the direction of flow with hangers of
adequate strength, and suitable plastic coated clips or brackets to prevent side movement. Additional
clips or brackets shall be provided at pipe joints, changes of directions and expansion joints. Fixings to
concrete or masonry shall be made with 'Loxin' or approved equivalent expanding type anchors used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Explosive powered pins shall not be used. Fix
the various types of piping independently. Do not use supporting metal straps or tubes, which are
soldered to waste and other pipes. Pipe work shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to
permit free movement due to expansion and contraction. All piping supports shall be plastic coated
metal or stainless steel clips and shanks and of a type suitable for adjustment of pipe gradient.
N4.12.3. FALLS
Lay pipelines to line and correct falls, in straight lines, point to point and with even gradients. Falls shall
be as directed by the authorities but shall not be less than 1:100. Bedding shall be to the relevant
standard, but not less than 50mm below the barrel of the pipes. Bedding material: generally sand and
material graded up to a maximum size of 14mm. Use 1:4 mortar where required.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
N5. MATERIALS
N5.1. WATER SUPPLY

Extend cold water supply to all sanitary fittings including basins, showers, sinks, troughs, hot water
heaters, hydronic boilers and to other areas as shown on the Architectural drawings and as herein
specified including the garden irrigation system and the spa & pool.
Refer Hydraulic Engineer's and Pool Consultant's drawings and specifications for additional details.
N5.1.1. GENERAL
All water supply piping shall be in PVC and shall be supported firmly in position and fixed securely to
withstand any forces arising as water flows through or is static in the piping system. Install pipe work in
straight long lines without sagging and with a minimum of joints.
Provide bends, unions, flanges, and associated fittings as required, including isolating valves, to allow
for the removal of piping and fittings for maintenance purposes. Provide tapered reducers, for changes
in pipe diameter, and large radius bends. All pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before
installation and any burrs and fins removed. Leaks, damage and defects occurring during installation,
testing, commissioning and during the warranty period shall be repaired and any consequent water
damage to other equipment and/or finishes shall be made good at the Contractor’s expense.
N5.1.2. POOL
The Contractor shall provide as required both a water point and drain point to pool & pond, as required
to be connected by the pool subcontractor.
N5.1.3. BELOW GROUND INSTALLATION

Pipes laid below ground clear of the building shall have a minimum cover of 600mm. Where a pipe is
laid below ground immediately under a proposed concrete floor slab, the pipe shall be surrounded with
150mm of selected filling to prevent corrosion. A UPVC pipe sleeve of suitable diameter may be used in
lieu of the selected filling. No pipes are to be embedded in any structural concrete.
N5.1.4. ABOVE GROUND INSTALLATION

Any pipe found to be noisy during the testing due to insufficient support or loose fixing will be rejected.
Where pipes terminate at taps or outlets, the lagged elbow, winged nipple, breeching piece, and the like,
shall be suitably anchored as required by location. Connections to fixtures shall be purpose made, short
and plumbed directly under the fixture tap connecting to lugged elbows or similar and be chrome plated
where exposed.
N5.1.5. HOT WATER PIPING

Hot water lines shall be fully insulated and fixed at a constant grade in the direction of flow, and shall be
supported by clips fixed in a manner which will allow for thermal expansion and contraction of the piping
without placing undue strain on the pipe joints or fittings. Care should be taken during the installation of
the pipes to prevent the entry of dirt or foreign matter by utilising plastic or metal caps.
N5.1.6. TESTING
All cold water piping shall be tested hydrostatically to a pressure of not less than 1700 kPa, or to twice
the normal working pressure (whichever is greater). The testing pressure shall be maintained for a
period of not less than two hours. All items of equipment which are not designed for pressure of this
magnitude shall be blanked off while the testing is in progress. Tested pipe work shall be blanked off
from the remainder of the system during testing. Keep accurate detailed records of all tests and submit
a copy of results to the Architect for approval.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
N5.2. FIXTURES
Supply and install fixtures as indicated in Schedules and install to the requirements of the appropriate
authority. Supply all necessary incidental materials required for the proper installation of each fixture.
Details of all showers, basins, sinks, troughs, cisterns, pans, and baths are indicated in the Fixtures
Schedule.
N5.3. HOT WATER
N5.3.1. GENERAL
New Gas Instantaneous Continuous Flow Hot Water system to be supplied and installed. Installation to
be as per manufactueres specification. HW units shall be located to the South Service yard, as shown
on Architectural Services. Contractor to confirm suitable proximity to fixtures prior to installation. Final
HWS locations to be confirmed by contractor and approved by Architect prior to installation. Provide
power to HWS as required. Project Plumber to assess proposal and confirm confirm suitability of
specification for the house.
Provide pre-lagged hot water lines from gas system to all fittings. Include for all penetrations, flashings
and over flashings. Provide all lagged pipe work from the units to complete hot water supply system.
The material used as lagging shall be "Kembla" or "Crane" or equal approved pre insulated copper piping
or insulated PVC piping selected for HW systems. Insulation on pipes shall be protected from
penetration by hangers and shall be fitted tightly to the surface, without gaps. Edges and ends of
sections shall butt up close to one another over the whole surface to be insulated.
N5.3.2. CONTROL VALVES

Supply and install stop and/or isolating valves on service branch lines as required for the connection of
new hydronic heating, instantaneous hot water booster and all other appliances and equipment to water
supply.
N5.3.3. TAPS AND OUTLETS

Provide and install taps and outlets as specified and as scheduled in this Specification. All hot and cold
taps and outlets shall be fixed within walls to lugged-tees, elbows or breaching pieces with approved
anchors. All exposed pipes and fittings shall be chrome plated.
Breaching pieces shall be located so that bonnets and spindles project the correct distance from the
wall and panel face, and tap bodies are readily accessible for maintenance. Minimum size outlets on
shower breaching pieces to the shower outlet shall be 20mm diameter. For taps and outlets care is to be
taken to ensure tap flanges fit properly against wall facings. Shower outlets shall be mounted in
approved location as directed by the Architect. All outlets shall be located so that they do not discharge
water over the person operating the taps. Supply and install eight (8) No.12 mm threaded brass wall
mounted hose bibs in locations shown on the drawings.
N5.4. SANITARY PLUMBING
N5.4.1. GENERAL
Supply and install all sanitary pipework to all fittings and fixtures as shown and including pipework for
vanity basins, showers, WCs, laundry trough, washing machine, dryer, stainless steel sinks and
dishwasher. Provide all sanitary fixtures, in the positions as indicated on the drawings, in accordance
with description and type as specified in the Schedule. Refer Hydraulics Engineer's drawings.
The setting out of plumbing penetrations in floors, duct walls and cavities shall be checked with the
height of the fixtures prior to commencing any fabrication or construction. All fixtures shall be securely
and neatly fixed into position and connected to services as required, strictly in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
Where possible, all fixing bolts, screws, and associated fixings shall be concealed from sight. All fixings
exposed to view shall be chrome plated. Where fixtures are required to be supported on stud wall
framing, provide additional backing plates drilled for bolt fixing of fixtures, securely bolted to the framing.
All fixtures shall be adequately protected from damage using Caneite, hard board and polythene
sheeting. Any protective coating shall not be stripped until all painting, cleaning, and associated works is
completed. Fixtures shall be handed over in an unmarked condition at Practical Completion.
N5.4.2. PIPE WORK

Pipes and fittings shall generally be UPVC pipe work to AS 1415, Class SWV as shown on drawings.
Insulation for all pipe work shall be to the requirements of AS 2032. All materials used in the sewer
installation shall bear test marks of an authority or the AS mark of the Standards Australia. Materials shall
conform to the following descriptions as applicable. All sewer drainage shall be installed in accordance
with AS 1260 and AS 1415 with solvent welded joints. In-ground sewer drainage shall be constructed
from extra heavy unplasticised PVC pipes and fittings and where exposed, drains shall be constructed
from unplasticised PVC pipes.
N5.4.3. TESTING
Give at least one (1) day’s notice in writing of the date and time proposed for testing of the whole or any
part of the sewer drainage system. Supply apparatus and materials necessary for, and carry out the
tests as required by any relevant authorities, in the presence of the Architect and the authorised
representative of the Authorities for the service under test. If any repairs are necessary, the test shall be
repeated until the entire system is satisfactory.
N5.4.4. EXPANSION JOINTS

Provide and install approved type expansion joints for all pipe materials as required by the applicable
Australian Standards, manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements of all relevant authorities.
N5.4.5. INSPECTION OPENINGS

Inspection openings on drains shall be provided and installed in accordance with the requirements of all
relevant authorities.
N5.4.6. WASTES VENTS & TRAPS

Install wastes to all fixtures. Install vents, fit traps and connect all fixtures to drains. Conceal all pipework.
Take wastes to drains through the floor.
Install internal floor waste types as per N5.2.1 HYDRAULICS FIXTURES SCHEDULE table in this
specification. Waste drains to be fully flashed and waterproofed. Waterproofing membrane to lap waste
reveals along with tiles and wall finishes providing seamless watertight finish.
N5.5. POOL FILTRATION AND EQUIPMENT

Pool equipment to be relocated, reinstalled and commissioned. Contractor to provide necessary
hydraulics, mechanical and power for lights, pump, filtration, chlorination, heating and cleaning of the
Swimming Pool. All equipement to run as required. All equipment is to be installed to relevant
regulations and Australian Standards. Contractor is to co-ordinate in with all trades and project plumber
as required.
For full specification refer to Section V of this Specification

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
N5.6. BARBEQUE
Supply and install Gas Barbeque to Outdoor joinery. Installation, plumbing, and attachments to be
installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and comply with all relevant BCA and
Australian Standards Regulations.
N5.7. GAS FIREPLACE

Supply and install Gas fireplace to living room. Installation, plumbing, and attachments to be installed in
strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and comply with all relevant BCA and Australian
Standards Regulations.
N5.8. STORM WATER DRAINS
N5.8.1. GENERAL
Install new charged PVC storm water system to serve all roof stormwater services including all down
pipes, and PVC stormwater system, including all drains, paving grates, pits, and soakage system.
Lay 100 mm ID UPVC stormwater drains with branches to all pits, gratings and downpipes. Install all
downpipes, stormwater pits and gratings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
at the locations shown and connect to the underground stormwater system. Refer to Architectural Site
Plan, Roof Plan and Civil Engineer’s Drawings for general Stormwater layout.
N5.8.2. PITS & GRATINGS

All concrete and PVC pits and gratings shall be constructed in accordance with the details and
dimensions as indicated on both Architectural and Engineers drawings. Accurately set pipes, which
penetrate pit walls into the correct positions and fully seal the junctions between the pipes and walls to
ensure waterproof installation. Concrete pits and trenches unless otherwise specified shall be fitted with
"Gatic" or equal approved covers and/or gratings, supplied and installed complete with frames and
finished in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, to conform to the position, levels and
grades as indicated on Drawings.
Refer Civil Engineer’s Drawings for Pit Sizes.
Refer Specification Part G - Metalwork, Part C - Excavation & Drainage & Part D - Concrete for Pits,
Trenches & External Floor Wastes, and Gratings.
N6. MATERIALS TABLES
N6.1. EXTERNAL TAPS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.4 Equipment.

GARDEN TAP 5 x Wall/Post Mounted 12mm Threaded Brass Garden Tap 2.4 - Equipment
Installed as located on Proposed Site Plans WD08 and WD09. Locations to be confirmed by owner.
N6.2. IN GROUND DRAINAGE


PIT Garden Drainage Pit. Concrete Pit with GATIC style L/D Gal 2.5 - Drainage
Steel Grate Lid/insert

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
N6.3. GAS BBQ SUPPLY

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.4 Equipment.

GAS BBQ OUTLET Gas Valve Outlet 2.4 - Equipment
N6.4. SINKS
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 6.1 Sanitary.

SINK 1 Undermount Stainless Steel large single bowl sink with 6.1 - Sanitary
chopping board, strainer & rollamat
TROUGH Single undermount Stainless Steel laundry trough 6.1 - Sanitary
N6.5. VANITY BASINS


VANITY 1 APAISER 'Orbit' Above counter stone washbasin. 6.1 – Sanitary
VANITY 2 530mm VITRA S-line 'S50' under counter washbasin 6.1 – Sanitary
N6.6. BATHS

BATH 01 Porcelain Enamelled Pressed Steel Bath with hob to rear and 6.1 - Sanitary
tiled front, with pop up waste, & overflow in chrome
N6.7. TOILET AND FLUSHINGS


TOILET 1 Wall Hung ceramic pan with IN-WALL CISTERN 01 6.1 - Sanitary
IN WALL CISTERN Inwall cisten with mechanical flushing and pushplate 6.1 - Sanitary
N6.8. PLUMBED IN APPLIANCES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 6.2 Appliances and Part P
Electrical of this specification for a list of appliances. Provide waterline for the following appliances:
 Coffee Machine (appliance by owner)
 Fridge 1
 Dishwasher
 Washing Machine
Provide gasline for the following appliances:

 BBQ
 Fireplace 1

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
N6.9. TAPWARE
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 6.3 Tapware.

TAPWARE 1 Wall Mount Basin Mixer 6.3 - Tapware
TAPWARE 2 Basin Spout 6.3 - Tapware
TAPWARE 3 Bath / Basin Spout 6.3 - Tapware
TAPWARE 4 Wall Mounted Showerhead 6.3 - Tapware
TAPWARE 5 Kitchen / Laundry Bench Mixer with pull out hose. 6.3 - Tapware
TAPWARE 6 Kitchen Mixer 6.3 - Tapware
TAPWARE 7 Instant Boiling, Chilled, Filtered and Sparkling water tap/unit. 6.3 – Tapware
TAPWARE 8 Washing Machine Stops 6.3 – Tapware
TAPWARE 9 Hand held rail shower 6.3 – Tapware
N6.10. INTERNAL FLOOR WASTE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 6.4 Accessories

FWG Stainless Steel drain 6.4 - Accessories
N6.11. HOT WATER SERVICE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 6.4 Accessories.

HOTWATER SERVICE New Instantaneous Gas Hot Water System 6.4 - Accessories
Located to wall of service yard. Supply and install Instantaneous Gas Hot water system. Allow
thermostatic mixing values to allow 70 degree water to Laundry and Kitchen and 50 degree water to all
other hot water outlets.
N6.12. HYDRAULICS SCHEDULES
N6.12.1. Hydraulics Schedule - Ground Floor
General Note:
ROOM REFERENCE QTY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
MASTER VANITY 1 1 Bench mount stone vanity basin Mount to
ENSUITE Benchtop
TOILET 1 1 Wall Hung ceramic pan with IN-WALL CISTERN Wall mounted.
IN WALL CISTERN 1 Inwall cisten with mechanical flushing Recess to wall

above WC01
TAPWARE 1 3 Wall Mounted basin & shower mixers Wall mounted.
TAPWARE 3 1 Wall Mounted basin spout Wall mounted.
TAPWARE 4 1 Wall mounted shower rose & arm Wall mounted.
TAPWARE 9 1 Wall mounted hand shower Wall mounted.
FLOOR WASTE 1 1 Stainless Steel Drain To Shower Floor
POWDER VANITY 1 1 Bench mount stone vanity basin Mount to

ROOM Benchtop
TOILET 1 1 Wall Hung ceramic pan with IN-WALL CISTERN Wall mounted.
IN WALL CISTERN 1 Inwall cistern with mechanical flushing Recess to wall

above WC01

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS

TAPWARE 1 1 Wall Mounted basin mixer Wall mounted.
TAPWARE 2 1 Wall Mounted spout Wall mounted.
ENSUITE 2 VANITY 2 1 530mm wide undermount ceramic vanity basin with Undermount
central taphole, pop up waste.
TAPWARE 1 2 Wall Mounted basin & shower mixers Bench mounted
TAPWARE 2 1 Wall Mounted spout Bench mounted
TAPWARE 4 1 Wall Mounted shower arm & rose Wall mounted
TOILET 1 1 Wall Hung ceramic pan with IN-WALL CISTERN Wall mounted
IN WALL CISTERN 1 Inwall cisten with mechanical flushing Recess to wall

above WC01
KITCHEN SINK 1 1 Undermount Stainless Steel single bowl sink. Undermount to

Optional chopping board, strainer bowl and rollamat Benchtop
TAPWARE 5 1 Bench mounted kitchen mixer with pull out hose Mounted on
kitchen bench
DRYING RACK 1 Custom timber lined drying rack with stainless steel tray Mounted on
and drain. kitchen bench
DISHWASHER 1 Fully integrated dishwasher. Finger pull Installed
Refer PART P - Electrical underbench to
joinery recess
BUTLERS SINK 1 1 Undermount Stainless Steel single bowl sink. Undermount to

Optional chopping board, strainer bowl and rollamat Benchtop
TAPWARE 6 1 Bench mounted kitchen mixer with sidelever mixer Bench Mounted.
Refer Internal
Drawings
TAPWARE 8 1 Instant Boiling, Chilled, Filtered and Sparkling water Mounted on
tap/unit bench over sink
LAUNDRY LAUNDRY 1 Single undermount Stainless Steel trough Undermount to

TROUGH Benchtop
WASHING 1 Refer PART P - Electrical Installed
MACHINE underbench to
joinery recess
TAPWARE 5 1 Laundry mixer with pull out spray. Mounted on

bench
TAPWARE 8 2 Washing Machine Stop Wall mounted

underbench to
WASHING
MACHINE recess
BATHROOM VANITY 2 2 530mm wide undermount ceramic vanity basin with Undermount to
central taphole, pop up waste. Benchtop
BATH 1 1 Porcelain Enamelled Pressed Steel Bath with tiled sides,
pop up waste, overflow in chrome.
TAPWARE 1 3 Wall Mounted basin, bath & shower mixers Wall mounted.
Refer Internal
drawings
TAPWARE 2 2 Wall Mounted spouts Refer Internal
drawings

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS

TAPWARE 3 1 Wall mount bath outlet Refer Internal
drawings
TAPWARE 4 1 Wall mounted shower rose & arm Refer Internal
drawings
BBQ AREA BBQ 1 Refer PART P - Electrical Gas Plumbed in.

Integrated in
Joinery
BBQ OUTLET 1 Gas Valve Outlet In Joinery to suit
BBQ Installation
LIVING FIREPLACE 1 Refer PART P - Electrical Gas Plumbed in
FIREPLACE 1 Gas Valve Outlet To suit

OUTLET Installation
GARDEN GARDEN TAPS 5 Wall/Post Mounted 12mm Threaded Brass Garden Tap As noted on Site
Plan
SERVICE YARD HYDRONIC AS Hydronic Boiler Gas and Water

REQ'D Supply as
required
HOT WATER AS Instantaneous Hot Water System Gas and Water
SERVICE REQ'D Supply as
required
POOL POOL EQUIPMENT AS Pool Equipment – existing to be relocated Gas and Water
AND POOL REQ'D Supply as
required
N6.13. HOT WATER SERVICE
N6.13.1. SCOPE
Allow to run hot water supply to the following points and equipment within the Residence.
N6.13.2. HOT WATER SCHEDULE - Ground Floor
ROOM FITTING SETOUT

MASTER TAPWARE 1 Wall Mounted Basin Mixer x 1
ENSUITE Wall Mounted Shower Mixer x 2
TAPWARE 3 Wall Mounted Spout x 1 - Link to TAPWARE 1
TAPWARE 4 Wall Mounted Shower Arm & Rose x 1 - Link to TAPWARE 1
TAPWARE 9 Wall Mounted hand shower x 1 - Link to TAPWARE 1
POWDER TAPWARE 1 Wall Mounted Mixer x 1
ENSUITE 2 TAPWARE 1 Wall Mounted Mixer x 1

Wall Mounted Shower Mixer x 1

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
ROOM FITTING SETOUT

BATH TAPWARE 1 Wall Mounted Mixer x 2
Wall Mounted Bath Mixer x 1
KITCHEN TAPWARE 5 Bench Mounted Kitchen Mixer with Pull Out Hose
DISHWASHER Refer PART P - Electrical
BUTLERS TAPWARE 6 Bench mounted kitchen mixer with sidelever mixer
TAPWARE 7 Bench mounted instant Boiling, Chilled and Sparkling water tap / unit.
LAUNDRY WASHING MACHINE Refer PART P - Electrical

TAPWARE 5 Laundry mixer with pull out spray. Bench Mounted.
N6.14. COLD WATER SERVICE
N6.14.1. SCOPE
Allow to run cold water supply to the following points and equipment within the Residence.
Allow for external wall mounted stand pipes for external garden taps as indicated on drawings. Garden
taps to be supported by 70mm SHS galvanized and painted posts embedded into concrete pad as
required, or wall mounted as required.
General Note: Allow for Rain Water Tank feed with mains override.
N6.14.2. COLD WATER SCHEDULE - Ground Floor
ROOM FITTING SETOUT

MASTER TAPWARE 1 Wall Mounted Basin Mixer x 1
ENSUITE Wall Mounted Shower Mixer x 2
TAPWARE 9 Wall Mounted hand shower x 1 - Link to TAPWARE 1
IN WALL CISTERN In wall cistern with pushplate

Link to TOILET 1
POWDER TAPWARE 1 Wall Mounted Mixer x 1
IN WALL CISTERN 1 In wall cisten with mechanical flushing

Link to TOILET 1
ENSUITE 2 TAPWARE 1 Wall Mounted Mixer x 1


CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
ROOM FITTING SETOUT

Link to TOILET 1
BATH TAPWARE 1 Wall Mounted Mixer x 2

Wall Mounted Bath Mixer x 1

Link to TOILET 1
KITCHEN TAPWARE 5 Bench Mounted Kitchen Mixer with Pull Out Hose
DISHWASHER Refer PART P - Electrical
FRIDGE Allow plumbing in if required. Refer PART P - Electrical
BUTLERS TAPWARE 6 Bench mounted kitchen mixer with sidelever mixer
TAPWARE 7 Bench mounted instant Boiling, Chilled and Sparkling water tap / unit.
LAUNDRY WASHING MACHINE Refer PART P - Electrical
TAPWARE 5 Laundry mixer with pull out spray. Bench Mounted.
POOL POOL HYDRAULICS Refer Pool Consultant
GARDEN GARDEN TAPS Wall Mounted Garden Hose Taps

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
HYDRAULICS
N7. COMPLETION
On completion of installation and testing, turn on isolating and control valves and purge and charge the
installation and test. Collect and submit to Architect operating instructions as issued by the
manufacturers for all gas appliances. On completion of all plumbing installations including hot and cold
water, storm water, sewer and drainage works, gas and exhaust systems provide a Certificate of
Compliance to the Architect stating all works have been installed in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract documents, this Specification, the drawings and to the requirements of all authorities
having jurisdiction over this part of the works

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section O
O. (DELETED)
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd \ Page O-1 of 1

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section P
ELECTRICAL
P. ELECTRICAL
P1. SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply and install the complete electrical installation and all associated services for the proposed works.
The Contractor is to familiarise himself with existing conditions of electrical supply and alter, extend and
replace as necessary to provide permanent power to the Residence. The works under this section shall
include but not limited to the following:
 Provision of a new switchboard enclosed in a suitable cabinet to the design to the approval
of the Architect.
 Relocation of meter to front fence.
 Provision of a new Pool Sub Board for Pool Equipment as required enclosed in a suitable
cabinet to the design to the approval of the Architect.
 Three phase supply to the new switchboard within the residence.
 Three phase supply to the pool equipment.
 Three phase supply to the Air Conditioning Plant.
 All lighting and power circuits to all areas of the Residence.
 Supply and installation of all internal and external light fittings, smoke detectors, electric
heating panels and other electrical appliances and equipment.
 Connection of all electrical equipment, switch plates, GPO’s and communication plates.
 Provision of all telephone and data cabling to locations as shown on the electrical plans.
 Provision of internal and external speaker points.
 Provision of Broadband & Television connections at the site boundary together with cabling
and connections to wall plates where indicated on electrical plan.
 Provision of isolating switches to Air Conditioning condenser units located on electrical plan
 Provision of power to Pool Equipment, pumps, automatic doors and gates, and other
external electrical equipment.
 Provision of TV, Video & data distribution.
 Provision of Home network and cabling.
 Provision of Security System.
 Provision of Intercom System including front gate and Kitchen Stations.
 Provision of Access Control to Front Gate & Laundry door.
 Provision of all racking required for installation of wiring and hardware.
 Provision of Monitoring.
 Provision of AV pre-wire.
 Provision of Wireless Boosters.
 Supply and Installation of Dining Room AV Equipment
 Install of all client supplied AV Equipment
The electrical subcontractor shall also be responsible for co-ordination and integration of their work with
other trades in order to avoid delays in the program of the Works.
Owner to supply AV equipment as specified in schedules. Contractor to supply AV equipment as

specified in schedules, and organise and take delivery, and allow for installation and commissioning of
all AV hardware noted.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page P-1 of 11

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
The complete electrical installation shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of all relevant
authorities having jurisdiction over the works, including the following:
 Relevant Australian Standards, including AS 3000

 The electrical supply company
 Telstra
 Victorian Building Regulations
 Building Code of Australia
P3. WORKMANSHIP
All work required for the completion and proper operation of the electrical, telephone, data, alarm and
TV aerial systems shall be completed by the electrical subcontractor.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P4. GENERAL CLAUSES
P4.1. EQUIPMENT WIRING

Supply all items of electrical equipment as herein specified and install in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and connect to electrical system of Residence. Upon completion of installation test
each item and hand over to Owner in full operational condition at Practical Completion. Provide all
guarantee cards, instruction books and accessories for each item of equipment to Architect for
presentation to Owner.
P4.2. ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

The contractor is to confirm availability of power from street and provide 3 phase power underground
supply to the residence meter including all permits, headwork's and cost associated with relevant power
authority.
P4.3. SWITCHBOARD
Provide new MSB, Clipsal or equal board in electrical cupboard located in the Basement Store Room,
complete with all circuit breakers, main isolating switch and accessories. The switchboard and enclosure
shall fully comply with the requirements of AS 3000. Within board provide for all lighting and power
circuits including circuits for all proposed air conditioning & heating systems. Select size of board to
provide 25% additional capacity for future light and power circuits.
Protect all power circuits with central balanced core earth leakage breakers, Residual Current Devices
(“RCD’s”) except for circuits to the refrigerator and washing machine, which shall have normal CB’s.
Allow for separate circuits to refrigerator, freezer and washing machines
Provide a printed circuit diagram and schedule and mount in a holder in the switchboard cabinet. Label
and number all circuit breakers and fit corresponding numbered caps on the fixings of all switches and
GPO's to provide circuit identification.
P4.4. WIRING
Supply and install all wiring between the switchboard and all GPO’s, light fittings and all items of
electrical equipment, and as shown on the electrical plans. Wiring shall be concealed in all cases, where
possible. Where this is unavoidable, it shall run in conduit, on cable trays, or cable ducts.
Wiring shall consist of V75 PVC insulated stranded cable where possible, with copper conductors to AS
3008. Minimum cable sizes for general lighting shall be 1.5mm2 and for power 2.5mm2
Wiring run underground shall run in PVC conduit suitably drained to ensure removal of all water which may
enter the conduit. Conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs removed. Where metal conduits are used,
the threads cut clean and full sized. Junction boxes shall be used in lieu of tees, and bends shall be used in
place of elbows, except at the ends of runs or adjacent to equipment where elbows may be permitted. All
metal conduits, light fittings, boxes and equipment shall be properly earthed.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P5. MATERIALS
P5.1. LIGHT SWITCHES

Supply and install all light switches where shown on the drawings and as noted in this Specification.
Switches shall be HAGER 'Silhouette' series switches or equal approved in accordance with placement
on the Architectural Electrical Plans and the finish of switches shall match the wall colour. Mounting
height for all light switches shall be 1100mm from Finished Floor Level to centre of switch unless
otherwise noted or directed. Where shown combine light switching and/or miniature dimmer controls
shall be mounted on common wall plates. In addition provide all two way circuits where indicated on
electrical plan. Replace existing faceplates and re-commission.
P5.2. LIGHT FITTINGS

Supply and install all light fittings where shown on the drawings and noted in the Lighting Schedule in
this Specification. The light fittings shall be installed complete with lamps, tubes, diffusers, transformers
and any other components necessary to complete the fittings and the suspension or fixing of same. The
selection and exact location of each fitting shall be determined on site with the Owner and the Architect.
Provide sufficient additional cable when roughing in wiring to allow for final adjustment to location of
each fitting.
Dimmers to be installed to all internal down lights, wall lights and feature pendant lights as noted on
Architectural Reflected Ceiling & Electrical Plans. Existing light fittings to be protected, made good and
reinstated or relocated as per Reflected Ceiling Plan.
In addition to other light fittings the electrical subcontractor shall install selected feature pendant and
wall mounted lights as scheduled in Lighting Table. Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling & Electrical
Plan for indicative pendant locations. Exact pendant and wall mounted light locations to be confirmed
with the Architect prior to installation.
P5.2.1. POOL LIGHTING

Refer to architectural site plan & pool contractor drawings for pool lighting setout to be confirmed prior
to installation. Operation via switches as per electrical site & ground floor plans.
Selected Underwater Light with conduit from pool to equipment area including light transformers and low
voltage connections to be installed to the in ground Swimming Pool (refer to lighting schedule). All
voltages, IP ratings and protection for lighting and electrical work in pool and pool area to be as per
relevant regulations and Australian Standards. Contractor to provide supply and installed of all necessary
associated works.
P5.2.2. EXTERNAL LIGHTING

Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling & Electrical Plans for location of proposed wall mounted spot
lights with sensors. Sensor lights are to be 3 way operation (ON/OFF/Sensor) as per plans. Exact
location to be approved by Architect prior to mounting.
All Landscape lighting is to be 12V control with no dimming or as required. Re-use existing stake lights, if
any, on new circuit via conduit to garden areas.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P5.3. GENERAL PURPOSE OUTLETS

Supply and install all General Purpose Outlets (“GPO's”) where shown on the drawings. GPO's to be
Clipsal Slimline or equal approved and shall be matt white finish to white walls unless otherwise noted on
Architectural Internals Drawings. Mounting heights shall be either 300 or 1200mm above floor, unless
nominated otherwise on the drawings. GPO’s shall be set flush with adjacent wall surface and shall
contain combination switch plugs and rocker switches all rated at 240V - 10 amp unless 15 amp circuit
is required. Generally all GPO’s shall be double outlets unless specifically nominated on the drawings.
Provide circuit identification numbers and combine light and or equipment switching (eg fans) on same
plate where possible. Where equipment switching is required on common GPO plate provide engraved
lettering on rocker switch to clearly identify item of equipment controlled by relevant switch.
Consult with other subcontractors to determine the location of GPO’s for washing machine, dryer,
dishwasher, range-hood, exhaust fans, ovens, cooktop, and power supply to other items of electrical
equipment. When located within cupboards provide mounting block and locate GPO in an accessible
location within cupboard to approval of the Architect. Provide GPO’s for all kitchen appliances as
specified. Provide waterproof external GPO’s where shown mounted approximately 1200 above finished
floor level on external walls as directed. Provide isolating weatherproof GPO's for A/C condenser(s).
Provide sufficient additional cable when roughing in wiring to allow for final adjustment of location of each
outlet. Numbers and locations of switches to be as required based on the Architectural Plans & Electrical
drawings and the Specification. The exact location of each GPO shall be determined on site with the Owner
and the Architect. Replace existing faceplates and re-commission.
P5.3.1. GPO's / CIRCUITS

Numbers and locations of circuits & switches to be as required based on the Architectural Plans & Electrical
drawings and the Specification.
P5.4. EXHAUST SYSTEM

Provide electrical connections and switching for all exhaust fans. Refer Section Q – Mechanical of this
Specification and Mechanical contractors specification appendix for additional details.
P5.5. WHITE GOODS AND APPLIANCES

The Contractor shall supply and install all white goods and appliance items. Contractor to allow for and
include all associated power supplies, separate circuit breakers, cables, isolation switch controls and
accessories as required to complete the installation.
The final and exact location of each GPO for all items of equipment shall be agreed with Architect prior
to installation. The following are additional notes on appliances.
P5.5.1. RANGEHOOD
Provide electrical connections and switching for Kitchen Rangehoods. Provide GPO for Rangehoods
concealed in bulkhead above cooktop. Provide ducting kit, waterproof roof penetration flashings as
required. Contractor to confirm rangehood operation is fit for purpose.
P5.5.2. COOK TOP

Provide GPO for Induction cooktop inset in kitchen benchtop on separate circuit. Mount where directed
in space below bench.
P5.5.3. DISHWASHER
Provide GPO for dishwasher below bench to Kitchen. Mount in accessible location where directed in
cupboard space adjacent to dishwasher below bench.
P5.5.4. REFRIGERATOR
Provide GPO for refrigerator in cavity as documented. Refrigerator to be supplier by owner and installed
by contractor. GPO to be accessible and allow for correct operation of fridge.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P5.5.5. OVENS
Install selected wall ovens integrated into joinery wall unit in kitchen. Provide separate circuit direct wired
back to switchboard for each oven unit.
P5.5.6. MICROWAVE
Provide GPO for microwave in cavity to Butlers as documented. Microwave to be supplier by owner and
installed by contractor. GPO to be accessible and allow for correct operation of microwave.
P5.5.7. INSTANT BOILING / CHILLED WATER TAP

Provide GPO for bench mounted Instant boiling/chilled tap unit to Butlers Sink. Mount GPO in accessible
location where directed in cupboard space adjacent to Zip Tap below bench.
P5.5.8. WASHING MACHINE

Provide GPO for under bench washing machine to Laundry. Washing Machine to be supplier by owner
and installed by contractor. Mount GPO in accessible location where directed in recess below bench.
P5.5.9. CLOTHES DRYER

Provide GPO for under bench clothes dryer to Laundry. Clothes dryer to be supplier by owner and
installed by contractor. Mount GPO in accessible location where directed in recess below bench.
P5.5.10. ELECTRIC HEAT PANEL

Contractor to provide power supply for 1no. Slimline radiant heat panel with timer switch mounted inside
Laundry Drying Cupboard. Mount GPO or wired connection, fixing and installation as per manufacturers
specifications.
P5.5.11. ELECTRIC HEAT STRIP

Contractor to provide power supply for Ceiling mounted external Heater to soffit to the Outdoor Living
and Dining. Mount GPO or wired connection directly above heat strip and concealed from view and
weather proof.
P5.5.12. ELECTRIC TOWEL RAILS

Contractor to provide power supply for wall mounted towel rails x 3 to Master Ensuite. Mount GPO or
wired connection concealed from view and water proof.
P5.5.13. ELECTRIC UNDERFLOOR HEATING

Contractor to provide power supply for electric underfloor heating to Ensuite 1 & Bathroom. Mount GPO
or wired connection concealed from view and water proof.
P5.5.14. BBQ
Install selected in built BBQ to external Joinery unit. Mount GPO or wired connection concealed from
view and water proof in accessible location where directed in cupboard space adjacent to BBQ below
bench.
P5.5.15. FIREPLACE
Install selected in-built gas fireplace to Living room. Mount GPO or wired connection as directed by
manufacturer.
P5.5.16. THERMOSTATS
Thermostats to be wall mounted above and inline with light switches generally. Architect to approve final
locations.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P5.6. EQUIPMENT
In addition to the previously mentioned items the following items will also be supplied & installed:
 TV, video & data distribution.

 Home networking & cabling.
 Security system.
 Smoke detection system.
 Access Control System with keypads and electric strikes.
 Intercom System with 1 x external station and 1 x internal stations.
 240v electrical.
 Audio visual pre-wire.
Owner to supply AV equipment as specified in schedules. Contractor to supply AV equipment as

specified in schedules, and organise and take delivery, and allow for installation and commissioning of
all AV hardware noted.
The Contractor is to ensure all works are coordinated between the electrical contractors and other
trades. Numbers and locations of equipment items to be as required for operation and as based on the
Architectural Plans & Electrical drawings and the Specification.
P5.6.1. TELEVISION, VIDEO & DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM & CABLING

All cabling shall extend to Electrical Hub and each TV area, aerial cabling to roof mounted aerial
amplifier. Provide GPO for power supply to amplifier and all access points. Contractor to allow for TV
Video & Data, Home Network Cabling & Antennae Installation as required.
Provide home network cabling & Data points. Provide outlets for TV on wall plates to match slimline GPO
plates in profile, size and colour. Sockets and outlets shall be selected to suit RG6 quad shielded cable,
Cat6 cable, and incorporate mains voltage isolation. Where shown on drawings provide telephone to
points mounted on suitable wall plates located generally at 300 above FFL or to height as noted for
directly adjacent GPO’s. Provide additional data points mounted on separate plates where shown. All
items, points, and locations to be confirmed by owner prior to supply and installation.
P5.6.2. SECURITY, KEYLESS ENTRY & ALARM SYSTEM

Security system to include supply, installation, wiring & commissioning of system, PIR's, screamers,
security keypads, electric door strikes, access panels, reed switches and other items as listed below, and
as per Section J - Doors. Smoke detectors to be integrated into security system.
P5.6.3. SMOKE DETECTORS

Supply and install ceiling mounted FIRETRONICS Flush smoke Detectors 12-24V DC Hard Wired and
interlinked with Alkaline battery backup to comply with AS 3786. Refer to Architectural Electrical Plan for
locations. Builder to be responsible to meet regulation layout.
P5.6.4. AUDIO INTERCOM & TELEPHONE SYSTEM

Video intercom and audio system to be installed with points located as per Architectural Reflected Ceiling &
Electrical Plans. All points to be generally 1100mm above FFL and flush mounted into walls as required.
Final position to be approved by Architect.
P5.6.5. SPEAKER POINTS

Install all speakers as per Architectural drawings
All speakers are to be provided by the owner. Contractor is to provide all wiring installation,
commissioning and associated works for all speakers as noted on the Architectural drawings.
P5.6.6. AV EQUIPMENT
Contractor to allow to organise and take delivery, installation, and commissioning of the AV Equipment
as supplied by the Owner. Contractor to organise and take delivery, and allow for installation and
commissioning of hardware.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P5.7. OTHER EQUIPMENT

Provide additional GPO’s as shown on the Architectural Reflected Ceiling & Electrical Plan. Refer
Architectural Internals Drawings for GPO’s to Wet Areas and Joinery. Final location of each GPO to be as
directed by the Architect.
P5.7.1. AIR CONDENSOR(S)

Contractor to provide isolator switches to all remote condenser unit(s). Indicative locations shown on
drawings. Refer to Section Q - Mechanical of this Specification and Architectural Drawings for further
details.
P5.7.2. HOT WATER SYSTEM

Refer Section N – Hydraulic Services of this Specification for details of hot water systems.
P5.7.3. FAN COIL UNITS

Contractor to supply power to all fan coil units as specified in Section Q - Mechanical of this
Specification and Architectural Drawings.
P5.7.4. EXHAUST FANS

Contractor to supply power to all exhaust fans as specified in Section Q - Mechanical of this
Specification and Architectural Drawings.
P5.7.5. POOL EQUIPMENT

Contractor to provide necessary power for lighting, pump, filtration, chlorination and heating to pool. For
full specification refer to Section V of this Specification, and Pool & Equipment Proposal & Specification
Please refer to Provisional Sum.
P5.7.6. AUTOMATIC GATES

Provide electrical supply, wiring, and other electrical requirements for automatic vehicular gates. Refer
Section J - Doors.
P5.7.7. BLINDS
Contractor to allow for as window furnishings as per "Lovelight Blinds" Specifications list and
Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans. Refer to architectural drawings for Motorised blinds Locations.
All tracks, blind mechanisms, guide wires and rails to be installed in strict accordance with
manufacturers specifications. Contractor to allow all fixing plates and adequate fixings as required to all
windows.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P6. MATERIALS TABLES
P6.1. AUTO GATE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.1 Screens Fences and Gates.

AUTO GATE Automatic Gate Opener (Swing to replace existing) 2.1 - Screens, Fences and Gates
P6.2. APPLIANCES AND TAPWARE

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 6.2 Appliances and 6.3 Tapware

OVEN 1 & 2 Wall Oven 6.2 - Appliances
COOKTOP Induction Cooktop 6.2 - Appliances
RANGEHOODS Ceiling mounted Rangehoods 6.2 - Appliances
MICROWACE Free Standing Microwave (supplied by owner) 6.2 - Appliances
FRIDGE Free Standing Fridge (supplied by owner) 6.2 - Appliances
DISHWASHER Fully Integrated Under Bench Dishwasher 6.2 - Appliances
WASHING MACHINE Under bench Washing Machine (supplied by owner) 6.2 - Appliances
DRYER Under bench Condensor Dryer (supplied by owner) 6.2 - Appliances
BBQ Gas Barbeque 6.2 - Appliances
TAPWARE 7 Instant Boiling, Chilled and Sparkling water tap/unit on Font 6.3 - Tapware
P6.3. LIGHT FITTINGS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 7.1 Lighting.
Quantities and locations of light fittings as per Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans and Site Plan.

LT01 Internal Downlight 7.1 - Lighting
LT02 Internal double downlight 7.1 - Lighting
LT03 Wall spot light 7.1 - Lighting
LT04 Recessed Step Light 7.1 - Lighting
LT05 LED strip light 7.1 - Lighting
LT06 Fluorescent batten light 7.1 - Lighting
LT07 Feature Pendant Lights (Refer PC Sum) 7.1 - Lighting
LT08 External Surface mount directional spot light 7.1 - Lighting
LT09 DELETED 7.1 - Lighting
LT10 External Garden Stake Light (Refer PC Sum) 7.1 - Lighting
LT11 Pool Lights 7.1 - Lighting

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL
P6.4. SWITCHES
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 7.2 Electrical, TV, Comms and
Security
Quantities and locations of switches and other electrical fittings as per Architectural Reflected Ceiling
Plans and Site Plan.

SW01 Wall Mounted Gang Light Switch 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
Security
SW02 Wall Mounted General Power Outlet 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
Security
SW03 Wall Mounted Comms Gang plate 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
Security
SW04 Wall Mounted autoswitches weather protected socket outlet 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
Security
SW05 USB Switchplate 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and

Security
SMOKE DETECTOR Ceiling Mounted hard wired smoke detector with battery 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
backup Security
P6.5. SPEAKERS
Security. Contractor to supply & install recessed ceiling speakers, and install client supplied free-
standing speakers as detailed in schedules. Contractor to allow receipt of delivery, all installation and all
associated materials and works as required.
Quantities and locations of speakers as per Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans

IN CEILING Recessed Ceiling Speakers to dining. 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
SPEAKERS Security
OTHER SPEAKERS as Free-standing or peripheral speakers. 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
per schedules Security
P6.6. ELECTRIC HEATING

Security.

RADIANT HEATER Ceiling Mounted Radiant Heating Panel 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
Security
HEAT PANEL Wall mounted Electric Radiant Heat Panel with Timer Switch to 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
drying cupboard Security
IN FLOOR HEATING Under tile heating matt with thermostat. 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
Security
TOWEL RAIL TR01 Heated towel rails to Ensuite 1. 6.4 - Sanitary Accessories
P6.7. INTERCOM AND SECURITY

Security. Intercom and Security system as per Electrical Plans and AVRUS Specification.
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
ELECTRICAL

INTERCOM SYSTEM 1 x AIPHONE FRONT GATE STATION WITH CALL BELL AND 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
VIDEO CAMERA INTEGRATED TO LETTERBOX Security
1 x INTERNAL AIPHONE COLOUR MONITOR STATIONS AT
HALL 2
1 x CONCEALED GATE OPENER AT ENTRY
SECURITY SYSTEM 1 x HILLS RELIANCE SECURITY SYSTEM 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
INCL. COMMNAV, ENCLOSURE AND BATTERY BACKUP Security
2 x NEVRAS LED TOUCH SCREEN ALARM KEYPADS
8 x PIR SENSORS PET FRIENDLY
2 x INTERNAL SCREAMERS
1 x EXTERNAL COMBINATION SIREN & STROBE
2 x REMOTE CONTROL
ACCESS CONTROL PIN CODE ACCESS TO DGF-03 & GT02. 7.2 - Electrical, TV, Comms and
ELECTRIC STRIKE CONNECTED TO INTERCOM AT FRONT Security
GATE. REMOTE OPEN TO DRIVEWAY GATE.
P6.8. ELECTRIC LOCKS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 8.7 Locksets and. Provide
conduits as required to run electric feeds to all gate and door electric locks.

ELECTRIC LOCK 01 Electric Strike to GT02 & DGF-03 8.7 - Locksets
P7. COMPLETION
On completion of electrical installation including lighting, power, telephone, data, communication

systems provide a Certificate of Compliance to the Architect stating all works have been installed in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract documents, this Specification, the drawings and to the
requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction over this part of the works. All manuals and instructions
to be collated and presented in a folder to the owner at time of practical completion.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section Q
MECHANICAL
Q. MECHANICAL
Q1. SCOPE OF WORKS
Supply and install the complete mechanical services installation and associated works for the heating /
air conditioning and ventilation installation including but not limited to:
 Provision of a two Zone Hydronic Heating System to: 9 individual pressed steel panels
distributed across existing ground floor areas & new upper floor; and in-screed hydronic
heated to Living, Dining, Kitchen, Laundry & Butlers.
 Provision of a Reverse Cycle air conditioning system with 2 x split ducted units to serve
ground floor, 4 x Bulkhead Split Fan coil units to upper floor, and 1 x external condenser.
 Provision of 5 x complete exhaust systems with fans and all associated grills and ductwork to
Wet Areas and Laundry.
 Three phase supply to the Air Conditioning Plant.
 All works as detailed in the Air Conditioning, Hydronic and Ventilation Specification
Appendix.
The mechanical subcontractor shall also be responsible for co-ordination and integration of their work
with other trades in order to avoid delays in the program of the Works.
Q2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
Cooling and heating loads are to be calculated using CAMEL software for Melbourne comfort
conditions. Standard Melbourne design conditions for summer are 22 degrees C internally from an
ambient of 35 degrees C DB and winter 21 Degrees C from ambient of 4 degrees C BD. Temperatures to
be measured at HVAC System temperature sensors. A tolerance of +/- 2 Degrees C once building has
stabilized is acceptable.
Air conditioning, heating and ventilation systems are to be designed by a registered building practitioner
(Mechanical Engineer) to industry standards, in compliance with the BCA and relevant Australian
Standards.
Supply and install all works described for this project in accordance with all the relevant authorities
having jurisdiction over the works.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd \ Page Q-1 of 10

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
Q3. GENERAL CLAUSES
Q3.1. PIPE WORK

Supply and install all pipe work where and as shown on the drawings. Pipe work shall run in a true line
with the building and shall be arranged so that the pipes can expand and contract without imposing any
undue stress on the pipe work, its suspension system or the building.
Expansion devices shall be installed where necessary, including anchors and guides that ensure the
proper operation of the expansion device. All pipe work must be installed to an acceptable standard of
workmanship otherwise it will be rejected. Horizontal pipes shall generally be run on a slight grade and
manual air bleeds provided at all high points in the system in an accessible position. Pipe sizes
nominated shall be nominal bore sizes.
All pipe work shall conform to the relevant Australian Standard Codes or Statutory Authorities
requirements. Pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt and scale before erection and open ends shall
be kept closed. Sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through walls and these shall be built into
the structure. Escutcheon plates shall be provided to cover these penetrations. All pipe work shall be
as scheduled below.
Schedule of Pipe work
Drains and Vents Hard drawn Copper tube to AS 1432 Type B.
Refrigeration Hard drawn Copper tube to AS 1571.
Q3.2. DISSIMILAR METAL CONNECTIONS

Where dissimilar metals, such as copper and steel, come into contact they shall be isolated electrically
from each other. Copper pipe shall be connected to steel or iron by means of brass couplings, using
brass screwed couplings up to 38mm NS and brass flanges with neoprene gaskets for pipes over 50mm
NS.
Q3.3. PIPE SUPPORTS

Piping shall be supported by clips, rollers or hangers at intervals not exceeding those given in the table.
(mm)
Pipe for Pipe Steel (m)
Intervals Intervals for Pipe Copper (m) MinRod
Nominal Size Horizontal Runs Vertical Runs Horizontal Runs Vertical Diameter (mm)
Runs
15 2 2.5 1.5 2 10
20 2.5 3 2 2.5 10
25 2.5 3 2 2.5 10
32 3 3 2.5 3 10
40 3 4 2.5 3 10
50 3 4 3 4 10
Supports shall permit appropriate movement for expansion and contraction in the desired direction and
prevent transmission of vibration. The amount of thermal movement shall be suitably proportioned
throughout the whole of any pipeline by the provision of anchors.
Branches shall be supported so that they are free to move and so that undue strain is not thrown on the necks
of valves or other fittings.
Supports shall be arranged so that stresses or loads do not exceed the load allowed on the equipment
by the manufacturer and do not damage the building structure or the pipes themselves.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
Fastening to the structure shall be in a manner approved by the Architect. Wooden plugs and explosive
powered fasteners are NOT approved. Provide insulated ferrules of compressive strength not less than
650 kPa between the pipe and pipe support on insulated pipes. Pipe supports may be of proprietary
brand and where used shall be in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Supports shall be
grouped where pipes run in parallel.
Q3.4. PIPE INSULATION

Supply and install insulation on all pipe work, vessels and all other hot or cold surfaces. Insulation shall
be installed by skilled tradesmen who are experienced and competent in this type of work. Immediately
before applying insulation, surfaces to be insulated shall be cleaned of all scale, rust, dirt, oil and grease
and then thoroughly dried.
The insulation shall not be applied until all pressure testing of that section of pipe work has been
inspected and approved by the Architect.
Insulation adjacent to non-insulated valves, flanges, pumps and other equivalent shall be neatly coned
down. Insulation and coatings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as follows:
Thickness of Insulation
Pipe Size Thickness (mm)
Less than 32 NS 25
32 to 100 NS 38
Over 100 NS 50
Unless otherwise specified, the nominal thickness of insulation on vessels and equipment shall be
50mm.
Q3.5. TYPE OF INSULATION

All refrigeration suction pipe work shall be insulated with foamed pre-formed flexible pipe insulation as
scheduled below.
Slide the insulation over the pipe work as work progresses and joints shall be sealed using an approved
adhesive similar to Bradflex LA6. Longitudinal joints shall be minimized, however where necessary these
shall be sealed with the approved adhesive. Insulation over valves and larger fittings shall be made
using larger diameter insulation, which shall overlap the smaller insulation by a minimum of 50mm.
Schedule of Insulation
Manufacturer Bradford Insulation - Bradflex

Generation II or equivalent.
Minimum Thickness 19mm
Temperature Range oC -74 to 104
Thermal Conductivity 0.040 W/moK
Density 110 Kg/m3
All insulation exposed above the roof shall be painted with acrylic gloss paint to protect it from UV rays.
Q3.6. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Q3.6.1. SCOPE
This section of the Specification is intended to provide the complete testing and putting into service of all
equipment described elsewhere herein, together with all painting.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
Q3.6.2. AIR FLOW RATES

The air flow rate shall be measured from all air outlets with approved techniques and using recently
calibrated approved velocity measuring instruments. The air flow rates shall be equal or not greater than
10% of those shown on the working drawings.
Allow for all work required to balance the air flow rates, and all balancing shall be completed not less
than ten (10) days before the r date of Practical Completion. The air capacity of each fan shall be not
less than that specified. Fan drives shall be adjusted as necessary to achieve the required air quantities
and balance.
Q3.6.3. ELECTRICAL
The current drawn by each separate system shall be measured under full load conditions. The
operation of the thermal overloads shall be check to ensure that the calibration is correct by setting the
thermal overload at the above measured current.
All fuses shall be carefully checked to ensure that they are of the correct rating for the motor or control
circuit. Provide isolation switches to each external condenser unit. Location as indicated on drawings.
(to be confirmed prior to installation).
Q3.6.4. TABULATION OF RESULTS

Table the results of all the relevant tests and submit two (2) copies to the Architect for checking. When
the results of the tests are to the Architect's satisfaction and not before, the Architect shall arrange for a
final inspection and test on site before handing the equipment over to the Owner.
The mechanical subcontractor shall be present at this test and it shall be his responsibility to prove to
the Architect that the equipment is performing as specified and to the Architect's approval.
Provide at the test, thermometers, anemometers, volumeters, tong test ammeters, pressure gauges, test
cones including test reports to ensure that the test equipment is properly calibrated, including any other
test equipment that the Architect deems necessary to test the system.
Allow for the total cost of these tests and any subsequent tests that the Architect requires in the event
that some equipment fails to satisfy the requirements of the Specification and tabulated results.
Q3.6.5. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Provide to the Architect two (2) copies of a properly bound Instruction Manual which he shall prepare,
giving full details of the construction, maintenance and operation of all equipment purchased by the
Contractor forming part of this Contract.
These manuals shall be provided at the time of handing over the work and shall be a condition of issue
of the Notice of Practical Completion. The maintenance period shall not commence until satisfactory
Manuals have been received.
The manuals, written in English and securely bound in a plastic folder, shall include:
 general description of plant or equipment, including purpose and intended mode of

operation;
 operating instructions, including method of starting and stopping plant, important data
sheets and alternative modes of operation;
 description of control systems, schematic diagrams and detailed functional description,
including lists of symbols used;
 maintenance instructions, including methods of carrying out the work, special precautions
and recommended periodic attention;
 adjustment of and correct settings for all control and safety devices;
 all as installed drawings and equipment catalogues;
 a spare parts list showing part numbers and description of all items and where necessary
"exploded" views shall be used to assist in identifying the component;
 manuals should only include information pertinent to this installation; and

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
 commissioning data - all final commissioning results, including motor current, overload
setting, air flows, water flows, operating temperatures and pressure, etc.
Q3.6.6. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

The mechanical subcontractor will be required to mark up all variations and alterations to the Contract
during the currency of the work. Prior to the handing over of the job, As-Built drawings shall be properly
drawn up by the mechanical subcontractor and handed to the Architect.
The mechanical subcontractor shall also mark and dimension on the 'as-built' drawings the exact
position and depth of all services as actually laid. Services to be included shall be all those associated
with the Contract and include water supply, fuel lines, waste and soil plumbing, sewer drains, storm
water drains, agricultural drains and electrical conduits.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
Q4. MATERIALS
Q4.1. HYDRONIC HEATING
Q4.1.1. GENERAL
The heating systems shall be a combination of a hydronic system consisting of gas hot water boiler,
Hydronic wall mounted panels and heated towel rails. The location of 2 No. Radiant 30kw Ext N/Gas
boiler unit, manifold valves and other equipment to be to the Equipment Area to the South Service Yard.
Final location to be confirmed with the mechanical subcontractor prior to commencement of the heating
system.
The following work shall be provided by the Contractor for the mechanical subcontractor.
 Roof penetration including upturn collars for air intake cowls and exhaust fans
 Penetration in ceiling and walls for registers and grilles - as per Reflected Ceiling Plans
 Power supply and isolating switches to all condensing and fan coil units. All control wiring
by the Mechanical subcontractor.
 Electrical wiring, wall mounted timer control switching, & isolating switch for each exhaust
fan.
System drawings are to be provided in CAD format and updated throughout the installation to ensure
that "As Built" drawings are available to client at the end of the project.
Note: All thermostats and controls to be inline and above light switches. Architect to approve locations.
Refer to Air Conditioning, Hydronic and Ventilation Specification Appendix Y8.
Q4.1.2. Hydronic Floor Heating

Heating to Ground Floor screed shall be via insulated in-slab floor heating coils. System to be fitted with
approved Thermostatic Controls complete with regulating and temperature controlled lock-shield valves.
All hydronic pipework to be insulated as per BCA regulations and Australian Standards. Refer to Services
Plans for extent of in floor heating system. Final location, quantity and exact lengths of floor coils to be
determined by subcontractor and approved by Architect prior to installation.
Heating system to include 7 day programmable thermostat, gas fired boilers, flow and return heating
lines, insulating of heating lines, control and lockshield valves, backflow prevention, gas and fill valves,
isolating valves and commissioning of system.
All underfloor heating systems must be fitted with a cut-off thermostat set no higher than 25 degrees
Celsius when measured under the timber flooring.
Q4.1.3. Hydronic Wall Panels.

Heating shall be via pressed metal wall panels. System to be fitted with approved Thermostatic Controls
complete with regulating and temperature controlled lock-shield valves.
All hydronic pipework to be insulated as per BCA regulations and Australian Standards. Refer to
Services Plans for extent of panel heating system. Final location, quantity and exact lengths of panels to
be determined by subcontractor and approved by Architect prior to installation.
Heating system to include 7 day programmable thermostat, 1 x gas fired boiler (use same as mentioned
in Q4.1.2), flow and return heating lines, insulating of heating lines, control and lockshield valves,
backflow prevention, gas and fill valves, isolating valves and commissioning of system.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
Q4.2. COOLING - AIR CONDITIONING
Q4.2.1. GENERAL
Provide air conditioning units as specified complete with all condensers, condenser drains, fan coil units
remote control units and accessories to complete the installation of the entire system. The installation
shall be completed by specialist subcontractors in full compliance with AC manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Location of all external condenser units are shown indicatively on the drawings to Equipment Area to the
South Boundary. The final locations to be confirmed with the Architect prior to installation. All
condensing units shall be designed to operate within the air temperature range of -10oC to 45oC without
failure.
All approved ceiling mounted diffusers shall be located as indicated on Architectural Reflected Ceiling
Plans. Ceiling supply and return air diffusers to have white Powdercoat 02 finish as per the Painting
Schedule of this Specification and be installed to manufacturer’s specifications.
All approved wall & joinery mounted diffusers shall be located as indicated on Architectural Reflected
Ceiling Plans and as per the Architectural Internals Drawings.
Provide all associated brackets, mounting plates, Decktite seals, insulated supply and return pipes ,
Colorbond pipe covers and access panels to complete the installation of the system. Allow galvanized
ducting for supply and return air to selected plenum and ceiling mounted lineal diffusers as indicated on
drawings.
Q4.2.2. AC System Type

Contractor is to supply and install multi ducted split and associated inverter & condenser equipment.
The air conditioning condenser units to be mounted externally as indicated on Services Plans. Systems
are to be installed, including all refrigerant piping, control, power, wiring, and ductwork in accordance
with the equipment manufacturers' specifications.
Controls shall be via the standard proprietary room thermostats as provided with the air conditioning plants. If
the manufacturer recommends separate room sensors to provide improved control, these shall be installed.
Provision shall be made at each fan coil unit to allow the building automation contractor to provide a
start/stop signal to that fan coil. Automation/Electrical contractor to confirm integration requirements
prior to installation.
Air conditioning zones to be served by the Outdoor Units located the Service Yard and to be served by
separate fan coil systems as noted in Q5.1
Note: All thermostats and controls to be inline and above light switches. Architect to approve locations.
All Ducting to be Galvanized to suit environment.
Q4.3. PLENUM BOXES, DIFFUSERS, EXHAUST & DUCTING
Q4.3.1. DIFFUSERS
Where indicated on Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans, allow for ceiling, bulkhead or wall mounted
powder coat white aluminium Holyoake LD Series Flangeless Linear Bar Diffuser or similar approved
diffuser. Return air registers to fit selected plenum channel or connector piece. Size and style of diffuser
to be confirmed by subcontractor and approved by architect to allow required airflow to designated areas.
Q4.3.2. PLENUM
Refer to manufacturers specifications for plenum details and requirements. Plenum boxes on grilles and
diffusers are to be custom sheet metal made to fit the structure and will be designed to ensure even
airflows/velocities across grilles to provide quiet operation. Ducting to include custom made metal
transition components allowing even air flow below steel floor beam structure as required.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
Plenum boxes to be connected to A/C units via flexible duct as required for adequate air flow as per
manufactures specification. Allow for custom made flange to act as connection piece from fan coil unit to
flexible duct for supply and return air. All duct work to be insulated in accordance with BCA
requirements. Penetrations in ceilings to be provided. The registers shall be suitable for mounting in the
relevant construction media. All registers shall be free from rattles and powder coat white.
Q4.3.3. EXHAUST FANS & GRILLES

Supply and install roof mounted exhaust fans and cowls. Mechanical Contractor to nominate Model
number and make prior to installation to serve room size, volume and performance requirements as
determined onsite.
Where indicated on Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans, allow for ceiling mounted powder coat white
aluminium Holyoake LD Series Flangeless Linear Bar Diffuser or ceiling mounted powder coat white
HOLYOAKE OD10 circular diffuser or similar approved diffusers for all amenities fans. Size and style of
diffuser/registers to be confirmed by subcontractor and approved by architect to allow required airflow to
designated areas.
All fans are to discharge to outside of roof with flexible ducting and matching external waterproof self
closing cowls. Fit suitably engraved rocker control switch for each fan together with timocratic or equal
approved self adjusting proportional timer installed as part of fan circuit adjacent to switching plate.
Q4.4. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK - EXHAUST

Flexible circular ductwork shall be un-insulated 'Westaflex' S.P.N. connected to the main duct by means
of 45o take-off pieces with butterfly dampers. All connections shall be clipped with circumferential
clamps and then taped to ensure an airtight seal. Oval ductwork shall be Q.P.N.
Q4.5. INSULATION
All supply and return air ductwork shall be insulated internally as specified below. Outside air ducts
require no internal insulation. Internal insulation of square ductwork shall comprise a 25mm thickness of
fibreglass covered with black scrim similar to Bradfords Blackseal Ductliner as follows:
The insulation shall be held in place using pins either spot welded or adhered to the walls of the duct
with an approved adhesive at not greater than 300mm centres. Locking press on type washers shall be
pushed over the pins after installation of the insulation to hold firmly in place. Folded PGI sheet angle
and ’Z’ sections shall be used to hold the insulation at all circumferential joints. Internal insulation in
circular ducts shall be held in place using perforated metal sheet. All duct insulation to be min R1.0.
Q4.6. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS

Each air conditioning unit shall be provided with its own standard digital controls including, temperature
control, fan control and time clock including day omitting function for weekends. Location of controls to
be generally in line and above light switches and is to be approved by the Architect prior to installation.
Allow for all control wiring between the units and final connection of units from the adjacent power
supply provided for that purpose by the Electrical subcontractor.
Q4.7. POOL FILTRATION

Contractor to provide necessary hydraulics, mechanical and power for relocated pump, filtration,
chlorination, heating and cleaning of pool. Pool Equipment is to be located in the Service Area. All
equipment is to be installed to relevant regulations and Australian Standards.
Allow concrete pad footing to mount pool equipment. All pool filtration supply lines will be run in 50mm
plumbing. All pipe works below concrete will be of class 12 type. Prior to concrete placement all lines
will be tested to 200kps and held under water pressure.
Refer Section N – Hydraulics of this Specification for further details of pool equipment.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
Q4.8. FIREPLACE
All existing Fireplaces to be retained and sealed in strict accordance with Energy report and BCA
regulations. Install damper seals as per BCA. Ensure all wall and roof penetrations are weather tight and
sealed as required. Ensure all fire rating requirements have been met.
New Gas Fireplace and Flue to be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications and
BCA regulations. Ensure all wall and roof penetrations are weather tight and sealed as required. Ensure
all fire rating requirements have been met.
Refer Section G – Metalworks of this Specification for further details of Fireplaces.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MECHANICAL
Q5. MATERIALS TABLES
Q5.1. AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM

Ventilation
Refer also to Specification Appendix Y8

DUCTED In ceiling Ducted Heating and Cooling System with 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
AIRCONDITIONING Programmable Thermostat and Insulated Refrigeration lines to Ventilation
SYSTEM Living, Kitchen, Dining, Media, Master, WIR, Bed 2, Bed 3, Bed
4, Rumpus, Study.
Q5.2. A/C GRILLES

Ventilation.

A/C GRILLE TYPE 01 Holyoake LD Series Flangeless Linear Bar Diffuser 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
Ventilation
A/C GRILLE TYPE 02 HOLYOAKE OD10 circular diffuser. 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
Ventilation
RETURN AIR Air Conditioning Hinged Return Air Bar Grille 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
(GRILLE 02) Ventilation
Q5.3. HYDRONIC HEATING SYSTEM

Ventilation
Refer also to Specification Appendix Y8

HYDRONIC BOILER External Wall Mounted 30kW Hydronic Boiler x 2 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
Ventilation
HYDRONIC 9 x Flat Wall Panel Radiator 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
RADIATOR PANEL Ventilation
Q5.4. EXHAUST FAN SYSTEM

Ventilation

EXHAUST FAN AND Exhaust fan and Cowl. A/C contractor to confirm size and 7.3 - Mechanical, Hydraulic and
COWL exhaust capacity of each installed unit as fit for purpose. Ventilation
Q6. COMPLETION
Upon completion, Contractor is to leave site clean of any debris and waste associated with this trade. All
surfaces to be cleaned and dust free and all units are to be commissioned.
All manuals and instructions to be collated and presented in a folder to the owner at time of practical
completion.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section R
INTERNAL & EXTERNAL FLOOR, WALL & CEILING CLADDINGS & FINISHES
R. INTERNAL & EXTERNAL FLOOR, WALL & CEILING CLADDINGS & FINISHES
R1. SCOPE OF WORKS
The extent of the work under this section includes the finishes to all floors, walls and ceilings as shown
on the Schedule of Finishes, detailed on the drawings and specified hereunder. The work includes the
supply and installation of:
 All Paving
 Landscaping finishes
 Plasterboard internal wall and ceiling linings
 Cement sheet linings to tiled areas
 Other cement sheet & soffit linings
 Render coating to walls
 Carpet flooring
 Timber flooring
 Concrete screeds
 Tiled Floor and Wall finishes
 Timber Wall claddings
R2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
Tiling: The following Australian Standards shall apply to all materials and workmanship under this
Contract.
AS.2358 Adhesives for Ceramic Tiling

AS 3958 Ceramic Tile Installation
BS.5385 Code of Practice for Tiling
BS.CP202 Code of Practice for Tile Flooring
R3. GENERAL CLAUSES
The various subcontractors concerned in laying floor, wall and ceiling finishes, shall examine the base
structure upon which the finish is to be applied. Commencement of laying or fixing the tile or lining as
specified automatically will determine acceptance by the relevant subcontractor without reservation of
the base and no subsequent claim as to the suitability or otherwise of the base and finishes will be
considered. Allow for and supply any sanding, grinding, filling or other preparation necessary to bring
base surfaces, frames or slabs up to a satisfactory condition to enable the laying or fixing of the finishing
material in full compliance with the requirements of this Specification.
In addition co-ordinate with of other trades to facilitate the installation of cables, ducts, lighting and pipe
work and other services elements in the correct location prior to installation of sheeting or tiles. Make
good any damage to finishes caused by installation of cables, ducts, lighting, pipe work and other
services elements no extra cost to the Owner. After completion of installation of tile or finish provide the
initial cleaning and/or sealing of the finish to enable the floors, walls and ceilings to be inspected and
accepted as completed by the Architect.
After inspection the Contractor shall then accept all responsibility for the finished floors, walls and
ceilings and shall provide and maintain adequate protection of same prior to handing over the project at
Practical Completion. Any damage caused by failure to provide and maintain such protection is to be
made good or redone as directed by the Architect at the Contractor's expense. Include for all additional
cleaning prior to handing over the complete finishes at Practical Completion. Unless otherwise indicated
or specified, levels to adjoining finished floor surfaces of differing surface finishes are to be flush and
separated with stainless steel or similar approved angles at the door frame rebate or as otherwise
indicated with floor finish as specified. Top edge of angle to finish flush with the finished floor surface, or,
where different levels are detailed or indicated, with the highest level. Fix angles to floor with masonry
anchors or screws at 150 mm centres.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page R-1 of 8

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
R4. MATERIALS
R4.1. TILING CLADDING

The Contractor shall include for the supply and installation of all wall tiles and floor tiles for wet areas
shown and as detailed in this section. Allow for installation, grouting and finishing of all tile areas by
approved specialist subcontractors using adhesives grouts and accessories as specified in this Section.
Refer to finishes schedule below for all wall and floor tile selections. Tiles to be laid over concrete
screed, angled as required to form fall to shower drains and floor wastes. Membrane to tiles as per this
section of the Specification R4.1.2.
Tiles shall be as shown in the Tile Schedule and shall be from one manufactured batch to eliminate
colour variations. Supply one square metre of additional tiles from each tile shown in the schedule for
use of Owner.
R4.1.1. PREPARATION
Prior to application of waterproof membrane allow concrete screen to cure for minimum of 28 days.
Clean down the substrate surface removing all curing agents, wax, grease, oil, dirt, dust and other
foreign material and leave it clean, dry, dust free, smooth and free of undulations.
Flash junction of floors to walls with CORMIX System as specified below, Hardie's Hypalon or equal
approved 150 mm wide strip, bonded 50 mm wide to cement sheet underlay with HydrEpoxy 501 and 80
mm upstand secured by tape to walls. Fold and seal corners to make waterproof joints. Flash vertical
corners in recessed area for showers with Cormix or Hypalon bonded to walls, full height and carried
down to the bottom of shower recess.
R4.1.2. WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

The waterproofing membrane shall be 2 layers CORMIX Contite FCW MCI System or equal approved to
all Internal Wet Areas. System to include base layer of CORMIX Conpath 600 to Blockwork walls. Refer
Waterproof Membrane Type 03. Installation of membrane is to be strictly to the manufacturer's
specifications and recommendations and shall conform to AS 3740 and to ABSAC Technical Opinion
115. All joints, flashings, penetrations, fixings and imperfections to be filled with polyethylene filler and
bandaged with a weatherproof fibreglass bandage.
Carry the membrane under fixtures, baths, shower bases, toilets, vanities and the like and extend into
the full area of shower recess. Apply to full height to walls of shower recess and any other walls shown
to be tiled. Elsewhere extend membrane 300mm beyond the horizontal extent of the designated tiled
wall area as well as a width not less than 450mm to wall areas immediately adjacent and behind a bath,
sink or similar fixture. Extend waterproofing to full extent of frame to windows to all wet areas.
The waterproofing membrane shall be CORMIX Elastoclad PU or equal approved direct to slab to all
External Terraces and paving with CORMIX Conpatch 600 corner fillet. Waterproof membrane to top of
screed directly unde tile shall be 2 layers CORMIX Contite FCW MCI System or equal approved. Refer
Waterproof Membrane Type 02. Installation of membrane is to be strictly to the manufacturer's
specifications and recommendations and shall conform to AS 3740 and to ABSAC Technical Opinion
115. All joints, flashings, penetrations, fixings and imperfections to be filled with polyethylene filler and
bandaged with a weatherproof fibreglass bandage. Contractor is to supply and install Zincalume folded
flashings connected to membrane to all external areas as per typical details.
R4.1.3. INSTALLATION
Internal Tiling
Tiles shall be true to plane, even and regular in size, free of warps, crazing, discolouration or defects and
have undamaged arrises. Internal tiling shall be laid on 6 mm Hardies Villaboard CFC lining fixed to
timber battens or furring channels on blockwork walls or on concrete screed installed to concrete floor
slabs. Floor tiles shall be laid over built up concrete screed, angled where required to form fall to shower
drains and floor wastes.
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
Shower Bases
Tiles to shower bases shall be laid on thick bed adhesive on top of membrane over angled screed to
provide fall to floor waste strip, and within floor waste strip to provide fall to floor waste - to ensure any
water on tile surface will travel to waste grating. Coordinate laying of tiles with plumbing contractor to
ensure compliance with this requirement. Shower entry threshold to be one tile thickness lower to
shower base, with floor waste strip one tile thickness lower falling to floor waste. Refer Architectural
Internals Drawings for tile setout.
Grouting
After fixing allow tiles to remain undisturbed for 24 hours minimum before applying grout. Grout shall be
Mapei or equal grout of selected colour and as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Fill joints solid
using sponge or trowel and wipe surface clean before grout hardens. Showers to use Mapei "Kerapoxy"
or similar approved.
Anti Mould Treatment

Apply ‘A.E. Sealant’ anti-mould treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to all
tiled surfaces.
Sealants
Where tiling abuts other materials and at junctions with bench tops, partitions and fittings, provide
approved silicone control joint in colour selected to match grouting and allow for movement between
adjacent surfaces. Seal junctions between floor and wall tiles in the same manner using silicone sealant
as specified.
R4.1.4. STONE FINISHES
Internal Stone Paving

Stone shall be true to plane, even and regular in size, free of warps, crazing, discolouration or defects
and have undamaged arrises. Internal stone flooring shall be laid directly on substrate flooring as
required by nature and weight of stone.
Membrane
Refer to Section R4.1.2 of this Specification
Adhesive
Tile and Stone adhesive shall be Australian Building Adhesives or other approved waterproof adhesive
and shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply adhesive to
base surfaces using a notched comb to form a series of ribs, working adhesive in opposite directions to
provide an even spread and a final bed thickness of minimum 1.5mm over at least 75% of the back of
each tile. Spot fixings will not be permitted. Adhesive to be non penetrating and compatible with stone
tiles.
Laying
Tile and Stone laying shall conform to AS 3958 and shall be laid dry and surplus adhesive shall be
removed with a damp cloth before it hardens. Tiles shall be laid out evenly with regular joints to match
adjacent floor or wall finish and fixed strictly in accordance with the tiling manufacturers
recommendations. Tiles to be evenly across one wall length unless otherwise specified on the drawings.
Set out tiles to minimise cutting and to avoid less than half tiles. Lay in stack bond with all joints even,
vertical and horizontal. All cutting, including boring of neat holes though tiles, shall be performed such
that tiles fit closely and neatly around taps and elsewhere as necessary. All cut and drilled edges of tiles
shall be ground smooth. Return tiles into reveals and openings. All edges to be butt join unless specified
differently on drawings and exposed edge to be polished.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
Grouting
After fixing allow tiles to remain undisturbed for 24 hours minimum before applying grout. Grout shall be
Mapei or equal grout of selected colour and as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Fill joints solid
using sponge or trowel and wipe surface clean before grout hardens. Showers to use Mapei "Kerapoxy"
or similar approved.
Anti Mould Treatment

Apply ‘A.E. Sealant’ anti-mould treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to all
tiled surfaces.
Sealants
Where tiling abuts other materials and at junctions with bench tops, partitions and fittings, provide
approved silicone control joint in colour selected to match grouting and allow for movement between
adjacent surfaces. Seal junctions between floor and wall tiles in the same manner using silicone sealant
as specified.
Penetrating Sealer
Apply Lithofirm MN Stain-Stop W special impregnator to bluestone tiling and paving as noted.
Contractor to ensure liquid product is absorbed by stone and not to dry on stone. Apply prior to grouting
and in strict accordance with manufactures specifications. Do not apply in temperatures outside of 10-25
degrees centigrade or in direct sunlight.
R4.1.5. POOL TILING

The Contractor shall include for supply and installation of square ceramic mosaic tiles to all internal walls
and floor of pool (refer maintenance schedule). Allow for installation, grouting and finishing of all tiled
areas by approved specialist subcontractors using adhesives grouts and accessories as specified in this
Section.
Tiles to be laid over concrete screed, angled as required to form fall to drains. Tiles shall be as shown in
the Tile Schedule and shall be from one manufactured batch to eliminate colour variations. Supply one
square metre of additional tiles from each tile shown in the schedule for use of Owner.
R4.2. PLASTERBOARD
R4.2.1. PLASTERBOARD-FIXING
Plasterboard for all walls shall be 10 mm CSR Superchek recessed edge plasterboard or other approved.
Ceilings shall be 10 mm CSR Superchek ceiling plasterboard or other approved and plasterboard to wet
area walls & ceilings shall be 13 mm CSR Aquachek. Fixing adhesive shall be as recommended and
approved by the plasterboard manufacturer. Provide trims at external corners using galvanised pencil
round Rondo Plasterlock corner bead code P32.
Fix plasterboard ceilings using Rondo Rod bracket code 534, suspension clip code 2534 and code 125
cross rail furring channel, all fixed to underside of roof trusses and joists. Confirm location of all ceiling
services and electrical prior to suspension fit off.
Contractor to provide all framing as required for ceiling system adequacy.

 At all wall-ceiling, bulkhead-ceiling or wall- bulkhead junctions square set all plasterboard
as detailed.
 At ceiling and/ or bulkhead to Hard Plastered wall junctions provide shadow-line achieved
by Rondo P50 bead to top of Plastered finish.
 At ceiling and/ or bulkhead to cupboard junctions provide shadow-line achieved by Rondo
P50 bead to top of joinery unit.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
R4.2.2. PLASTERBOARD - WORKMANSHIP

Installation and finishing of plasterboard shall conform to AS 2589, C5 finish as required will be assumed
included unless disclosed at time of installation. The lining of all walls and ceilings is to be done in a
workmanlike manner to give flat even surfaces, held tightly against the framing, with all joints and fixings
stopped and completely flush, and free from cracking. Straighten all wall and ceiling framing to take
plaster to ensure a true flat surface will be achieved. Set out furring channels and ceiling framing to flat
planes, following the line of floor joists and roof trusses at upper level.
Adjust any irregularities to achieve a level plane for fixing of board. Apply sheets and form joints at
locations and in full compliance with the board manufacturer's recommendations. Back block at end
joints in plasterboard, form rebates in cut sheet edges and tape all joints. Base coat each joint, bed tape
with full cover of the tape and complete the joints with finishing compound. Sand flat. Square set at
wall/ceiling junctions and tape each joint between internal walls and ceilings. Fix wall and ceiling sheets
200 mm away from the meeting edges. Fix plasterboard to bulkheads, pelmets as shown on drawings
and details. Form shadow line detail at junctions with joinery, window and door frames and other
locations where detailed. Maintain wall to ceiling joints and junctions at changes of direction of walls in
straight lines using embedded flush beads as necessary to achieve crisp lines. Upon completion clean
away all surplus board and plaster dust.
R4.3. RENDER SYSTEMS

To external walls as indicated on drawings supply and install 'Dulux' Acratex Acrylic Texture Render
System or equal approved to Foam and Masonry wall substrates. All Render systems to be installed as
per manufacturer's details, system composition and instructions and warranty provided.
All Render Systems to be applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
R4.4. TIMBER FINISHES
R4.4.1. TIMBER BATTEN WALL CLADDING

Contractor to allow for supply and installation of suitable marine grade ply substrate panels minimum
12mm thickness with 42 x 42mm dressed KDHW battens fixed securely for wall cladding WC05.
Refer also to Section K – Joinery of this Specification for further details of panel finishes.
R4.4.2. TIMBER FLOORING

Allow for supply and installation of new Pre Finished Engineered Timber boards. Pre-Finished Timber
Engineered secret fixed floor boards as per Architectural Plans. Ensure all floor surfaces and types are
level. Confirm ground floor finished level with other levels throughout to be confirmed based on this
level.
Boards to be T & G secret nail profile, fixed to timber flooring substrate in compliance with AS 1684 in
strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Timber floor installation is to meet manufacturers
requirements for installation.
R4.5. CARPET FLOOR FINISH

Contractor to supply, install / lay all new carpet flooring, underlay and protection as per Architectural
Plans. Carpet and Underlay installation to comply with AS 2455.
Lay underlay with close joints, parallel to the linear direction of the carpet with the underlay and carpet
seams offset 150mm minimum, and fix to the floor with the adhesive applied in accordance with the
carpet manufacturer’s instructions.
Any floor material change point to be separated by 3mm satin chrome aluminium angle flush with floor
surfaces.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
R5. MATERIALS TABLES
R5.1. GROUND SURFACE FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.2 Ground Surface Finishes.

GARDEN BED Garden Beds Generally to be prepared for installation of 2.2 - Ground Surface Finishes
Planting. Refer Landscape Provisional Sum
PLANTING Landscape Planting. Refer Landscape Provisional Sum 2.2 - Ground Surface Finishes
LAWN Instant Turf to Front and Back yards. Refer Landscape 2.2 - Ground Surface Finishes
Provisional Sum.
GRAVEL 75mm Lilydale Topping Gravel or similar 2.2 - Ground Surface Finishes
R5.2. POOL FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.3 Pools

POOL TILE Black Lustre Rectangular CM456 Ceramic Mosaic Pool Tile 2.3 - Pools
internally. 95x45mm (as per $70/sqm PC rate from Laguna)
Coping PV01. Expansion joint as required to pool terrace.
R5.3. EXTERNAL FLOOR FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.1 External Floor Finishes.

PV01 Dense sawn dark bluestone paving tiles, stepping stones, & 3.1 - External Floor Finishes
80mm solid coping tile to walls, steps, porch and pool edges.
Lithofin finish sealer
PV02 MENTONE PRE-MIX exposed aggregate finish. "Macquarie 3.1 - External Floor Finishes
Standard Black".
PV03 Steel trowel finish concrete slab. 3.1 - External Floor Finishes
PV04 Birmingham (chequered) tiles with Norwood Border or equal 3.1 - External Floor Finishes
alternative selection by client.
R5.4. EXTERNAL WALL FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.2 Walls.

WC01 Paint Finish on Existing Masonry Substrate. 3.2 - Walls
WC02 Render Finish on Masonry Substrate. 3.2 - Walls
WC03 Render Finish on Unitex Foam Substrate. 3.2 - Walls
WC04 Face Brickwork 3.2 - Walls
WC05 Painted battens on ply substrate. 3.2 - Walls
R5.5. SOFFIT FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.3 Soffits.

SF01 Paint Finish to Wet Area Plasterboard Soffit 3.3 – Soffits
SF02 Paint Finish to Fibre Cement Soffit. 3.3 – Soffits

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE

SFEX Existing Timber lining boards. 3.3 – Soffits
R5.6. ROOF FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 3.4 Roofs.

RFEX Existing Slate Roofing 3.4 - Roofs
RF01 Metal Roof Sheeting LYSAGHT TRIMDECK Zincalume with 3.4 - Roofs
Colorbond finish
R5.7. INTERNAL FLOOR FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 4.1 Floors.

FF01 Engineered Timber Flooring 4.1 - Floors
FF02 Burnished Concrete Screed with in-screed hydronic. 4.1 - Floors
FF03 Prestige Carpets 'Natural Loop' Carpet on Supa Blue underlay 4.1 - Floors
FF04 Porcelain BELGA Floor Tile 4.1 - Floors
FF05 Porcelain ARKITEK Floor Tile 4.1 - Floors
R5.8. INTERNAL WALL FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 4.2 Walls.

WFEX Existing or new to match - Hard Plaster with Paint finish 4.2 - Walls
WF01 Plasterboard Wall with Paint Finish 4.2 - Walls
WF02 Water resistant plasterboard 4.2 - Walls
WF03 Face Brickwork 4.2 - Walls
WF04 LA SUITE Wall tile 4.2 - Walls
WF05 Porcelain BELGA Wall Tile 4.2 - Walls
WF06 Gigacer Krea Green patchwork Pattern C Wall Tile 4.2 - Walls
R5.9. CEILING FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 4.3 Ceilings.

CFEX Existing Plaster Ceiling with paint finish 4.3 - Ceilings
CF01 Plasterboard Substrate with Paint Finish 4.3 - Ceilings
CF02 Wet Area Plasterboard Substrate with Paint Finish 4.3 - Ceilings
R5.10. GENERAL TRIMS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 4.4 Trims.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE

SKIRT EX Existing solid timber period skirting 4.4 - Trims
SKIRT 01 New flush Timber skirting with P50 detail to plasterboard with 4.4 - Trims
paint finish.
ARCHITRAVEEX Existing solid timber period architrave to jambs, heads, and 4.4 - Trims
sills to period windows & doors with paint finish.
ARCHITRAVE01 New 45mm thick solid timber jamb with paint finish. 4.4 - Trims
ARCHITRAVE02 Square set plasterboard architrave to new glazed doors and 4.4 - Trims
windows.
CORNICEEX Existing plaster cornice with paint finish. 4.4 - Trims
CORNICE01 New Square set plaster cornice with paint finish. 4.4 - Trims
R5.11. JOINERY FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 5.1 Joinery Finishes

strips – Matt White
strips – Matt Black
JF03 2-Pack Fibre Cement Joinery. 2-Pack finish square edge. 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
JF04 Laminate Finish - LAMINEX Natural on water resistant MDF 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
sheet with ABS edge Strips Polar white finish
JF05 2-Pak Joinery Finish on Moisture Resistant Square Edged MDF 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
sheet substrate
JF06 Pre-finished Timber veneer. Lignapal VIBRANT OAK SILVER 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
GREY 163.54. On moisture resistant MDF.
JF07 CLEAF 'Yosemite' prebonded melamine on Moisture resistant 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
MDF substrate. Edging strips to door & drawer fronts, shelves
& cupboards. Rolled bullnose edges to desks.
JF08 FORBO 'Bulletin Board' 2209 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
JF09 Aluminium Coverplate with Powdercoat Finish. 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
JF10 Toughened glass shelf. 5.1 - Joinery Finishes
SB01 De Chirer Bianco Tile splashback. 1200x1200mm 5.2 - Benches & Splashbacks
SB02 Caeserstone CS 4004 Raw Concrete. 5.2 - Benches & Splashbacks
SB03 De Chirer Bianco Tile BBQ bench & splashback. 5.2 - Benches & Splashbacks
R5.12. MIRROR FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 5.2 Mirrors

MIRROR Superclear Silver backed Mirror panels mounted to Joinery 5.2 - Splashbacks and Mirrors
cabinets and Walls as per Architectural Drawings
R6. COMPLETION
Upon completion, Contractor is to leave site clean of any debris and waste associated with this trade. All
surfaces to be cleaned and dust free.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section S
S. (DELETED)
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page S-1 of 1

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section T
T. (DELETED)
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page T-1 of 1

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section U
PAINTING
U. PAINTING
U1. SCOPE OF WORKS
Refer to the Schedule of Finishes for the locations of finishes. The Painter shall check the schedule
against the drawings and specification for identification of finishes and extent of work. The Painter shall
prepare and paint all external and internal surfaces to be painted as specified and scheduled. The
painting works will include the following:
 all internal walls, and cement sheet claddings, bulkheads, ceilings, soffits, steel trims,
balustrades and metal works generally, architraves, skirtings, existing and new doors, and
trims.
 all external timber work to wall claddings and fascias
 all existing external brickwork, timberwork, soffit boards, gutters and downpipes.
 all steel, steel trims, balustrades and metal work generally, cement and aluminium surfaces
to the dwelling which do not have a factory finish including; eaves, barges, fascias, cement
lining and cover pieces.
 all exposed pipes, cappings, flashings, lintels and trims which do not have a factory finish.
 all external and internal doors except where specified with factory applied finish.
 all cupboard doors and exposed faces of joinery where not finished in selected timber
veneer, laminate or pre-finish paint application.
 staining and sealing all timber veneer to joinery works (where not pre-finished), windows
and doors, and decks.
 2 Pac paint allowed to joinery items only.
U2. STANDARDS REGULATIONS & CODES
All work shall conform to AS 2311-1992.
U3. WORKMANSHIP
U3.1. GENERALLY
All workmen shall be skilled painters under the supervision and control of the painting sub contractor. All
the materials shall be mixed, handled and applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer's
recommendations. All work shall be carried out only under favourable weather conditions. For external
work, no painting shall be carried out after a heavy dew, frost or fog or during periods of high wind and
sea spray or storm conditions or any similar condition until surfaces are thoroughly dry. Painting shall
cease in wet weather, or after 3 PM on any day when there is danger of frost or fog, or at any other time
as & when determined by the Architect. External painting shall also not be attempted on days where the
temperature is anticipated to exceed 350.
All rooms shall be cleaned out and kept free of dust during painting work. All paint shall be thoroughly
stirred before use. No additives will be permitted. Generally paint shall be applied with a brush or roller
to all surfaces. Spraying will only be carried out with approval, and only on the first coat. Each coat shall
have a uniform even application, and all finishes shall be free of brush or roller marks, dust, grit,
blemishes and true to colour. All cutting-in shall be neat, clean and precise. All surfaces shall be
thoroughly dry before application of subsequent coats. Each coat shall be lightly rubbed down with
glass paper between coats. The Architect may order additional coats of preparation (without cost to the
Owner) if in his opinion, the materials or workmanship are faulty in any way. On completion of all
painting, make good after other trades, clean off all marks and stains and finish off in a tradesman like
manner. The painting subcontractor shall fully protect all unpainted and pre finished surfaces, other
finishes and fittings during painting operations and shall remove all such protection upon completion of
his work.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page U-1 of 6

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
PAINTING
U3.2. STORAGE & DISPOSAL

Store materials in an approved location. Keep storage place neat and clean at all times. Place cloths,
waste or other materials that might constitute a fire hazard in metal containers or remove or destroy at
the end of each day's work. Provide a suitable movable receptacle into which shall be placed all liquids,
slop washing, etc., which on no account shall be poured down any sanitary fittings. Remove all waste
matter from the site progressively as painting work proceeds.
U3.3. SKILLED TRADESMEN

Only skilled tradesmen experienced in the application of high quality commercial painting work shall be
employed in the application of all coats specified in this Section. A properly qualified painting foreman
shall be on the job while the entire painting sub contract is completed.
U3.4. PROTECTION
Protect adjacent surfaces with masking tape or dust sheets or by other suitable means. Any spillage,
spattering or marking of other surfaces is to be immediately and completely removed and the surface
made good. An ample supply of dust sheets shall be provided for protection of work during painting
operations.
Removal of any painting over spray from rollers or brush or by any other means shall be completely
removed at no additional cost to the Owner. All protection shall be removed on completion of the
Painting subcontract.
U3.5. GENERAL SURFACE PREPARATION

The preparation of unpainted surfaces shall be carried out in accordance with AS 2311, Section 3. All
surfaces to be painted are to be approved by the Architect prior to painting. All areas shall be brought to
a smooth even surface before paint is applied. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned free of dirt, rust, scale,
grease, etc. Knots in timber shall be treated with a knotting compound prior to priming. Prime the entire
surface (front, all edges and back) of all external timber specified to be painted, and trim prior to fixing or
exposure to weather. Similarly prime architraves, skirtings and the like. For all other timber putty and
other stopping shall be carried out after priming. All primed surfaces shall be lightly glass papered. All
plasterboard linings to internal walls and ceilings shall be dry brushed down immediately before
painting. All applied undercoats shall be lightly sanded with glass paper prior to the application of further
coats.
U3.6. PREPARATION OF TIMBER

Prepare woodwork by removing any oil, grease, wax etc. present by rubbing down with mineral
turpentine on a clean cloth. Seal knots and resinous patches and rub smooth with sandpaper. Any
loose knots shall be removed and holes neatly plugged. All sanding shall be done parallel with the
timber grain. Sand out machine markings, chipped or lifted grain.
U3.7. PREPARATION OF METALWORK & STEEL

Steelwork specified in other sections to be supplied hot dipped galvanised. Preparation shall be done
immediately prior to priming to ensure a clean metal surface. Prepare for painting by removing all scale,
dirt, etc and bring surface to bright metal. Remove oil, grease, etc. by rubbing down with mineral
turpentine on a clean cloth. Wash galvanised surfaces with white spirit, methyl ethyl ketone or other
approved solvent degreaser. Wash with a strong solution of ammonia and wash with clean water. Apply
suitable primer compatible with finishing coat paint system.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
PAINTING
U3.8. APPLICATION
Ensure all surfaces are thoroughly dry before painting. Do not apply external coats of paint in weather
that is likely to have an adverse effect on the finish. Refer specifically to previous Clause 3.1 with regard
to adverse weather conditions. Do not paint metal in wet or humid weather. Drying times between coats
shall be as recommended by the manufacturers of the paint or finish. Apply products at the container
consistency and do not thin or otherwise alter except in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Apply all in-situ coats by brush or roller evenly to prevent air bubbles, runs, brush
marks, sags, blotches and other defects and to ensure even finish and colour. Do not apply any coat to
a surface that has not been properly prepared or to a previous coat that is not thoroughly dry and clean.
Sand down previous coats as recommended by the manufacturer. Application shall be carried out in a
well ventilated and dust free atmosphere. Any finished surfaces damaged by dust to be cut back and re-
finished.
U3.9. RUBBING DOWN

All coats shall be thoroughly dry before subsequent coats are applied and rubbed down with fine glass
paper between coats. The Painting subcontractor shall have continuous supervision on site of all
tradesmen engaged to complete the painting work to ensure that rubbing down between coats is done.
U3.10. TINTING
Tint undercoats and intermediate coats for non-clear finishes to a slight variation in colour from each
other and from the finished coat.
U3.11. MAKING GOOD

Make good any defects including re-painting of the whole plane or surface in which defects appear.
Making good shall include cutting out, stopping, etc. as necessary and shall not be limited to patching
of final coats. The Architect shall reserve the right to order extra coats without extra cost, if, in his
opinion, the material or workmanship are faulty in any way.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
PAINTING
U4. GENERAL CLAUSES
U4.1. FINISHING COLOURS

The Architect shall prepare a colour schedule as a guide for the selection of colours. Do not commence
any painting work which may affect the final colour until the Schedule has been issued, samples have
been provided and approved by the Architect.
U4.2. SAMPLES
Provide sample panels approximately one metre square of each finish on each surface in locations
selected by the Architect. No work shall commence until the samples have been approved. All work
shall conform to the approved samples.
U4.3 BACKGROUNDS
The painting sub contractor shall inspect all surfaces to be painted and shall notify the Contractor of any
surfaces considered unsuitable to receive the finish specified. Commencement of the work will
automatically imply acceptance, without reservation, of the whole base or background upon which paint
finishes are applied and the edges to which they finish. Supply all equipment, scaffolding, ladders,
planks, brushes drop sheets and materials required to complete the painting Works.
U4.4 INSPECTIONS
Give one working day’s notice to the Architect so that he may inspect the following stages of the work.
 after completion of sample sections of each coat and colour.

 before application of the first coat.
 before application of each subsequent coat.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
PAINTING
U5. MATERIALS
U5.1. GENERAL
All paints shall be Dulux, Intergrain, Porters or equal approved brands and shall be of the type specified.
All coats of each type of finish shall be of the same manufacture. All materials shall be obtained from an
approved supplier and brought on to the site in the manufacturer's labelled and unopened containers.
Wood fillers shall be approved trade prepared fillers, tinted as required. Putty shall be of approved
manufacture used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
U5.2. PAINTING SYSTEMS

Throughout this Specification, where the term "prepare for painting/polishing" is stated it shall mean
prepare as specified in accordance with the surface preparation recommendations of the manufacturer
of the paint.
U5.2.1. EXTERNAL PAINT WORK
Surface Treatment
1 Dressed Woodwork 1 coat Dulux Wunderprime oil based primer
(where painted) 1 coat Dulux Wundercoat oil based undercoat
2 top coats
2 Galvanised steel 1 coat Dulux Galvanised Iron primer

1 coat Dulux Wundercoat oil based undercoat
1 Top coat
3 PVC Pipes 3 Top Coats
4 Eave Linings 3 Top Coats
5 Steel & other Metal surfaces 2 coats Dulux All Metal primer
2 top coats
6 Timber decking 3 coats to all faces prior to installation

2 final coats
U5.2.2. INTERNAL PAINT WORK
Surface Treatment
1 Timber skirtings trims, ply doors & 1 coat Dulux Wundercoat oil based undercoat
other exposed timber 2 top coats Spray Finish
2 Metal work 1 coat Dulux All Metal primer

2 top coats
3 Plasterboard walls 1 coat Dulux Wonderprep acrylic sealer/undercoat

2 top coats
4 Plasterboard ceilings 1 coat Dulux Wonderprep acrylic sealer/undercoat

2 top coats
6 Steel Cabinetry 1 coat Dulux All Metal primer

2 top coats

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
PAINTING
U6. MATERIAL TABLES
U6.1. EXTERNAL PAINT TYPES SCHEDULE

EPT01 Paint Finish to External walls. 9.1 - Paint Types
EPT02 Paint finish to External Plasterboard Soffits 9.1 - Paint Types
EPT03 Paint finish to External Timber Trim, Window & Doors Paint. 9.1 - Paint Types
EPT04 Paint finish to Fence 9.1 - Paint Types
EPT05 Paint finish to Internal and External Steel Work 9.1 - Paint Types
EPT06 Powdercoat finish 9.1 - Paint Types
U6.2. INTERNAL PAINT TYPES SCHEDULE

IPT01 Paint finish to internal plaster walls 9.2 - Sealants
IPT02 Paint finish to internal plasterboard ceilings 9.2 - Sealants
IPT03 Paint finish to internal timber trim. 9.2 - Sealants
IPT04 Two Pack Paint finish to Joinery. 9.2 - Sealants
U6.3. SEALANT SCHEDULE

SEALANT TYPE 01 Internal/External Stone Tile Penetrating Sealer 9.2 - Sealants
SEALANT TYPE 0 2 Wet Look Sealer to Exposed Aggregate Concrete 9.2 - Sealants
SEALANT TYPE 03 Protective Coating for Glazing 9.2 - Sealants
SEALANT TYPE 04 Protective Timber Sealant 9.2 - Sealants
SEALANT TYPE 04 Decking Oil 9.2 - Sealants
U7. COMPLETION
On completion of all painting all finishes are to be cleaned and polished as required using techniques
suitable to avoid the possibility of scratching and surface in any way whatsoever. Ensure all finishes are
protected from damage and thoroughly cleaned prior to hand over at Practical Completion. Complete
work in accordance with instructions and written variation orders. Contractor to provide a Warranty
covering satisfactory performance of the complete installation.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section V
LANDSCAPE AND POOLS
V. LANDSCAPE AND POOL
V1. SCOPE OF WORKS
The work includes all Landscaping works as described in the Ground Floor and Site Plan including the
following.
 Excavation relating to all Landscape Items.

 All Hardscaping items, decks, retaining walls, paving and garden beds structures.
 Retaining wall garden edging as required to Rear Yard.
 Supply and Installation of Top Soil, Edging and Mulch to garden beds.
 Detail finish of Pool including co-ordination of Pool contractor for this detail finish.
 Detail finish of Fencing and posts.
 Supply, installation and plumbing of Raingardens.
 Lighting
The following items form part of the landscape provisional sum.

 Supply and Installation of all planting including Turf.
 Supply and installation of topsoil & mulch to garden beds.
 Supply and Installation of Irrigation system.
 Hardscaping not indicated on architectural drawings.
Note: Supply of Installation of all plants and Irrigation to Garden Beds and Lawn Areas forms part of the
Landscaping Provisional Sum. (Refer Part W of this specification)
V2. LANDSCAPING - WORKMANSHIP
All Workmanship to be of best quality Standards. All workmen to be trained landscapers with minimum
five (5) years experience.
V3. MATERIALS
Refer to Architectural Site plan for surface treatments and setout of hardscape elements. All external
lighting to be co-ordinated and integrated with external walls and fences.
V3.1. PLANTING
Landscape plants to be supplied and installed as per the Landscape Provisional Sum (Refer Part W of
this specification). At time of delivery, the contractor is to confirm that plants are healthy and fit for
purpose. Contractor to include to organise and take delivery, installation, and care for plants until end of
contract as required.
V3.2. IRRIGATION
The Irrigation system is to connect to the mains water as nominated by the Project Plumber.
Irrigation System to all Garden Beds and Lawn to be supplied and installed as per the Landscape
Provisional Sum (Refer Part W of this specification).
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page V-1 of 4

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
LANDSCAPE AND POOLS
V4. POOLS
V4.1. POOL SCOPE OF WORKS

The work includes the following:
 Ground Floor Swimming Pool

 Detail finish of Pools including co-ordination of Pool contractor for this detail finish
 Pool Equipment and Services including lighting
 All drainage and as required for pool operation
V4.2. STANDARDS
Refer structural Engineers Drawings & Pool Contractors Hydraulic design for all relevant standard
compliance requirements.
V4.3. POOL - WORKMANSHIP

Pools are to be installed by a leading pool contractor.
All structure to be of highest standard and sequenced as required by Structural Engineer and as required
to build pool shell that is structurally watertight. Comply with engineering dual certification and
construction sequence to ensure protection of neighbouring boundary wall. Pool structure to be designed
to operate together with rear house slab structure as required by Structural Engineer.
Tanking is to be watertight and sealed as required. Tiling and copings as specified and to be flush and
connected to landscape and internal floor finishes.
Pool equipment as per Pool Specification appendix. Pipe runs to be installed with correct falls and in
orderly layout.
V4.4. POOL FILTRATION AND EQUIPMENT

Contractor to provide necessary hydraulics, mechanical and power for lights, pump, filtration, chlorination,
heating and cleaning of the Swimming Pool/Spa located to the rear yard. All equipment to be located to
the eastern setback of property. All equipment is to be installed to relevant regulations and Australian
Standards. Contractor is to co-ordinate in with all trades and project plumber as required.
Allow equipment feet to mount pool equipment off paving and provide mounting points to fence or
additional posts for mounting as required. All pool filtration supply lines will be run in 50mm plumbing. All
pipe works below concrete will be of class 12 type. Prior to concrete placement all lines will be tested to
200kps and held under water pressure. All pool equipment is to be installed on suitable concrete sub
base as required.
V4.4.1. SWIMMING POOL

Supply and Install in ground Swimming Pool to the backyard approx 3.5m wide by 6.6m long measured at
waterline. Depth of pool varies from 1.1m to 1.8m with integrated steps and swim out area. Corner
junctions to be curved.
Supply and Install in ground Pond integral and connected to pool approx 9.8m long by 1.95m wide
measured at waterline. Depth of pond is 0.3-0.4m with integrated steps and seating ledge. Corner
junctions to be squared.
Pool Equipment as follows:
Pump Supply and Install 1 x Astral P600 energy efficient Pool Pump.
Controller Supply and Install Viron connect 10 pool and sap automation with smart phone
App.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
LANDSCAPE AND POOLS
Filter Supply and Install 1 x Astral CA400 sand filter
Skimmer Supply and Install 1 x Waterco Skimmer box, 50mm suction line and 2 x 50mm
solar suctions
Chlorination Supply and Install Viron EQ 25 self testing and dosing PH & salt chlorination
system.
Refill Valve Supply and Install Automatic filling & levelling device.
Water Stops Supply and Install Epoxy and Hydrophilic water stops.
Heating Sunlover 100% coverage digitally controlled solar heating system mounted to the
Metal Deck Roof: Pipework to be pressurised for construction period and
insulated with Nuwrap 5 for sound insulation.
Lights 7 x Spa Electrics LED Single Colour Wet Niche' lights—Refer to Section P -
Electrical of this Specification.
Cleaning Supply and Install Paramout Cyclean in floor cleaning system with independent
suction line to equipment area for Pool.
Fittings Supply & Install of all pool fittings/accessories to be black in colour. All Fit off
items to be UV and Impact Resistant ABS Plastic dress rings confirming to AS
1926 3 2010.
Finishes POOL TILE tile to pool.

PV01 Coping tile at pool edge & External paving tile to pool terrace & path.
DK01 Ironbark Decking flush with PV01 terrace & coping tiles.
Waterproofing All internal surfaces to be waterproofed using Mapeilastic Smart membrane.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
LANDSCAPE AND POOLS
V5. MATERIALS TABLES
V5.1. GROUND SURFACE FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.2 Ground Surface Finishes.

GARDEN BED Garden Beds Generally to be prepared for installation of 2.2 - Ground Surface Finishes
Planting.
PLANTING Landscape Planting. Refer Landscape Provisional Sum 2.2 - Ground Surface Finishes
LAWN Instant Turf to Front and Back yards. Refer Landscape 2.2 - Ground Surface Finishes
Provisional Sum.
GRAVEL Lilydale Toppings bedded and compacted as required. 75mm 2.2 - Ground Surface Finishes
Depth.
V5.2. GARDEN WALLS

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.3 Garden Walls.

EDGING FORMBOSS 'ZAM' 2.0mm metal edging Retaining Wall. 2.3 - Garden Walls
V5.3. POOL FINISHES

Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.3 Pools

POOL Black Lustre Rectangular CM456 Ceramic Mosaic Pool Tile 2.3 - Pools
internally. 95x45mm. (as per $70/sqm PC rate from Laguna)
V5.4. POOL
Refer to Specification Tables Appendix 1 - Material Specification: Part 2.3 Pools and 2.4 Equipment.

POOL EQUIPMENT Pool Filtration, Pumps and Heating 2.4 - Equipment
V6. COMPLETION
Site to be left clean, orderly and free of debris to approval of architect.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section W
PRIME COST & PROVISIONAL SUMS
W. PRIME COST & PROVISIONAL SUMS
W1. GENERAL
The Contractor is referred to Section A of this Specification regarding the general requirements for
named subcontractors. Provide all such access, site amenities, power, water, hoisting and cranage as
is necessary for the Works. Specific requirements for individual named subcontractors shall be provided
by the named subcontractor concerned. The Contractor will be responsible for coordinating all such
facilities and ensuring that there is no additional cost to the Owner resulting from the engagement of any
named subcontractor.
The following figures are exclusive of GST and no builders margin is to be added to any variation to these
prime costs or provisional sums at time of adjusting the contract.
W2. RESPONSIBILITY
All named subcontractors (“NSC”) shall become the entire responsibility of the Contractor who shall
coordinate their work within the overall construction program to ensure the date for Practical Completion
is achieved. Arrange for all necessary protection to completed work of NSC's, coordinate the installation
of all Prime Cost and Provisional Sum work with other trades and accept full responsibility for any
damage caused resulting from failure to comply with this clause.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page W-1 of 3

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
W3. PROVISIONAL SUMS
W3.1. MAINTENANCE - HARD PLASTER

Allow the Provisional cost sum of
TWO THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED DOLLARS ($2,800.00)
Refer Maintenance Schedule in Specification appendix. The provisional sum does not include and
the contractor is to allow for general bog, patch, sand and make good to walls as required ready for
painting.
The provisional sum allows for 40sqm of hard plaster to existing walls at a rate of $70/sqm.
W3.2. MAINTENANCE - LEVEL & RESTUMP FLOORS

FIVE THOUSAND DOLLARS ($5,000.00)
The provisional sum allows to level & restump existing floors at a rate of $170/sqm.
The provisional sum does not include and the contractor is to allow for general floor leveling due to
settlement and prior damage.
W3.3. HEADWORKS
FIVE THOUSAND DOLLARS ($5,000.00)
Including works connecting external services to the property only for the Supply & Installation of all
headworks items relating to the following:
 Electrical connection including new/relocated Meter.
 Confirm existing water connection including Meter.
 Confirm existing Gas connection including tapping.
 Stormwater connection to Legal Point of Discharge.
 Confirm existing sewer connection & boundary trap suitable.
 PayTV, Comms and Internet connection.
W3.4. SOFT LANDSCAPING

TEN THOUSAND DOLLARS ($10,000.00)
Supply & installation of turf, top soil, planting, irrigation and all associated works. All hardscaping to
be included in contract price, including all fencing, bulk & detail excavation, retaining walls, paving,
stairs, garden steppers & reticulated plumbing (not including irrigation).
Contractor to include to organise and take delivery, installation, and care for plants until end of
contract as required. Contractor to allow for all excavation and hardscaping in fixed contract.
Hardscaping defined as built objects that are irremovable by hand once constructed including
steppers.

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
W4. PRIME COST SUMS
W4.1. LIGHT FITTINGS

Allow the Prime cost sum of
SIX THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED SIXTY DOLLARS ($6,260.00)
Pendant lights LT07a-f (8 total) & External garden stake lights (21 total).
The Provisional sum is for the fitting only including delivery. Contractor is allow for wiring,
installation, taking delivery, storage and all associated works.
W5. SUMMARY OF PRIME COSTS & PROVISIONAL SUMS
ITEM SUM ALLOWANCE
W3.1. PS – Maintenance - Hard Plaster $ 2,800.00 Excluding GST

W3.2. PS – Maintenance - Level & Restump Floors $ 5,000.00 Excluding GST
W3.3. PS – Headworks $ 5,000.00 Excluding GST
W3.4. PS – Soft Landscaping $ 10,000.00 Excluding GST

W4.1. PC – Light Fittings $ 6,260.00 Excluding GST
TOTAL: $ 29,060.00 Excluding GST

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section X
CLEAN UP & COMPLETION
X. CLEAN UP AND COMPLETION
X1. DURING BUILDING OPERATIONS
X1.1. CLEAN UP
The Contractor shall take adequate measures to ensure the clean and orderly performance of the Works
of the Contract and full provision shall be made for the removal of all rubbish, debris, etc., and for the
tidy disposal, stacking and storage of materials. The site shall be constantly cleaned of rubbish etc.,
and swept over and maintained in a tidy condition. These conditions are mandatory and will be
enforced. The Contractor must maintain a clean site at all times during building operations.
X1.2. PROTECTION
The Contractor shall provide adequate protection for all finished surfaces, fittings, equipment, etc., as
necessary and shall be responsible for all damage done to same until the building and site are handed
over at Practical Completion.
X1.3. DUCTS PITS, ETC.

All pipe ducts and similar areas shall be properly cleaned out, free from rubbish, debris, etc., as the work
proceeds. All drains, pits and pipe work shall be protected after installation to prevent entry of foreign
matter. Provide all necessary covers, end-caps and blocking pieces as work proceeds and remove only
when final pipe work is completed and sealed.
X2. COMPLETION
X2.1. GENERAL
Each section of the building works and surroundings shall be thoroughly and carefully cleaned,
including washing, scrubbing, polishing, dusting, etc. and all temporary protection from materials and
equipment specified under the various sections of this Specification shall be removed and everything left
in perfect order to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. Vacuum cupboards and fitments, dust all
surfaces, remove labels and markings and leave ready for use by the Owner.
X2.2. GLASS
Glass etc., shall be cleaned inside and out by approved expert cleaners and all paint stains, factory
markings and putty smears etc. removed. Ensure that cleaners do not scratch glass in the process of
cleaning each glazed opening. Any damaged putty, painting and caulking shall be cut out, made good
and repainted.
X2.3. PAINTING
All painted surfaces shall be handed over in perfect order. Provide for touching up, re-painting etc. as
may be required to remove any stains, marks or blemishes existing prior to the actual occupation by the
Owner at Practical Completion.
X2.4. PLANT, SCAFFOLDING, HOARDINGS

Remove all plant, scaffolding, hoardings, surplus materials, etc., as soon as they are no longer required
and in total before Practical Completion.
X2.5. ADJUSTMENTS
All windows, sashes, doors, closers etc., shall be eased and adjusted as necessary and all locks,
fastenings, etc., shall be oiled to ensure satisfactory operation.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page X-1 of 2

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section X
CLEAN UP & COMPLETION
X2.6. KEYS
Prior to Practical Completion hand all keys for all locks to the Architect with indicator tags, two keys per
cylinder to clearly identify each lock or door.
X2.7. SITE
On completion of the Works and prior to Practical Completion the Contractor shall remove all temporary
fences, hoardings, sheds, temporary paving, and the like. Provide even grades to surface drains.
Disconnect and remove any temporary service lines and re-instate all paving, driveways and road
surfaces disturbed by construction of the Works.
X3. WARRANTIES
Hand over all Warranties in which the Owner is named as the beneficiary for all work carried out by the
Contractor or by his sub contractors for each part of the work for which a warranty is required.
X4. MANUALS
Submit final instruction and data sheets on all equipment by suppliers including an index of all
equipment and materials, specifications, descriptions, operating instructions, wiring diagrams, spare and
replacement parts, manuals, service numbers and ordering sheets compiled and bound into one or
more volumes.
Provide `as-built' drawings, maintenance manuals and other instruction brochures for all services and
equipment and as required by this Specification.
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page X-2 of 2

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Section Y
APPENDICIES
Y. APPENDICES
Y1. ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE
Y2. TITLE DOCUMENTS
Y3. LAND SURVEY
Y4. LEGAL POINT OF DISCHARGE
Y5. SOIL REPORT
Y6. ENERGY REPORT
Y7. DOOR HARDWARE SPECIFICATION
Y8. AIR CONDITIONING, HYDRONIC HEATING & VENTILATION

SPECIFICATION
Y9. WINDOW COVERING SPECIFICATION
Y10. POOL SPECIFICATION
Y11. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION (DELETED)
Y12. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Y13. TOWN PLANNING PERMIT
Y14. INDICATIVE IMAGES
AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page Y-1 of 1

CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Extension & Renovation
for
NIKKI WOLSKI
at
3 GLENDEARG GROVE, MALVERN
CONSTRUCTION ISSUE
Aug-2017

Level One,
178 Ferrars Street South Melbourne, Vic. 3205
Telephone: 03 9682 4222 Mobile: 03 9682 4222

APPENDIX Y6 - PROJECT SCHEDULE
SCHEDULE CONTENTS
1 STRUCTURE 1.10 FLOOR STRUCTURE
1.20 WALL STRUCTURE
1.30 ROOF STRUCTURE
1.40 WATERPROOFING
1.50 INSULATION
2 EXTERNAL WORKS & 2.10 SCREENS, FENCES & GATES
EQUIPMENT 2.20 GROUND SURFACE FINISH
2.30 POOL, GARDEN WALLS, STAIRS & EXTERNAL BALUSTRADES
2.40 EQUIPMENT
2.50 DRAINAGE
2.60 MISCELLANEOUS
3 EXTERNAL FINISHES 3.10 DECKS & PAVERS
3.20 WALLS
3.30 SOFFITS
3.40 ROOFS
3.50 TRIM, GUTTERS & DOWNPIPES
4 INTERNAL FINISHES 4.10 FLOORS
4.20 WALLS
4.30 CEILINGS
4.40 TRIM
4.50 STAIRS & BALUSTRADES
5 JOINERY 5.10 JOINERY FINISHES
5.20 BENCHES, SPLASHBACKS & MIRRORS
5.30 JOINERY HARDWARE
5.40 JOINERY ACCESSORIES
6 SANITARY, APPLIANCES & 6.10 SANITARY
ACCESSORIES 6.20 APPLIANCES
6.30 TAPWARE & DRAINS
6.40 ACCESSORIES
7 ELECTRICAL, LIGHTING & 7.10 LIGHTING
EQUIPMENT 7.20 ELECTRICAL, TV, COMMS & SECURITY
7.30 MECHANICAL, HYDRAULIC & VENTILATION
7.40 EQUIPMENT
8 WINDOWS & DOORS 8.10 GLAZING
8.20 WINDOWS
8.30 SKYLIGHTS
8.40 DOORS
8.50 HANDLES
8.60 HINGES & OPENERS
8.70 LOCKSETS
8.80 FLYSCREENS & BLINDS
9 APPLIED FINISHES 9.10 COLOURS
9.20 EXTERIOR PAINT
9.30 INTERIOR PAINT
9.40 SEALANTS & POWDERCOATS
10 PRIME COSTS & 10.10 PRIME COSTS
PROVISIONAL SUMS 10.20 PROVISIONAL SUMS
11 APPENDICES 11.01 TITLE DOCUMENTS
11.02 LAND SURVEY
11.03 LEGAL POINT OF DISCHARGE
11.04 SOIL REPORT
11.05 ENERGY REPORT
11.06 DOOR HARDWARE SPECIFICATION
11.07 MECHANICAL SERVICES SPECIFICATION
11.08 WINDOW FURNISHING SPECIFICATION
11.09 POOL SPECIFICATION
11.10 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION (DELETED)
11.11 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
11.12 TOWN PLANNING PERMIT
11.13 INDICATIVE IMAGES
14.08.17
Contents-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 1 of 1
SCHEDULE 1 :
STRUCTURE
DESCRIPTION LOCATION QTY IMAGE

REFERENCE FLOOR TYPE 01 General
FLOOR STRUCTURE 1.1
DESCRIPTION Paving Slab

FINISH Bluestone / Aggregate / Trowel Finish
CODE Reinforced Concrete slab on ground.
SIZE Refer Structural Engineers Drawings for thickness and
reinforcing requirements.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT MEMBRANE 01 underside of slab.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FLOOR TYPE 02 Ground Floor
DESCRIPTION Concrete slab on ground. Slab.
FINISH Tiles / Burnished Screed / Carpet
CODE Reinforced Concrete Slab on ground.
SIZE Refer Structural Engineers Drawings for thickness and
reinforcing requirements.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT MEMBRANE 01 generally. INSULATION 01 under areas with
hydronic heating.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FLOOR TYPE 03 Upper Floor.
DESCRIPTION Timber Framed Floor with Particleboard Deck.
FINISH Carpet / Tiles.
CODE Timber Framed Floor with Particleboard / Structural Ply /
Compressed Fibre Cement Flooring.
SIZE Refer Structural Engineers Drawings.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT INSULATION 04 to overhang with MEMBRANE 03 to external
face of frame. INSULATION 05 generally.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FLOOR TYPE 04 Deck.
DESCRIPTION Timber Framed External Deck.
FINISH Decking
CODE Class 1 framing as required.
SIZE Refer Structural Engineers Drawings.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FLOOR TYPE EX Existing floor or
DESCRIPTION EXISTING timber framed internal floor. refurbished areas
FINISH Carpet / Tiles / engineered flooring. of ground floor.
CODE Timber Framed Floor with existing flooring made good with new
finishes over. New Compressed Fibre Cement Flooring to Tiled
areas. Existing floor framing & stumping to be made good.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Additional subfloor Ventilation to perimeter to be doubled to
12,000mm²/lineal metre as required by building surveyor.
SETOUT INSULATION 04 where flooring is replaced ie. Wet areas.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
01STRUC-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 3 of 68
REFERENCE WALL TYPE 01 General
WALL STRUCTURE 1.2
DESCRIPTION Timber Framed Wall

FINISH
CODE Timber framed stud wall.
SIZE 90mm.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Refer to structural engineer drawings for concrete and
reinforcing specfications.
ANCILLARY MEMBRANE 03 to external face. INSULATION 02 between studs
externally. INSULATION TYPE 04 between studs internally.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WALL TYPE 02 General
DESCRIPTION Brick Veneer Wall
FINISH WC01 render or WC04 face brick externally.
CODE 110mm brickwork with render externally, 50mm cavity, 90mm
timber stud wall internal.
SIZE 250mm excluding internal wall finish
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Refer to structural engineer drawings for stud sizings & footings.
ANCILLARY Allow weep holes / damp proof course as required. MEMBRANE

03 to external face of studs.
INSULATION 02 between studs.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WALL TYPE 03
DESCRIPTION Masonry Wall.
FINISH WC01 render, WC04 face brick or EPT01 paint externally.
WFEX or WF03 generally internally.
CODE 110mm brickwork or 230mm double brick internally to match
existing. 270mm cavity brick externally to match existing.
Existing brickwork to be made good.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Allow weep holes / damp proof course as required.
SETOUT Refer to structural engineer drawings for support specfications.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE STEEL STRUCTURE General
DESCRIPTION Steel Structure
FINISH All exposed Structural Steel and non Structural Steel, except
where used in joinery items, to be Hot Dip Galvanized. All
exposed steel to have EPT05/6 as well as being Hot Dip
Galvanized.
CODE
SIZE As Per Engineers Specifications
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS As Per Engineers Specifications
REFERENCE ROOF TYPE 1
ROOF STRUCTURE 1.3
DESCRIPTION Framed Skillion Roof.

FINISH RF01.
CODE Steel sheeted timber framed roof with graded timber battens
or purlins.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Refer to structural engineer drawings for specfications.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY INSULATION 03 to ceiling.
MEMBRANE 03 to external underside of frame.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE ROOF TYPE EX
DESCRIPTION Existing Hip Roof.
FINISH RFEX.
CODE Tiled timber framed roof.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY INSULATION 03 to ceiling.
MEMBRANE 03 to external frame.
Where existing ceiling / roofing is removed.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 01 General
WATERPROOFING 1.4
DESCRIPTION Vapour Barrier Membrane to Underside of Concrete Slab

FINISH Black
CODE U.V - Proof Polyethelyne
SIZE As Per Engineers Specifications
INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
SETOUT Lapped 300mm & Taped at Joints
ANCILLARY Refer to Structural Engineers Drawings
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Refer to Structural Engineers Drawings
REFERENCE WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 02 General
DESCRIPTION Wet Area Waterproofing System
FINISH NA
CODE CORMIX Contite FCW MCI System or Similar Approved System
SIZE Apply 2 coats direct to concrete slab and 2 coats to walls over
Cormix Conpath 600 substrate on blockwork walls
SETOUT Applied to All Wet Area Floors & Walls to Be Tiled
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Applied to All Wet Area Floors & Walls to Be Tiled
REFERENCE WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 03 Under all external
DESCRIPTION Reflective Foil Sarking cladding including
FINISH roofing and
CODE BRADFORD "Thermoseal" sarking suitable for purpose or masonry cavities
similar approved.
SIZE Selection according to application.
SETOUT Ensure sarking is lapped 150 mm at joints and overlapped as

recommended by manufacturer to prevent any entry of moisture
to inside face of wall or roof areas
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 04
DESCRIPTION Poly Course Flashing
FINISH
CODE Poly Course Flashing
SIZE
SETOUT To be installed at all external openings including windows and
doors. Width to suit wall type and construction.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Ensure all joins and junctions fully sealed and to be fully
watertight
11.08.17
REFERENCE WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 05 External Pool &
DESCRIPTION Pool and Retaining Wall Tanking Retaining Walls
FINISH NA
CODE Aqueous Bitumen
SIZE
INSTALLATION 2 Coats Applied in Accordance with manufacturers
Specifications.
SETOUT Ensure Water Proof Membrane Connection to PVC Membrane
to Underside of Slab.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Refer to Pool Consultant Drawings
REFERENCE INSULATION TYPE 01 Under slab FT02
INSULATION 1.5
DESCRIPTION Foam under slab insulation. to internal areas.

FINISH NA
CODE Foamular Metric 250 extruded polystyrene insulation.
SIZE 50mm Thickness.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY MEMBRANE TYPE 1 over sand bed under insulation.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS As per Energy Report
REFERENCE INSULATION TYPE 02 Timber Framed
DESCRIPTION Bulk Wall Insulation.
FINISH
CODE Bradford Gold Hi-Performance Wall Batts.
SIZE R2.7 - 90mm thickness.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Total R-value as per Energy Report
REFERENCE INSULATION TYPE 03 To new and
DESCRIPTION Bulk Ceiling Insulation. existing ceilings.
FINISH
CODE Bradford Hi Performance Ceiling Batts.
SIZE R6 - 260mm thickness.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE INSULATION TYPE 04 To overhanging
DESCRIPTION Underfloor insulation first floor.
FINISH To existing floor
CODE Bradford Optimo Floor Batts. where flooring
SIZE R2.5 - 90mm replaced.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE INSULATION TYPE 05 Bedrooms
DESCRIPTION Acoustic Insulation Bathrooms
FINISH Living Areas
CODE Bradford Soundscreen R2.5 Batts for walls & floors. Service Areas
SIZE R2.5 - 90mm thickness.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
SCHEDULE 2 :
EXTERNAL WORKS & EQUIPMENT

REFERENCE FENCE TYPE 1 Boundary Fences.
SCREENS, FENCES & GATES 2.1
DESCRIPTION Existing Timber Paling Fence. Existing made

FINISH EPT04 Colour 'C' Charcoal to exposed faces not covered in good or new to
creepers. match.
CODE Exsiting timber paling fence with 300mm max timber sleeper
retaining to base as required. Make Good.
SIZE 1.8-2.4m high.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Refer architectural drawings.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS To comply with AS 1926 to pool area.
REFERENCE FENCE TYPE 2 Front Fence
DESCRIPTION Brick Fence.
FINISH EPT01 'Colour B' Painted Brick.
CODE Existing brick fence with brick piers. New gate cut in between
central piers as required.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Confirm suitability with engineer prior to demolition.
SETOUT Rendered top to wall to slope 5° to internal face.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FENCE TYPE 3 Service Fence
DESCRIPTION Paling Fence.
FINISH EPT04 Colour 'C' Charcoal
CODE Timber paling fence with 300mm max timber sleeper retaining to
base as required.
SIZE 2400mm high.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Refer architectural drawings.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS To comply with AS 1926 to pool area.
REFERENCE FENCE TYPE 4 Pool Enclosure
DESCRIPTION Glass Pool Fence
FINISH Sealant Type 3 to Glass
CODE FRAMELESS IMPRESSIONS recessed channel fixed toughened
glass pool fencing.
SIZE Min. 1200mm high above adjacent finish levels & as noted.
INSTALLATION Recessed stainless steel channel & fixings to manufacturer's
specifications finish flush with top of paving / decking.
SETOUT Refer architectural drawings. Pool Fence to be in strict
accordance with AS 1296-2012.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER Frameless Impressions
REMARKS To comply with AS 1288 & AS 2208.
REFERENCE GATE 01 1
DESCRIPTION Steel Picket Gate.
FINISH EPT05 Colour 'D' Black Killrust
CODE 75 x 50 x 3mm steel angle pickets fixed to steel ledger frame
with SS barrel hinges to post & footing structure as required.
Allow 100mm overhang for pickets to top & bottom of tube
frame. Pickets to be fixed to street side of tube frame. All steel to
be hot-dipped galvanised with paint finish.
SIZE 1800mm high.
INSTALLATION All members to be sized and fixed adequately for purpose. All
welded fixings to be finished & filed as required. Refer to
structural engineer drawings for footing specfication.
SETOUT Refer detail. Setout and spacing to be reviewed by architect
prior to fabrication. Contractor to ensuire adequate construction.
ANCILLARY Fixing plates / box as required for electronic locking mechanism,

lever & access control.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS To comply with AS 1170.1.
11.08.17
02EXTWORK-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 7 of 68
REFERENCE GATE 02 1
DESCRIPTION Automated Swing Steel Picket Driveway Gate.
FINISH EPT05 Colour 'D' Black Killrust
CODE 75 x 50 x 3mm steel angle pickets fixed to steel ledger frame
with footing structure as required. Allow 100mm overhang for
pickets to top & bottom of tube frame. Pickets to be fixed to
street side of tube frame. All steel to be hot-dipped galvanised
with paint finish.
FAAC remote opening swing motors to suit application.
Obstacle sensor & anti-crushing mechanism.
SIZE 1800mm high.
INSTALLATION All members to be sized and fixed adequately for purpose. All
welded fixings to be finished & filed as required. Refer to
structural engineer drawings for footing specfication.
SETOUT Refer detail. Setout and spacing to be reviewed by architect
prior to fabrication. Contractor to ensuire adequate construction.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS To comply with AS 1170.1.
REFERENCE GATE 03 & 04
DESCRIPTION Timber Paling Gate.
FINISH EPT04 Colour 'C' Charcoal
CODE To match Fence 03. HDG Steel Ledger frame.
Barrel Hinges, lockbox, & hardware as per Door Hardware
Specification.
SIZE Height to match fence
INSTALLATION Refer Engineer's Drawings for footing detail.
SETOUT Fixing plate & lockbox as required for electronic access
control, locking mechanism, keypad & lever.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE GATE 05 1
DESCRIPTION Glass to Glass Glazed Pool Gate
FINISH Sealant Type 3 to Glass
CODE FRAMELESS IMPRESSIONS toughened glass pool gate.
SIZE Min. 1200mm high above adjacent finish levels & as noted.
INSTALLATION Polaris Satin 316 Stainless Steel Soft Close hinge to suit Glass
to Glass installation (CODE PGGS)
Polaris Satin 316 Stainless Latch to suit Glass to Glass
installation (CODE LAGG180S)
SETOUT Pool Fence/Gate to be in strict accordance with AS 1296 & AS
2208.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER Frameless Impressions
REMARKS Installation and Glass preparation to be in strict accordance with
manufacturers specifications
REFERENCE AUTO GATE Gate 02 1
DESCRIPTION Automatic Gate Opener
FINISH
CODE FAAC 415 series remote opening swing motor or as required to
suit application. Obstacle sensor & anti-crushing mechanism.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Gate Type 01
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER FAAC
REMARKS Include sensor switch and remote access.
11.08.17
REFERENCE GARDEN General
GROUND SURFACE FINISH 2.2
DESCRIPTION Garden Bed.

FINISH As Per Landscape Drawings.
CODE Garden bed in planter box, to retained area or in ground with
EDGING where directly adjacent to lawn. For garden bed in
planter box—topsoil over geofabric with scoria base and screed
to drain.
SIZE Allow adequate topsoil depths as required & as per landscape

drawings.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT As per Site Plan & Landscape drawings. Builder to allow
waterproofing to planter boxes.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Refer Provisional Sum for garden beds (ie. Topsoil only).
REFERENCE PLANTING General
DESCRIPTION Landscape Planting
CODE Plant species & sizes as per landscape drawings.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Allow for planting method as per Landscape Drawings.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Refer Provisional Sum for planting. Contractor to confirm
suitibility of plants on delivery and care for plants for the
duration of the contract as required.
REFERENCE LAWN General
DESCRIPTION Lawn
CODE Lawn spec. as per landscape drawings.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE GRAVEL General
DESCRIPTION Gravel
FINISH
CODE Lilydale Toppings bedded and compacted as required.
SIZE 75mm depth.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT As per Site Plan.
ANCILLARY Hard compacted substrate.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE POOL Pool
EXTERNAL BALUSTRADES 2.3
DESCRIPTION Pool Tile

FINISH Black Lustre Rectangular CM456 Ceramic Mosaic Pool Tile
internally. 95x45mm. (as per $70/sqm PC rate from Laguna)
CODE Custom formed reinforced concrete pool shell.
SIZE Pool Shell to engineer's spec. 1100-1800mm deep.
Nom 3000 x 8000mm inclusive of steps.
INSTALLATION Tile Fixing as required. Grout to match tile colour and to be
Silicon-based as required for pool installation.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
POOL, GARDEN WALLS, STAIRS & E
REFERENCE EDGING General

DESCRIPTION Garden edging
FINISH
CODE FORMBOSS 'ZAM' 2.0mm metal edging.For garden edging
where retaining soil.
SIZE Up to 580mm high 1/3 in ground.
INSTALLATION Gauge & stake types to suit application.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE PATH General
DESCRIPTION Insitu Concrete Path
FINISH PV03 finish. Refer Drawings
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION Refer Engineer's Drawings.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TAP Refer Plans 5
EQUIPMENT 2.4
DESCRIPTION External Wall Mounted Garden Hose Tap.

FINISH Brass
CODE 12 mm threaded brass wall mounted hose bibs. Connected to
water tank.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Provide galvanised steel wall clips & SHS mounting stakes with
Powdercoat finish where required.
SETOUT Garden & Service Area Locations shown on the Site Plan. To be
confirmed with client prior to rough in.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE GAS BBQ OUTLET BBQ
DESCRIPTION Valve outlet
FINISH
CODE Installed & protected to Australian Standards.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE RAINGARDEN To Bike store and
DESCRIPTION front garden.
FINISH
CODE Refer WSUD report for raingarden specification.
Build up to include pvc liner, 50mm gravel mulch, 400mm
sand/soil mix, 100mm sand & 200mm (7mm) gravel screenings,
and drainage points and piping.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE IRRIGATION SYSTEM General
DESCRIPTION Existing Landscape Irrigation
FINISH
CODE Contractor to recommission system as part of landscape
provisional sum. To be compatible and plumbed for use with
Rain Water harvested in water tank.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT To all Garden Bed and Lawn Areas
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Refer Provisional Sum for irrigation.
11.08.17
REFERENCE POOL EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION Pool Filtration / Pumps / Heating
FINISH
CODE REFER Specification 7.4 Equipment
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE PIT TYPE Px Gardens
DRAINAGE 2.5
DESCRIPTION Drainage Pit

FINISH
CODE Concrete Pit with GATIC style L/D Gal Steel Grate Lid/insert or
similar approved.
SIZE 450 x 450mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Refer Civil Engineer's Specification & Architectural Drawings for
length & setout.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER Gatic Grates
REMARKS
REFERENCE DRAIN Gardens
DESCRIPTION Agi drain.
FINISH
CODE PVC agi drains as required to garden beds & retaining.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Refer Civil engineer's drawings for specification.
SETOUT Refer to Civil Engineer & Architectural Drawings for setout.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LETTERBOX Front Fence
MISCELLANEOUS 2.6
DESCRIPTION Custom Fabricated Letterbox and Face Plate

FINISH
CODE A4 letter slot, video, microphone & intercom button inset, entry
keypad, and stainless steel wall sleeve box.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Fit to custom fabricated picket Fence Type 2.
SETOUT Refer Fence Drawings.Letter Slot & Paper Hole with Number
"3" Etched into front panel. Font Type of number to be
confirmed.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE CLOTHESLINE Drying Court
DESCRIPTION Fold Down Clothesline
FINISH Pebble Beach
CODE HILLS 'Supafold Double' FD45600 fold-down clothesline.
SIZE 2.2 x 1.2m.
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturers specification.
SETOUT Wall Mounted.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
SCHEDULE 3 :
EXTERNAL FINISHES

REFERENCE PV01 General
DECKS & PAVERS 3.1
DESCRIPTION External Bluestone Paving Tile

FINISH Sawn finish. Lithofin finish sealer as required.
CODE Dense sawn dark bluestone paving tiles, stepping stones, &
80mm solid coping tile to walls, steps, porch and pool edges.
SIZE 800 x 400 x 20mm nom.

INSTALLATION Bonded Thick Bed Mortar. Paving slab substrate.
SETOUT 1.5mm Grouted Joint STACK BOND centred and to match floor
joints. Grout colour to match tiles.
ANCILLARY To meet R11 slip rating for pool areas as per NCC.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Sample to be provided.
REFERENCE PV02 Driveway
DESCRIPTION Exposed Aggregate Concrete.
FINISH "Macquarie Standard Black"
CODE MENTONE PRE-MIX exposed aggregate finish.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY To meet R11 slip rating for pool areas as per NCC.
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE PV03 Service areas
DESCRIPTION Steel trowel finish concrete slab.
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE PV04 Porch
DESCRIPTION Porch Feature Tile
FINISH
CODE Birmingham (chequered) tiles with Norwood Border or equal
alternative selection by client.
SIZE TBC
INSTALLATION Bonded Thick Bed Mortar.
SETOUT 1.5mm Grouted Joint STACK BOND centred.
Grout colour to suit tiles.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE DK01 Deck
DESCRIPTION Timber Decking.
FINISH Sealant Type 05. Stain or oil as required to allow weathering to
match bluestone tone.TBC with architect prior to installation.
CODE Iron Bark (Class 1) hardwood select grade 3mm pencil round
edge decking.
SIZE 130mm x 32mm nom.
INSTALLATION Marine quality stainless steel screw fixing countersunk.
SETOUT 3mm gaps. Timber to be acclimatised and setout for colour and
straightness.
ANCILLARY To meet slip rating for external areas as per NCC.
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
03EXTFIN-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 12 of 68
REFERENCE WC01 Existing House
WALLS 3.2
DESCRIPTION Paint Finish on Masonry Substrate. Front Fence

FINISH EPT01 Colour 'B' Grey
CODE Dulux 'Weathershield' paint finish over existing painted
brickwork. Existing paint to be stripped and masonry prepped as
required by paint manufacturer.
SIZE 10mm
INSTALLATION Application strictly to to manufacturers specifications.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Sample patch to be provided.
REFERENCE WC02 WIR exterior
DESCRIPTION Render Finish on Masonry Substrate. Ensuite 2, Gym,
FINISH Colour 'C' Charcoal Laundry, Butlers
CODE Dulux Acratex Acrylic Texture Render system exterior.
SIZE 10mm nominal.
SETOUT Square set edges and corners. 5mm V-joints for expansion.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE WC03 Upper Floor &
DESCRIPTION Render Finish on Foam Substrate. Fireplace exterior
FINISH Colour 'C' Charcoal or Colour 'A' White as noted
CODE Dulux Acratex Acrylic Texture Render system over UNITEX
Baseboard foam cladding.
SIZE 10mm render.50mm Foam. nominal
SETOUT Square set edges and corners. 5mm V-joints for expansion.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE WC04
DESCRIPTION Face Brickwork
FINISH
CODE Recycled red & blue brick with sand coloured mortar to match
interior.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE WC05 upper floor & void
DESCRIPTION Painted battens on ply substrate. as noted
FINISH Colour 'C' Charcoal.
CODE 42 x 42mm dressed KDHW battens securely fixed to 12mm
marine grade ply substrate over battens with MEMBRANE 03
under to stud wall.
SIZE
SETOUT Horizontal battens with ~50mm spacing.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE SF01 Outdoor Living
SOFFITS 3.3
DESCRIPTION Wet Area Plasterboard Soffit Upper Floor

FINISH EPT03 Colour 'A' White.
CODE CSR 'Aquachek' 13mm plasterboard.
SIZE 13mm.
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturers specifications.
SETOUT Square set.
ANCILLARY Waterproof Membrane 03 under battens.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE SFEX Existing House
DESCRIPTION Timber lining boards.
FINISH EPT03 Colour 'A' White to front verandah.
EPT03 Colour 'D' Black to soffits, fascias and rafter tails.
CODE Exsiting timber lining boards to be made good and painted as
required.
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE RFEX Generally
ROOFS 3.4
DESCRIPTION Existing Roof

FINISH
CODE Existing slate tile roof to be made good.
Repair damaged or uneven tiling, fill gaps and make
watertight. Refer Maintenance Schedule in Specification.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE RF01 New roofs
DESCRIPTION Steel roof sheeting.
FINISH Colour 'C' Monument.
CODE LYSAGHT 'Trimdek' Zincalume roof sheeting with Colorbond
Finish.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Fixing to manufacturers specifications.
SETOUT 2° minimum fall - refer roof plan.
ANCILLARY MEMBRANE TYPE 03 under sheeting.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TRIM
TRIM, GUTTERS & DOWNPIPES 3.5
DESCRIPTION Aluminium Coverplates

FINISH EPT06 Colour 'D' Black to match window trims
CODE 3mm custom folded aluminium angle coverplates.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Coverplates to fit flush straight and true to adjacent finishes.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE PORCH TIMBERWORK
DESCRIPTION Existing Porch Timber posts & fretwork
FINISH EPT03D
CODE Existing porch timber posts, beams and fretwork to be removed
and replaced to match as required.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Roof to be propped as required.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE BOX GUTTER (GUT01)
DESCRIPTION Fabricated Box Gutter
FINISH COLORBOND to match roofing colour.
CODE Custom fabricated Zincalume box gutter with Colorbond finish.
SIZE 400W 80D minimum. 0.6 BMT.

SETOUT Refer Roof Plan.
ANCILLARY 20mm marine ply gutter board.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS To comply with AS3500.5.
REFERENCE FASCIA GUTTER (GUT02)
DESCRIPTION General Eaves Gutter
CODE LYSAGHT 'QUAD' gutter. Zincalume with Colorbond finish.
SIZE
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE VALLEY GUTTER (GUT03)
DESCRIPTION Valley Gutter
CODE Existing gutter to be confirmed as coplying with AS3500.5 or
new Custom formed Zincalume with Colorbond finish gutter to
main existing roof valley.
SIZE
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE EXISTING GUTTER (GUTEX)
DESCRIPTION EXISTING Eaves Gutter
FINISH PAINT EPT03Dr.
CODE Existing eaves gutters to be made good. Repair, seal and adjust
falls as required for correct operation. Remove central spitter to
porch roof and add additional downpipes as needed to sides.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE FASCIA FSC01
DESCRIPTION Timber Fascia
FINISH Paint finish to match gutter.
CODE Hardwood timber fascia.
SIZE 200 x 25mm to suit application.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE OVERFLOW
DESCRIPTION Overflow
FINISH COLORBOND to match wall colour or window colour.
CODE Custom Overflow to Box Gutter Sump. Zincalume with
Colorbond finish to match wall cladding.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Custom formed overflow to be full width of sump with depths
and heights as required and to extend past face of wall/fascia as
required.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
REFERENCE RAINWATER HEAD
DESCRIPTION Rainwater Head.
FINISH COLORBOND to match wall colour or window colour.
CODE Ned Kelly' style tapered rainwater head. Zincalume with
colorbond finish.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT As noted on Architectural / Civil Drawings
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE DOWNPIPE 01
DESCRIPTION PVC Downpipe
FINISH
CODE PVC 90mm nom. diameter concealed pipe.
SIZE As noted on Hydraulics/Civil Drawings.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE DOWNPIPE 02
DESCRIPTION Colourbond Downpipe
FINISH Colorbond finish to match wall.
CODE 90mm diameter or 100x50mm pipe exposed downpipe.
Zincalume with Colorbond finish.
SIZE As noted on Hydraulics/Civil Drawings
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE CAP01
DESCRIPTION Ridge Capping
FINISH Colorbond finish to match roof.
CODE Zincalume with Colorbond finish.
SIZE 0.60 BMT minimum.
INSTALLATION Install strictly to to manufacturers specifications.
SETOUT 200mm min overlap for flashing.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Avoid unlike metals.
REFERENCE CAP02
DESCRIPTION Parapet / Barge Capping
FINISH Colorbond finish to match wall below.
50mm max return for capping with 15mm angled return.
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE FL01
DESCRIPTION General Flashing.
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
REFERENCE FL02
DESCRIPTION Window/Door Head & Sill Flashings
CODE Zincalume with Colorbond finish custom flashings.
INSTALLATION In accordance with manufacturer's specification
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FL03
DESCRIPTION Roof Penetration Flashing
FINISH
CODE DEKS DEKTITE to Suit Roof Profile/Material as required
SIZE
INSTALLATION In accordance with manufacturer's specification
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
SCHEDULE 4 :
INTERNAL FINISHES

REFERENCE FF01 Entry hallway
FLOORS 4.1
DESCRIPTION Engineered Timber Flooring Stair treads

FINISH UV Oil Extreme Matte
CODE FETHERS 'Maison Grey Stone' Engineered boards.
SIZE 190 x 14·2 x 1820mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Parallel to hallway
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FF02 Kitchen
DESCRIPTION Burnished Concrete. Living
FINISH Satin Resin Polish Finish. Dining
CODE Burnished concrete screed. GP Cement with 9% black oxide Laundry
and with 7-14mm black aggregate. Finish with Stainless Metal Butlers
Blades.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Slab to Engineers Specification. Expansion joints as required -
Architect to approve.Allow in-screed hydronic with top layer
mesh.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Hydronic heating in screed.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FF03 Master Bed
DESCRIPTION Carpet Master WIR
FINISH Appaloosa' or 'Buckskin' to be confirmed with client prior to Media
order. Bed 2, 3 & 4
CODE Prestige Carpets 'Natural Loop' Rumpus
SIZE 100% woollen loop pile. Passage 3
INSTALLATION Installation to manufactuer's specs with Supablue underlay. Study
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FF04 Ensuite 2
DESCRIPTION Belga floor tile Gym floor
FINISH Charcoal Bathroom
CODE Belga Charcoal GL Porc 1006529 Powder 1
SIZE 300 x 600 Powder 2
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Wear rating 4. Slip Rating P2
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FF05 Ensuite 1
DESCRIPTION Porcelain Floor Tile
FINISH Graphite
CODE ARKITEK 'Graphite Lappato' 1000062
SIZE 600x300
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturer's specifications.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Slip rating as required.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Confirm sample with client prior to order.
REFERENCE WF01
WALLS 4.2
DESCRIPTION Plasterboard with Paint finish

FINISH IPT01 Colour 'A' unless noted otherwise
CODE CSR 'Superchek' 10mm plasterboard.
SIZE 10mm
SETOUT Square set.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
14.08.17
04INTFIN-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 1 of 5
REFERENCE WF02
DESCRIPTION Wet Area Plasterboard with Paint finish
FINISH IPT01 Colour 'A' unless noted otherwise
CODE CSR 'Aquachek' 10mm plasterboard.
SIZE 10mm
SETOUT Square set.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WF03 Study west wall
DESCRIPTION Face Brickwork Stairs
FINISH
CODE Recycled red blue brick with sand coloured mortar.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Raked mortar joints.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE WF04 Ensuite 1
DESCRIPTION Wall tile
FINISH Cemento
CODE La Suite
SIZE 600 x 600
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WF05 Ensuite 2
DESCRIPTION Belga wall tile Bathroom
FINISH Charcoal Powder 2
CODE Belga Charcoal GL Porc 1006529 Laundry
SIZE 300 x 600 splashback
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WF06 Powder 1
DESCRIPTION Gigacer Krea wall tile (picture not
FINISH Green patchwork representative)
CODE Gigacer Krea Green patchwork Pattern C
SIZE 1200 x 1200
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturer's specifications.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE WFEX
DESCRIPTION EXISTING hard plaster wall.
FINISH
CODE Exsiting hard plaster to be patched and reqaired as required or
new to match existing.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE CF01
CEILINGS 4.3
DESCRIPTION Plasterboard with Paint finish

FINISH IPT02 Colour 'A' generally
CODE CSR 'Superceil' 10mm plasterboard.
SIZE 10mm
SETOUT Square set.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
14.08.17
REFERENCE CF02
DESCRIPTION Wet Area Plasterboard with Paint finish
CODE CSR 'Superceil' 10mm plasterboard.
SIZE 10mm
SETOUT Square set.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE CFEX
DESCRIPTION Existing Ceiling with Paint Finish.
CODE Existing ceiling to be retained and made good.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SKIRT EX To existing house
TRIM 4.4
DESCRIPTION EXISTING timber skirting. excluding wet

FINISH IPT03 Colour 'A' areas.
CODE Solid timber period skirting to be retained or new to match
existing.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SKIRT 01 To WF01 walls.
DESCRIPTION Flush Timber skirting Rumpus
FINISH IPT03 Colour 'A' Bed 3 & 4
CODE Flush timber skirting with Rondo P50 shadowline detail to Gym
plasterboard. Hall 2 & 3
SIZE 12mm thick 100mm high face
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE ARCHITRAVE EX Existing windows.
DESCRIPTION Existing architrave or new to match existing. Door Type
FINISH IPT03 Colour 'A' EX01&02.
CODE Existing solid timber period architrave retained or new to match Door Type 02.
existing.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE ARCHITRAVE 01 Door Type 01
DESCRIPTION Solid timber jamb.
FINISH IPT03 Colour 'A'
CODE 45mm thick solid timber jamb with 10mm rebate for door.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Square set plasterboard to jamb.
SETOUT Jamb to run floor to ceiling with no head and protrude 20mm
from face of wall.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
14.08.17
REFERENCE ARCHITRAVE 02 Aluminium
DESCRIPTION Square set. windows
CODE RONDO Square Set Angle.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE CORNICE EX Existing house
DESCRIPTION Existing plaster cornice or new to match existing refer RCP.
CODE Existing plaster cornice to be protected and made good. New
cornice to match existing.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE CORNICE 01
DESCRIPTION Square set.
CODE RONDO Square Set Angle.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE STAIR01
STAIRS & BALUSTRADES 4.5
DESCRIPTION Open riser timber clad steel stair.

FINISH EPT05 Colour 'C' Black & FF01
CODE Open riser solid timber treads to match FF01. Exposed steel
PFC with welded plate to toes to create box section stringer.
Concealed cleats to stringer and angle shoes chemset to 2
layers of brick wall. Joints fully welded and ground.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Refer engineer for stair structure.
SETOUT Refer drawings.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE BAL01
DESCRIPTION Toughened Glass
FINISH Glazing type 03.
CODE Steel tag bead fixed frameless glazing to PFC & handrail.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY To comply with AS1170.1, AS1288 & AS2208.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HR01
DESCRIPTION Steel Ribbon Handrail
FINISH EPT05 Colour 'D' Black
CODE 60 x 5mm EQ angle handrail & balustrade supports. Right angle
rod wall standoffs. As required and fit for purpose.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY To comply with AS1170.1
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
14.08.17
REFERENCE HR02
DESCRIPTION Stainless Steel Ribbon Pool Handrail
FINISH EPT05 Colour 'D' Black
CODE 50 x 10mm SC stainless steel pool handrail.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Contractor to ensure suitable for installation to pool.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY To comply with AS1170.1
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
14.08.17
C SCHEDULE 5 :
(
JOINERY
DESCRIPTION LOCATION IMAGE

REFERENCE JF01
JOINERY FINISHES 5.1
DESCRIPTION Melamine Carcass

FINISH Matt White
CODE Water resistant melamine on 18mm MDF substrate.
SIZE 18mm MDF.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Use for interiors of light joinery unless otherwise noted.
REFERENCE JF02
DESCRIPTION Moisture Resistant Melamine Carcass
FINISH Matt Black
CODE Water resistant melamine on 18mm MDF substrate. ABS edging
strips to door & drawer fronts, shelves & cupboards.
SIZE 18mm MDF.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Use for interiors of dark joinery unless otherwise noted.
REFERENCE JF03 BBQ Area
DESCRIPTION 2-Pack Fibre Cement Joinery.
FINISH Colour 'A' White matt 2-pack.
CODE Compressed fibre cement sheet. 2-Pack finish square edge.
SIZE 8mm minimum or as required to suit application.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JF04 Bed 3 & 4
DESCRIPTION Laminate with ABS edges.
FINISH Polar White'
CODE LAMINEX Laminate on Moisture resistant MDF substrate.
ABS edging strips to door & drawer fronts, shelves & cupboards.
Rolled bullnose edges to desks.
SIZE 18mm nom. As required for application.
INSTALLATION To manufacturer's specification.
SETOUT Joins to be reviewed by architect prior to installation.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JF05 Kitchen
DESCRIPTION 2-Pack Joinery. Butlers
FINISH Colour 'A' "Lexicon Half" matt 2-pack. Laundry
CODE Moisture resistant MDF sheet. 2-Pack finish square edge. Rumpus
SIZE 18mm. Kitchen, Butlers &
INSTALLATION Laundry Kickers
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JF06 Ensuite 1 (hers)
DESCRIPTION Pre-finished Timber veneer Ensuite 2 (his)
FINISH Acrylic polyurethane, durable coating Bathroom 2
CODE Lignapal VIBRANT OAK SILVER GREY 163.54 Powder 2
SIZE 18mm moisture resistant MDF Laminate size 3050m x 1220 Island bench
INSTALLATION Contractor to confirm suitabliity for installation to benchtop (north, east & west
surface. side)
SETOUT Butlers
ANCILLARY Fridge
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
05JOIN-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 23 of 68
REFERENCE JF07 Rumpus
DESCRIPTION Laminate Yosemite by Cleaf Study
FINISH Light Carbon Beds 3 & 4 desks
CODE CLEAF 'Yosemite' prebonded melamine on Moisture resistant
MDF substrate. Edging strips to door & drawer fronts, shelves &
cupboards. Laminate or stained solid timber to match Cleaf with
rolled bullnose edges to desks.
SIZE Sheet size: 2800mm x 2070. Edging 21mm x 1mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JF08 Study
DESCRIPTION Pin Board Beds 3 & 4 behind
FINISH Black Olive (charcoal) desks
CODE FORBO 'Bulletin Board' 2209
SIZE
SETOUT Refer Internals drawings for setout.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JF09
DESCRIPTION Aluminium Trim
FINISH Ext Paint 06. Colour to match window frames.
CODE Aluminium Coverplate with Powdercoat Finish.
SIZE 3mm.
INSTALLATION Surface preparation, fixing and finishing to manufacturer's
specification.
SETOUT Trim to finish flush to adjacent wall, floor & ceiling surfaces.
Refer internals drawings for setout.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JF10 WIR
DESCRIPTION Toughened glass shelf.
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SB01 Kitchen
BENCHES, SPLASHBACKS & MIRRORS 5.2
DESCRIPTION Tile Splashback Butlers

FINISH Bianco BBQ
CODE De Chirer Bianco Tile splashback.
SIZE 1200 x 1200
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER Urban Edge (Melanie)
REFERENCE SB02 Kitchen
DESCRIPTION Stone Benchtop Laundry
FINISH Raw Concrete Butlers
CODE Caeserstone CS 4004 Raw Concrete Powder 2
SIZE 20mm thick engineered stone. Bathroom
SETOUT Mitred Edges with 3mm Chamfer to Corners.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
B
REFERENCE SB03 BBQ Area

DESCRIPTION BBQ surround (outside)
FINISH Bianco
CODE De Chirer Bianco Tile BBQ bench & splashback.
SIZE 1200 x 1200
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturers specifications. Confirm suitability for
location prior to installation.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE MIRROR
DESCRIPTION Wall mirror
FINISH Wall Mirror
CODE Viridian 'Mirra' superclear silver back mirror.
SIZE As required.
INSTALLATION Fix to manufacturer's specification.
SETOUT Pencil edges. 1.5mm joints as per internal drawings. To be
reviewed by architect prior to installation.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE MIRR 1 Powder 1 4
DESCRIPTION Bathroom mirror Bathroom
FINISH Circular mirror with black aluminimum trim Ensuite 2
CODE Viridian 'Mirra' superclear silver back mirror with custom TRIM1
metal surround to suit.
SIZE 800 dia
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS SUPPLIED BY CLIENT - Allow storage & installation only.
REFERENCE MIRR 2 Ensuite 1 1
DESCRIPTION Bathroom mirror
FINISH Black
CODE
SIZE 900 dia
ANCILLARY To comply with AS 1288 & AS 2208.
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE JOINERY HANDLE 01 General
JOINERY HARDWARE 5.3
DESCRIPTION Finger Pull.

FINISH Integral / to match door finish.
CODE Square edge finger pull.
SIZE Height / Depth 20mm.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Top / Bottom Edge to Doors / Drawers as per joinery dwgs.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JOINERY HANDLE 02 Full height joinery
DESCRIPTION Tall Metal Lip Pull. doors
FINISH Colour 'A' White Powdercoat (to match door colour).
Colour 'D' Black Powdercoat (for timber or black doors)
CODE Stefano Orlati PESARO-ABS-1.250.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE JOINERY HANDLE 03 Drawers &
DESCRIPTION Metal Lip Pull. cabinets without
FINISH Colour 'A' White Powdercoat (to match door colour). finger pulls
Colour 'D' Black Powdercaot (for timber or black doors)
CODE HAFELE 115.98.001 HANDLE ST/ST BRUSHED 100x35mm
SIZE 20 x 35 x 100mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JOINERY HANDLE 04
DESCRIPTION DELETED
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE JOINERY HINGE General
DESCRIPTION
FINISH Stainless Steel.
CODE BLUM "clip top bluemotion" joinery hinges.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Installed to manufacturers recommendations.
SETOUT 2 no per door for doors up to 1000mm in height and set 100mm
from top and bottom of door. For doors over 1000mm in height
provide 4 no hinges per door leaf.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE DRAWER RUNNER General
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE BLUM Tandem full extension drawer runners with Blumotion.
SIZE As per Architectural Drawings
INSTALLATION As per manufacturers specifications.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS 50kg load capacity
REFERENCE SLIDING ROBE DOORS Laundry
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE 2700mm high top hung sliding door with no bottom track. Allow
20mm gap to top and bottom for ventilation.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturer's specification.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE DRAWER INSERT Kitchen
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE BLUM Cutlery drawer inserts as required.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT As per Architectural Drawings.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE PULL DOWN RAIL Laundry Drying.
JOINERY ACCESSORIES 5.4
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE Hafele Wardrobe rail 15kg 805.24.330 or approved.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturer's specification.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE ROBE RAIL Robes
DESCRIPTION Clothes Hanging Rail Mud Store
FINISH Chrome Drying
CODE Lincoln Sentry Oval Tube Rail Coats
SIZE Sized to suit robe joinery
INSTALLATION
SETOUT 975mm/1900mm Above FFL
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE KITCHEN BASKET Butlers 4
DESCRIPTION Kitchen pullout baskets
FINISH Stainless Steel.
CODE HAFELE Base unit internal extension, arena classic
SIZE cabinet width: 600 mm, bin size
(W x D x H): 527 x 488 x 125 mm to suit cupboard
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LAUNDRY BASKET Laundry 1
DESCRIPTION Pull Out Laundry Basket
FINISH White
CODE HIDEAWAY SCL160D-W 60l soft close pull out laundry basket
SIZE 418W x 650H x 519D
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TEATOWEL RAIL Kitchen 2
DESCRIPTION 2 arm pull out Tea towel Rack Butlers
FINISH Chrome
CODE Wilson and Bradley TR4502
SIZE 433 mm long
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WINE RACK Cellar
DESCRIPTION Steel wine rack
FINISH Powdercoat black.
CODE INDI wine racking insert to joinery above fridge. Custom
fabricate to suit size.
SIZE 790 x 990mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE JOINERY DOOR Vent Drying Cupboard 4
DESCRIPTION Joinery Door Vent
FINISH
CODE Allow gap to base and vent to top as required for airflow.
SIZE 20mm minimum to full width of door.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Drying Cupboard Doors
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS To suit drying cupboard doors
REFERENCE BINS Kitchen 1
DESCRIPTION Door mount waste bin with Blum runners.
FINISH
CODE HAFELE One2Five 2 x 32L 500mm
SIZE
INSTALLATION As Per Manufacturers specifications.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
SCHEDULE 6 :
SANITARY, APPLIANCES & ACCESSORIES

REFERENCE SINK 1 Kitchen 2
SANITARY 6.1
DESCRIPTION Single sink Butlers

FINISH Stainless steel
CODE Franke Largo - LAX 110-50/41
SIZE Bowl size 500 x 410 x 175 Cabinet cut out 600
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Undermount to benchtop
ANCILLARY Optional chopping board, strainer bowl and rollamat
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Mobile drainer included
REFERENCE LAUNDRY TROUGH Laundry 1
DESCRIPTION Undermount trough
FINISH 304 Stainless Steel
CODE AFA 'Flow' Single Undermount Bowl
SIZE 540W 440D 230H
SETOUT Undermount to Benchtop
ANCILLARY Include by pass kit and stainless waste basket.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE VANITY VB01 Ensuite 1 2
DESCRIPTION Counter top basin Powder 1
FINISH White stone
CODE APAISER 'Orbit' Above counter stone washbasin.
SIZE 395 Dia x 170H
INSTALLATION Sealed to countertop with waterproof sealant
SETOUT
ANCILLARY 32x40mm non-overflow Waste (not supplied)
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE VANITY VB02 Ensuite 2 3
DESCRIPTION Counter top basin Bathroom
FINISH White ceramic
CODE VITRA S-line 'S50' under counter washbasin
SIZE 530W 415D 185H
INSTALLATION Sealed to countertop with waterproof sealant
SETOUT
ANCILLARY 32x40mm non-overflow Waste (not supplied)
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE BATH Bathroom 1
DESCRIPTION Inset bath
FINISH White porcelain & steel
CODE KALDAWEI 'Puro' 1700 Bath 209343
SIZE 1700W x 750D x 420H
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Waste assembly supplied, 40mm
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Overflow
REFERENCE TOILET 1 Ensuite 1 4
DESCRIPTION Wall hung toilet with concealed cistern. Ensuite 2
FINISH White Powder 1
CODE CATALANO 'Sfera' Rimless Wall Hung Pan (Standard Seat) Bath
213431
SIZE Width: 350 mm Depth: 550 mm Height: 420 mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Arc soft close seat and invisi inwall cistern with forma pearl invisi
chrome button.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
06SANAPP-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 29 of 68
REFERENCE INWALL CISTERN Ensuite 1 4
DESCRIPTION In wall cistern with pushplate Ensuite 2
FINISH Matte black Powder 1
CODE PEAK Cistern & Button Bath
SIZE 236 x 152 x 91mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE OVEN 1 & 2 Kitchen 2
APPLIANCES 6.2
DESCRIPTION Wall Oven

FINISH CleanSteel
CODE MIELE, H6260BP, 76L 9-Function Pyrolytic Oven with
MoisturePlus
SIZE 595W x 595H x 570D
INSTALLATION Installation as per manufacturer's specifications.
SETOUT Integrated into joinery
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS With black 'classic' handle DS6000
REFERENCE COOKTOP Kitchen 1
DESCRIPTION Cooktop
FINISH Stainless Steel Frame
CODE MIELE, KM6388, 3-Zone PowerFlex Induction Cooktop.
SIZE 942W x 526D x 45H
INSTALLATION Installation as per manufacturer's specifications. Operation of
rangehood to be confirmed as suitable over induction cooktop
prior to order.
SETOUT Cutout rebate for flushmount.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE MICROWAVE Butlers 1
DESCRIPTION Microwave
FINISH
CODE Sharp carousel microwave.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Confirm shelf to fit microwave prior to manufacture.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE RANGEHOOD Kitchen 2
DESCRIPTION Exposed rangehood
FINISH Black
CODE Qasair Albany (Argyle range) D 400L1
SIZE 400DIA. Custom height, depending on ceiling
INSTALLATION Installation as per manufacturer's specifications. Operation of
rangehood to be confirmed as suitable over induction cooktop
prior to order.
SETOUT Ceiling mounted
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FRIDGE Kitchen 1
DESCRIPTION Fridge
FINISH
CODE SAMSUNG stainless steel fridge standalone frdige with
icemaker.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturers specification. Allow to be plumbed in.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
REFERENCE DISHWASHER Kitchen 1
DESCRIPTION Dishwasher.
FINISH Door front to match adjacent joinery.
CODE MIELE, G6160SCVi, Fully-Integrated dishwasher
SIZE 598W 570D 805H
INSTALLATION Installation as per manufacturer's specifications.
SETOUT Fully Integrated Into joinery. Float front panel over to form
fingerpull.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WASHING MACHINE Laundry 1
DESCRIPTION Washing machine
FINISH
CODE ELECTROLUX EWF1083 Time manager.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE CLOTHES DRYER Laundry 1
DESCRIPTION Stacked Tumble Dryer
FINISH
CODE ELECTROLUX EDV5051/6051
SIZE
INSTALLATION Allow ducting to outside air.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE BARBEQUE BBQ 1
DESCRIPTION Built in BBQ
FINISH
CODE BEEFEATER BSH156SANG SIG 6 Burner with Hood
SIZE 1053w x 540d x 212h
SETOUT Allow clearances & non-combustible surrounds as required.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TAPWARE 1 Ensuite 1 3
TAPWARE & DRAINS 6.3
DESCRIPTION Wall Mount Basin Mixer Ensuite 2 2

FINISH Matte black Powder 1 1
CODE Scala Wall Mixer 2261435 Bathroom 4
SIZE 40mm
SETOUT Wall Mounted for shower, basins & bath.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Basin Spout Powder 1 1
FINISH Matte black Bathroom 2
CODE Scala 25mm wall outlet curved 200mm
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TAPWARE 3 Bathroom 1
DESCRIPTION Bath / Basin Spout Ensuite 1 1
FINISH Matte black
CODE Scala 25mm Curved bath outlet 250mm
SIZE
INSTALLATION
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
DESCRIPTION Wall Mounted Showerhead Ensuite 2
FINISH Matte black Bathroom
CODE MIZU DRIFT SHOWER HEAD 200 with SHOWER ARM
SIZE 200DIA 350 shower arm
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TAPWARE 5 Kitchen 1
DESCRIPTION Laundry Mixer with pull out hose. Laundry 1
FINISH Black matte
CODE SUSSEX 'Scala' Pull out sink mixer 2262998
SIZE 465H x 245 x 54
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Bench Mounted
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TAPWARE 6 Butlers 1
DESCRIPTION Kitchen Mixer
FINISH Black matte
CODE SUSSEX 'Scala' Curved Sink Mixer Large 2261624
SIZE 330H x 215 x 45
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Bench Mounted
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TAPWARE 7 Butlers 1
DESCRIPTION Instant Boiling, Chilled and Sparkling water tap / unit.
FINISH Matte black.
CODE BILLI 'Eco' 906000 Boiling, Chilled, Filtered & Sparkling Water
Dispenser.
SIZE 340H 180W 500D underbench.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Bench Mounted. Allow for installation of unit under bench.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TAPWARE 8 Laundry 2
DESCRIPTION Washing Machine Wash Stops
FINISH Chrome
CODE ARCO Washing Machine Stops
SIZE
INSTALLATION
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Wall Mounted Rail Shower
FINISH Matte black
CODE SUSSEX 'Scala' Handshower Post Set 2262505
SIZE 220 x 25mm spout
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE FWG Wet Areas 4
DESCRIPTION Floor Drain
FINISH Stainless Steel
CODE MIZU 'Square Floor Waste' 9502500
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE TOWEL RAIL TR01 Ensuite 1 3
ACCESSORIES 6.4
DESCRIPTION Towel rail

FINISH Matte black
CODE KADO 'QUAD' 830 electric heated towel rail.
SIZE 830W x 40H x 100D
INSTALLATION
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Towel rail Ensuite 2 1
CODE Mili Glance Towel Rack Bath 1
SIZE 450mm
INSTALLATION
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Towel rail Bathroom 3
FINISH Matte black
CODE KADO 'QUAD' 830 non-heated towel rail.
SIZE 830W x 40H x 100D
INSTALLATION
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SOAP DISPENSER Kitchen 1
DESCRIPTION Bench Mount Soap Dispenser
FINISH Black
CODE FRANKE Soap Dispenser SD319
SIZE 100x45 ABOVE. 240x65 BELOW.
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturers spec.
SETOUT Bench Mount
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TOILET ROLL HOLDER Ensuite 1 1
DESCRIPTION Toilet Roll Holder Ensuite 2 1
CODE Milli Glance Toilet Roll Holder 9503884 Bath 1
SIZE 80D x 160L
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Wall / Joinery Mounted. Refer drawings.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
SCHEDULE 7 :
ELECTRICAL, LIGHTING & EQUIPMENT

REFERENCE LT01 General
LIGHTING 7.1
DESCRIPTION Recessed Downlight

FINISH White in white ceilings, black in other ceilings.
CODE LED Lighting Group 'Saturn' 90mm 3000K 10W LED.
SIZE 90mm cutout TBC.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LT02 Kitchen 2
DESCRIPTION Trimless Downlight
FINISH Black on black.
CODE MAGIC BOX SR-EY60-2-BK PHASE DIM. 12W 1400lm 3000K
Trimless directional recessed double downlight.
SIZE 139W x 293L x 150H
INSTALLATION Metal box surround with magentic insert as per LPA spec.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LT03 Living & Stair 2
DESCRIPTION Wall Light VOID
FINISH White.
CODE LOGAN SURFACE MOUNT SS-CC10-B PHASE DIM.
13W 1300lm 3000K Wall mounted directional spot light.
SIZE 183H x 80dia
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Exact position to be confirmed on site. Position to allow 'art wall'
lighting, stair lighting or uplight to void.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LT04 STAIR 3
DESCRIPTION Recessed Step Light
FINISH Black
CODE PLATEK 'SPY' SMALL GLASS BLACK SANDBLASTED
3000K 2W.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Mount recessed flush to face brick wall.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LT05 Overhead cpbds
DESCRIPTION LED strip light Desks
FINISH
CODE LPA-FLS5050-WW 4.8W/14.4W LEDSTRIP W HIGH REC
PROFILE FROSTED LENS ACCS INC
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT All LED strip lights to bathrooms to be installed on a sensor and
switch.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LT06 TBC
DESCRIPTION Fluorescent batten light.
FINISH White.
CODE LPA LED BATTEN 1200mm 15W 1550LM Surface mount
fluorescent batten light with diffuser.
SIZE 1200mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
07ELEC-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 34 of 68
REFERENCE LT07 LT07a - Dining 2
DESCRIPTION Feature Pendant Lights LT07b - Living 1
FINISH LT07c - DELETED 0
CODE REFER PC SUM LT07d - Master 2
SIZE LT07e - Ensuite 1 1
INSTALLATION LT07f - Hall 2
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Fittings as per PC sum - Allow storage & installation only.
REFERENCE LT08 9
DESCRIPTION External Surface mount directional spot light
FINISH Black.
CODE SHOOT surface mount external surface spot light 8W LED.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Provide Sensor where noted with "S" on Lighting Plan.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LT09
DESCRIPTION DELETED
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LT10 Rear Garden 13
DESCRIPTION External Garden Stake Light Front Garden 8
FINISH
CODE REFER PC SUM
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Fittings as per PC sum - Allow storage & installation only.
REFERENCE LT11 Pool 7
DESCRIPTION Pool Light
FINISH
CODE SPA Electrics LED niche light. Inc Transformers.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Refer pool specification in appendix.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SW01 General
COMMS & SECURITY 7.2
DESCRIPTION Gang Light Switch - Wall Mounted

FINISH White Plastic
CODE HAGER 'Silhouette' series Switches
SIZE 116 x 76 x 4mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS No. of Gangs on Light Switch Wall Plate(s) with dimmer controls
as per electrical plans. To be confirmed prior to installation.
11.08.17
ELECTRICAL, TV,
DESCRIPTION General Power Outlet (GPO) - Wall Mounted

CODE HAGER 'Silhouette' series GPO
SIZE 116 x 75 x 4mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION COMMS GANG PLATE
CODE HAGER 'Silhouette' series
SIZE 75x116x4mm
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Autoswitches weather protected socket outlet
FINISH "White"
CODE CLIPSAL 15A IP34 415VF15
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SW05 Bedroom 1-4 4
DESCRIPTION USB Switchplate
FINISH
CODE HAGER 'Silhouette' series
SIZE
INSTALLATION Mount to GPO's & switchplates.
Custom mount into bedside table or fabric panel TBC.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SMOKE DETECTOR General
DESCRIPTION Ceiling Mounted Smoke Detector
FINISH
CODE FIRETRONICS Flush Smoke Detector 12-24V DC Hard Wired
and interlinked with Battery backup to Comply with AS 3786.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Contractor to confirm compliant locations prior to installation.
11.08.17
REFERENCE ELECTRICAL
DESCRIPTION Electrical switchboard and connections as required.
FINISH
CODE New Enclosure, Circuit Breakers, Residual Current Devices.
3 Phase Meter panel, mains cable and Main earth.
Relocate Meter to front fence with new enclosure as required,
paint enclosure to match fence.
Inspection and Prescribed COES.
Underground location of Gym Sub-Board.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Feeds to all electrical equipment including lighting, irrigation
system, all appliances, pool sub board, HVAC, HWS, remote
door, and electric strike gates.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Confirm relocation of Meter, 3 phase mains cable and main
earth.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HOME NETWORK CABLING
DESCRIPTION Equipment & Cabling for telephone, data
FINISH
CODE Data Cabinet (power rails, patch panels, switch & shelving)
CAT6E cabling including terminations, setup of data network,
patching and WAP configuration.
SW03 for points. Refer Electrical Specification.
7 x DATA POINTS
1 x CENTRAL DATA / AV HUB HALL2 CUPBOARD
4 x UNIFI WIFI ACCESS POINTS
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Contractor to allow for all chasing, trenching, supply &
installation of fittings and trimless fittings, appliances, ducting
and controls as required, temp. site power and lighting.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TV CABLING
DESCRIPTION FTA TV, PAYTV, and associated cabling and equipment.
FINISH
CODE Optical & HDMI Cabling as required.
Lead in cabling, NBN provision, FTA distribution.
5 x FTA TV Stations including
10 x Cat6E cabling (2 per tv point).
5 x Cat6E cabling (1 per TV point fitted off for PayTV)
1 x Antenna
1 x Remote locate Foxtel boxes
1 x HDMI over Cat6E kits including IR
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM EXACT FINAL LOCATIONS
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SECURITY SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION House Security & Alarm System
FINISH
CODE 1 x HILLS RELIANCE SECURITY SYSTEM
INCL. COMMNAV, ENCLOSURE AND BATTERY BACKUP
2 x NEVRAS LED TOUCH SCREEN ALARM KEYPADS
8 x PIR SENSORS PET FRIENDLY
2 x INTERNAL SCREAMERS
1 x EXTERNAL COMBINATION SIREN & STROBE
2 x REMOTE CONTROL
SIZE
INSTALLATION
11.08.17
SETOUT Sensor & keypad locations shown indicatively on RCP &
Electrical Plan. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM EXACT FINAL
LOCATIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE ACCESS CONTROL Front Gate GT02 11
DESCRIPTION Access control system Hall 2 DGF03
FINISH
CODE PIN CODE ACCESS TO DGF-03 & GT02.
ELECTRIC STRIKE CONNECTED TO INTERCOM AT FRONT
GATE. REMOTE OPEN TO DRIVEWAY GATE.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Sensor & keypad locations shown indicatively on RCP &
Electrical Plan. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM EXACT FINAL
LOCATIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE INTERCOM SYSTEM Front Gate
DESCRIPTION Intercom System Hall 2
FINISH Rumpus
CODE 1 x AIPHONE FRONT GATE STATION WITH CALL BELL AND
VIDEO CAMERA INTEGRATED TO LETTERBOX
1 x INTERNAL AIPHONE COLOUR MONITOR STATIONS AT
HALL 2
1 x CONCEALED GATE OPENER AT ENTRY
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM EXACT FINAL LOCATIONS
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE AUDIO Zones:
DESCRIPTION Wiring, installation & commissioning of SONOS systems, built 1.Media
inspeakers, surround sound equipment and cabling. Installation 2.Dining
& wiring of AV equipment. 3.Terrace
FINISH 4.Rumpus
CODE 1. Media - 5.1 Surround inc. portable sonos speakers & sub
Client supply of:
- SONOS ZP90 preamp
- bridge
- Denon Amp
- 5.1 speakers freestanding.
Contractor to allow for wiring, installation and commissioning
of system and speakers. Contractor to confirm client supplied
system is fit for purpose and as per allowance for installation.
2. Dining - Contractor supply:
- 2 x Niles CM8PR In ceiling Speakers.
- 1 x sonos connect amp.
3. Terrace - Client supply of 1 x portable sonos system.
4. Rumpus - Client supply of 1 x portable sonos system.
SIZE
INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM EXACT FINAL LOCATIONS
SETOUT
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE DUCTED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
7.3
DESCRIPTION Ducted Air Conditioning System with 2 x ducted fan coil units, 4
bulkhead fan coil units & 1 x outdoor condenser. Reverse cycle
heating & cooling.
FINISH
MECHANICAL, HYDRAULIC & VENTILATION
CODE Equipment to meet the required cooling and heating capacity

and achieve an indoor design temperature of 21°C during winter
and 22°C during summer months.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Size, spec. & position to be confirmed by mech contractor.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS As per Air Conditioning Specification.
Contractor to allow all associated works including but not
limited to power supply to equipment, mounting of external
equipment, trimming of diffusers.
REFERENCE FAN COIL UNIT 01 Master 1
DESCRIPTION Reverse Cycle Ducted Fan coil unit. Media
FINISH Bed 2
CODE SAMSUNG AC0160 to be confirmed as suitable by mech Study
contractor.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Supply GRILLE 01 to rooms & return air GRILLE 01 flangeless
bar grille to Hall 1. Size & position of supply & return air grilles to
be confirmed by mech contractor.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
REFERENCE FAN COIL UNIT 02 Living 1
DESCRIPTION Reverse Cycle Ducted Fan coil unit. Dining
FINISH Kitchen
CODE SAMSUNG AC0140 to be confirmed as suitable by mech
contractor.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Supply GRILLE 01 flangeless bar grille to kitchen bulkhead &
living room bulkhead. Return GRILLE 01 to Hall 2 wall. Size &
position of supply & return air grilles to be confirmed by mech
contractor.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE FAN COIL UNIT 03 & 04 Rumpus 2
DESCRIPTION Reverse Cycle Bulkhead Fan coil unit.
FINISH
CODE SAMSUNG AM035 to be confirmed as suitable by mech
contractor.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Supply & return GRILLE 01 to top of joinery. Size & position of
supply & return air grilles to be confirmed by mech contractor.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE FAN COIL UNIT 05 Bed 3 1
FINISH
contractor.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE FAN COIL UNIT 06 Bed 4 1
FINISH
contractor.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
REFERENCE GRILLE TYPE 01
DESCRIPTION Supply, return & exhaust air grille diffuser.
FINISH Powdercoat to match ceiling / wall colour.
CODE Holyoake LD Series Flangeless Linear Bar Diffuser
SIZE
INSTALLATION To Manufacturers Specifications
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE GRILLE TYPE 02
DESCRIPTION Circular ceiling diffuser.
FINISH Powdercoat to match ceiling colour.
CODE HOLYOAKE OD10 circular diffuser.
SIZE
INSTALLATION To Manufacturers Specifications
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE HYDRONIC BOILER
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE 2 x RADIANT 30kW gas fired boilers including insulation to lines,
control and lockshield valves, backflow prevention, insulation
valves, flow and return manifold, control wiring and
commissioning of system.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HYDRONIC PANELS & INSLAB HEATING
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE Inslab heating to ground floor slab (excluding gym & ensuite 2)
and 9 x Korado compact panels with with flow and return
heating lines 7-day programmable thermostat, insulation to
lines, control and lockshield valves, backflow prevention,
insulation valves, flow and return manifold, control wiring and
commissioning of system.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Mechanical contractor to confirm sizing and location of all
panels and inslab heating loops prior to roughing in.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HEATED TOWEL RAILS Ensuite 1 only
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE Refer 6.4 Sanitary Accessories Specification
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE IN FLOOR HEATING Ensuite 1 2
DESCRIPTION Under Tile heating matt with thermostat Bathroom
FINISH
CODE DEVIMAT DSVF 150 with Devi Reg 330 140F1072 Temperature
Control.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE RADIANT HEATER Outdoor Dining 1
DESCRIPTION Ceiling Mounted Radiant Heater Panels
FINISH Stainless Steel
CODE HeatStrip THH 2400
SIZE 1330L x 172W x 45H
INSTALLATION Extension mounts 300mm to underside of ceiling. Install to
manufacturer's spec.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HEAT PANEL 01 Drying Cupb'd
DESCRIPTION Electronic Radiant Heat Panel
FINISH White
CODE Nobo E Series Slimline Radiant Heat Panel E4E05 / 7
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Location as per plan.
ANCILLARY Timer switch to laundry panel.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HOT WATER SERVICE
DESCRIPTION Hot Water System
FINISH
CODE Contactor nominated system: Thermann Solar 6” Kit TG-250-Gl-
26n-22 Evacuated Tube Solar Gas Boosted Hot Water System
with storage tank & solar heater.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Install to manufacturers specification. Contractor / plumber to
select and nominate suitable system, and locations including
distance to fixtures.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS To be confirmed with architect prior to order.
REFERENCE EXISTING FIREPLACES
DESCRIPTION EXISTING Built-in wood burning Fireplaces
FINISH IPT03 'C' Charcoal
CODE New bluestone hearths. Install weather seals as required by
energy report. Paint mantles. Refer Maintenance schedule.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Powder room fireplace to be closed up and sealed.
Mantle to be relocated to Bed 2.
New timber period mantle to Bed 1.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY Installation strictly to manufacturers specification.
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE FIREPLACE 01 Living
DESCRIPTION Gas Fireplace
FINISH Logs or charcoal burner to be confirmed prior to order.
CODE JETMASTER 'Horizon Cantilever' 700 Zero clearance
installation.
SIZE
INSTALLATION Install strictly to manufacturers specification. Include twin skin
6.6m flue and gas cowl powdercoat black to external with
support brackets as required.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE EXHAUST FAN Laundry 5
DESCRIPTION Exhaust Fan & Cowl Master Ens
FINISH 4 x GRILLE 01 ceiling diffuser to ceiling or bulkhead & 1 x Powder 1
GRILLE 02 to ceiling. 6 x external roof mounted fans. Size & Bath
position to be confirmed by mech contractor. Ens 2
CODE FanTech Roof Mounted Exhaust Fan & Cowl
SIZE
INSTALLATION Exhaust Fan to be ducted to outside air.
SETOUT Electrical/Mechanical Contractor to confirm Airflow requirements
based on volume of each room and sufficient to clear mirror.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE TV BRACKET Media 1
7.4
DESCRIPTION TV bracket supply & installation, inlcuding installation of TV's. Bed 1 1

TV's supplied by client. Bed 2 1
Gym 1
FINISH
EQUIPMENT
CODE 1 x wall mount tv brackets

2 x wall mount swivel tv brackets
1 x install of client supply wall mount multi-direction bracket
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE POOL
DESCRIPTION Pool Filtration / Pumps / Heating
FINISH
CODE Supply of Pool Equipment as follows:
7 x Spa Electrics LED Single Colour Wet Niche' lights.
Astral P600 energy efficient pool pump.
Astral CA 400 sand filter.
Viron EQ 25 self testing and dosing PH & salt chlorination
system.
Waterco Skimmer Box, 50mm suction line and 2 x 50mm solar
suctions.
2 x pool returns and 1 x solar return.
Automatic water leveler.
Sunlover 100% coverage digitally controlled solar heating
system mounted to the Metal Deck Roof.
Paramount Cyclean in-floor cleaning.
SIZE
INSTALLATION All pool filtration supply lines will be run in 50mm plumbing. All
pipe work below concrete will be of Class 12 type. Prior to
concrete placement all lines will be tested to 200KPA and held
under water pressure.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER Laguna Pools
REMARKS Refer Laguna specification in Appendix
11.08.17
REFERENCE FUTURE PV SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE Include wiring as required to allow installation of future solar
PV system to roof and inverter installation to service area.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE AUDIO EQUIPMENT Zones:
DESCRIPTION Supply of audio equipment. 1.Media
FINISH 2.Dining
CODE 1. Media - 5.1 Surround inc. speakers & sub 3.Terrace
Client supply of: 4.Rumpus
- SONOS ZP90 preamp
- bridge
- Denon Amp
- 5.1 speakers freestanding.
Contractor to allow for wiring, installation and commissioning
of system and speakers. Contractor to confirm client supplied
system is fit for purpose and as per allowance for installation.
2. Dining - Contractor supply:
- 2 x Niles CM8PR In ceiling Speakers.
- 1 x sonos connect amp.
3. Terrace - Client supply of 1 x portable sonos system.
4. Rumpus - Client supply of 1 x portable sonos system.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
SCHEDULE 8 :
WINDOWS & DOORS

REFERENCE GLAZING TYPE 01 General
GLAZING 8.1
DESCRIPTION Double Glazing

FINISH Clear
CODE 6mm Clear / 12mm AIR GAP / 6mm Clear
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE GLAZING TYPE 02 Sashless
DESCRIPTION Double Glazing
FINISH Clear
CODE 4mm Clear / 8mm AIR GAP / 4mm Clear
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE GLAZING TYPE 03 Balustrades,
DESCRIPTION Clear Frameless Glazing inernal glazing,
FINISH Clear pool fences, and
CODE Toughened Grade A Safety Glass. shower screens.
SIZE As required for application.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Refer drawings for balustrades, pool fences, and shower
screens.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS To comply with AS 1170.1, AS 1288 & AS 2208.
Pool fences to comply with AS 1926.1-2012.
REFERENCE PET DOOR
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
CODE Large lockable secure pet door for glazed door DGF-03.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WINDOW TYPE 01
WINDOWS 8.2
DESCRIPTION Double glazed aluminium fixed window.

FINISH EPT06 'D'
CODE ALSPEC ecoFRAMEplus Centre Pocket Fixed Aluminium
Window System
SIZE 101.6mm x 50mm Frame
INSTALLATION For use with Glazing Type 01
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS U Value 3.5 SHGC 0.64
To comply with AS 1288 & AS 2208.
DESCRIPTION Sashless double hung double glazed window.
FINISH EPT06 'D'
CODE Austview sashless double hung double glazed sash in ALPSEC
ecoFRAMEplus frame window system.
INSTALLATION For use with glazing type 02
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
08WINDOOR-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 45 of 68
DESCRIPTION Double glazed aluminium awning window.
FINISH EPT06 'D'
CODE ALSPEC 'Protilt' Double glazed awning sash in ecoFRAMEplus
frame window system.
SETOUT Limit opening to 100mm to pool enclosure to comply with
AS1926.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
DESCRIPTION Double glazed aluminium sliding door system.
FINISH EPT06 'D'
CODE ALSPEC 'Proglide' Double glazed sliding door system.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
DESCRIPTION Single glazed channel fixed window system.
FINISH EPT06 'D'
CODE Frameless glazing channel.
SIZE 60mm x 30mm Frame
INSTALLATION For use with Glazing Type 03
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE SKYLIGHT 01
SKYLIGHTS 8.3
DESCRIPTION DELETED
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SKYLIGHT 02 Ensuite 1
DESCRIPTION Fixed skylight.
FINISH EPT06 COLOUR 'C' (charcoal)
CODE Velux Flat Roof Skylight FCM2234
SIZE 665mm x 970mm frame size.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Install to existing slate roof.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE SKYLIGHT 03 Powder
DESCRIPTION Fixed skylight.
FINISH EPT06 COLOUR 'C' (charcoal)
CODE Velux Flat Roof Skylight FCM2234
SIZE 665mm x 970mm frame size.
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Install to existing slate roof.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
11.08.17
REFERENCE DOOR TYPE 01
DOORS 8.4
DESCRIPTION Solid Core Door.

FINISH IPT03 COLOUR 'A' (white)
CODE
SIZE 40mm.
INSTALLATION Door Hardware as per Door Schedule
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Solid Timber Door to match existing.
CODE
SIZE 40mm.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Internal Top Hung Timber Sliding Door.
CODE BRIO Straight Sliding Top Hung Zero Clearance. Solid Core
door with concealed track and hangers to suit door weight.
SIZE 40mm.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Aluminium Swing/Hinge Door
FINISH EPT06 COLOUR 'D' (black) Glazing Type 01
CODE ALSPEC 'Torrens' Swing/Hinge Commercial Door.
SIZE 100 x 50mm Frame.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
DESCRIPTION DELETED
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE DOOR TYPE EX01
DESCRIPTION Existing Solid Timber Door with new glass lead light.
FINISH IPT03 COLOUR 'C'
CODE Existing front door including new coloured glass headlight &
sidelight and door hardware. Door, door surround, and letterbox
to be retained, protected and made good.
SIZE 40mm.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE DOOR TYPE EX02
DESCRIPTION Solid Timber Door.
FINISH IPT03 COLOUR 'A'
CODE Existing Door & door surround to be made good or new to
match existing.
SIZE 40mm.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HANDLE 01
HANDLES 8.5
DESCRIPTION PRISMA Lever Handle

FINISH EPT06 'D' Powdercoat Black to match window frames.
CODE Prisma set R10 SC - Refer Door Hardware Specification
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HANDLE 02
DESCRIPTION Round Flush Pull
CODE Round flush pull privacy kit inc. SP51 & 2801
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HANDLE 03
DESCRIPTION Aluminium Angle Door Pull
CODE Full height aluminium angle pull handle to sliding glazed doors.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER Window Fabricator
REMARKS
REFERENCE HANDLE EX
DESCRIPTION DELETED
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE HINGE 01
HINGES & OPENERS 8.6
DESCRIPTION Standard Door Hinge

FINISH Satin Stainless
CODE H100-FP-SSS 100x75 Fixed Pin Button tip Hinge SSS
SIZE
INSTALLATION Number of hinges as required for size and weight of door.
Minimum 3 x hinges.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HINGE 02
DESCRIPTION Liftoff Door Hinge
FINISH Satin Stainless
CODE H300-L/RH-SSS 100x75 Lift Off Hinge SSS
SIZE
INSTALLATION Number of hinges as required for size and weight of door.
Minimum 3 x hinges.
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE HINGE 03
DESCRIPTION Gate Hinges
FINISH Stainless
CODE Standard Duty Gate Barrel hinges with gates generally with
heavy duty barrel hinges as required for automatic gate.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE TRACK 01
DESCRIPTION Concealed sliding track.
FINISH
CODE BRIO Straight Sliding Top Hung Zero Clearance. Solid Core
door with concealed track and hangers to suit door weight.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE DOORSTOP
DESCRIPTION Wall/Floor mounted doorstop.
CODE Magnetic stops to wall or floor for all swing doors.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT Location to be confirmed with architects prior to installation.
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE LOCKSET EX
LOCKSETS 8.7
DESCRIPTION DELETED
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE LOCKSET 01
DESCRIPTION Internal Passage set.
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION External dead latch mortice lock.
FINISH
CODE External dead latch mortice lock with nightlatch.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION External dead latch sliding mortice lock.
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION External dead latch mortice lock with electronic strike.
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Internal privacy lock.
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Internal sliding privacy lock.
FINISH
CODE Refer Handle 02
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE WINDOW LOCKSET All windows
DESCRIPTION Mini Push window lock. except WGF05
FINISH Black to match frames.
CODE Whitco High security CYL4® compact window lock.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE FLYSCREEN To all opening
FLYSCREENS & BLINDS 8.8
DESCRIPTION Powdercoated Mesh. windows.

FINISH Finish to match window colour.
CODE Fixed Flyscreens in powdercoated aluminium frames in colour
to match window frames.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE DOG DOOR
DESCRIPTION
FINISH White Surround
CODE Haquna Pets Large Super Tough Door
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE BLIND 01
DESCRIPTION Roller Blind
FINISH
CODE Blockout roller blind.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Refer Window Furnishing Specifciation
REFERENCE BLIND 02
DESCRIPTION DELETED
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE BLIND 03
DESCRIPTION Curtain
FINISH
CODE Blockout / Sheer Curtain.
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Refer Window Furnishing Specifciation
REFERENCE BLIND 04
DESCRIPTION DELETED
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
SCHEDULE 9 :
APPLIED FINISHES
DESCRIPTION LOCATION QTY PC/PS

REFERENCE COLOUR 'A' White
9.1
DESCRIPTION DULUX 'Lexicon Half'

COLORBOND 'SurfMist'
FINISH
COLOURS
REFERENCE COLOUR 'B' Grey

DESCRIPTION DULUX 'Stepney' PG2C4
FINISH
REFERENCE COLOUR 'C' Charcoal
DESCRIPTION DULUX 'Monument'
COLORBOND 'Monument'
FINISH
REFERENCE COLOUR 'D' Black
DESCRIPTION COLORBOND 'NightSky'
DULUX 'Black'
FINISH
REFERENCE EXTERNAL PAINT TYPE - EPT01 TBC
EXTERIOR PAINT 9.2
DESCRIPTION External Paint.

FINISH Matt Acrylic
CODE DULUX "Weathershield"
SIZE
INSTALLATION Applied to Manufacturers Specifications
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE EXTERNAL PAINT TYPE - EPT02 General
DESCRIPTION Soffit Paint.
FINISH Matt Acrylic
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Timber Trim, Window & Doors Paint.
FINISH Semi-Gloss Acrylic
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE EXTERNAL PAINT TYPE - EPT04 FC01 / FC02
DESCRIPTION Fence Paint.
FINISH Matt Acrylic
CODE DULUX "Weathershield" Spray Finish.
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
09APPFIN-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 52 of 68
DESCRIPTION Steel Paint.
FINISH Satin
CODE WATTYL "Killrust" Satin Enamel Topcoat with Heavy Duty
Primer.
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
DESCRIPTION Powdercoat.
FINISH Satin
CODE DULUX "Duratec" Powdercoat
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE INTERNAL PAINT TYPE - IPT01 Plasterboard &
INTERIOR PAINT 9.3
DESCRIPTION Paint finish to internal plaster walls Hard-plaster Walls

FINISH Low Sheen
CODE DULUX "Wash & Wear"
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE INTERNAL PAINT TYPE - IPT02 Ceilings
DESCRIPTION Paint finish to internal plasterboard ceilings
FINISH White Matte
CODE DULUX "Professional Flat Ceiling"
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE INTERNAL PAINT TYPE - IPT03 Trim
DESCRIPTION Paint finish to internal timber trim.
FINISH Semi-Gloss
CODE DULUX "Aquanamel" Spray Finish
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE INTERNAL PAINT TYPE - IPT04 Joinery
DESCRIPTION Two Pack Paint finish to Joinery.
FINISH
CODE
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
REFERENCE SEALANT TYPE 01 Stone
SEALANTS & POWDERCOATS 9.4
DESCRIPTION Internal/External Stone Tile Penetrating Sealer

FINISH Clear
CODE Lithofin MN Stain Stop Waterbased Impregnating Sealant
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS Applied to Manufacturers Specifications
REFERENCE SEALANT TYPE 02
DESCRIPTION Wet Look Sealer
FINISH
CODE Crommelin Wet Look Sealer
SIZE
INSTALLATION
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
REFERENCE SEALANT TYPE 03 Pool Area Glazing
DESCRIPTION Protective Coating for Glazing Shower Screens
FINISH Clear
CODE EnduroShield for glass
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE SEALANT TYPE 04 External Timber
DESCRIPTION Protective Timber Sealant
FINISH Clear
CODE Cutek Extreme Oil
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REFERENCE SEALANT TYPE 05 Decking
DESCRIPTION Decking Oil
FINISH TBC
CODE CUTEK CD50 Natural Decking Oil Finish to all timber decking
boards.
SIZE
SETOUT
ANCILLARY
SUPPLIER
REMARKS
11.08.17
SCHEDULE 10 :
PRIME COSTS & PROVISIONAL SUMS

REFERENCE LIGHTS
PRIME COSTS 10.0
PC AMOUNT $ 6,260.00
REMARKS Pendant lights LT07a-f. (8 total)
External Garden Stake Lights (21 total)
The Provisional sum is for the fitting only including delivery.
Contractor is allow for wiring, installation, taking delivery,
storage and all associated works.
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
FINISH
REFERENCE HEADWORKS
PROVISIONAL SUMS 10.1
PS AMOUNT $ 5,000.00
REMARKS for the Supply & Installation of all headworks items relating to
the following:
- Electrical connection including Meter (relocation of existing
meter to front fence is included in fixed price).
- Confirm existing water connection including Meter.
- Confirm existing gas connection including tapping.
- Stormwater connection to Legal Point of Discharge.
- Confirm or relocate existing sewer connection & boundary
trap.
- PayTV, Comms and Internet connection.
REFERENCE SOFT LANDSCAPING

PS AMOUNT $ 10,000.00
REMARKS Soft landscaping includes turf, top soil, planting, irrigation, and
all associated works. All hardscaping to be included in contract
price, including all fencing, bulk & detail excavation, retaining
walls, paving, stairs, garden steppers, and lighting.
REFERENCE HARD PLASTER

REMARKS The provisional sum does not include and the contractor is to
allow for general bog, patch, sand and make good to walls as
required ready for painting.
The provisional sum allows for 40sqm of hard plaster to existing
walls at a rate of $70/sqm.
REFERENCE LEVEL & RESTUMP FLOORS
REMARKS The provisional sum does not include and the contractor is to
allow for general floor leveling due to settlement and prior
damage.
The provisional sum allows to level & restump existing floors at a
rate of $170/sqm.
14.08.17
10PCSUMS-1639_CD_MaterialSpecification.xls Page 1 of 1
SPECIFICATION APPENDICES
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION 11: APPENDICES
11.01 TITLE DOCUMENTS
11.08.17
Imaged Document Cover Sheet
The document following this cover sheet is an imaged document supplied by LANDATA®,
Land Victoria.
Document Type plan

Document Identification LP002918
Number of Pages 4
(excluding this cover sheet)
Document Assembled 20/12/2016 11:00
Copyright and disclaimer notice:

© State of Victoria. This publication is copyright. No part may be reproduced by any process except
in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright Act and for the purposes of Section 32 of the Sale
of Land Act 1962 or pursuant to a written agreement. The information is only valid at the time and in
the form obtained from the LANDATA® System. The State of Victoria accepts no responsibility for
any subsequent release, publication or reproduction of the information.
The document is invalid if this cover sheet is removed or altered.

Land Victoria.
Document Type instrument

Document Identification AN238099Q
Number of Pages 1


Land Victoria.

Document Identification AN192832R
Number of Pages 3


Land Victoria.

Document Identification H312652
Number of Pages 2


Copyright State of Victoria. This publication is copyright. No part may be reproduced by any process except in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright
Act 1968 (Cth) and for the purposes of Section 32 of the Sale of Land Act 1962 (Vic) or pursuant to a written agreement. The information is only valid at the time
and in the form obtained from the LANDATA REGD TM System. The State of Victoria accepts no responsibility for any subsequent release, publication or
reproduction of the information.
REGISTER SEARCH STATEMENT (Title Search) Transfer of Page 1 of 2

Land Act 1958
VOLUME 02684 FOLIO 701 Security no : 124063842666C
Produced 20/12/2016 10:58 am
LAND DESCRIPTION
Lot 179 on Plan of Subdivision 002918.
PARENT TITLE Volume 02427 Folio 216
Created by instrument H312652 21/11/1978
REGISTERED PROPRIETOR
Estate Fee Simple
Sole Proprietor
GLENDARG NOMINEES PTY LTD of 176 UPPER HEIDELBERG ROAD IVANHOE
H312652 21/11/1978
ENCUMBRANCES, CAVEATS AND NOTICES

MORTGAGE AN192832R 19/10/2016
CENTRAL VICTORIAN INVESTMENTS LTD
CAVEAT AN238099Q 03/11/2016

Caveator
NIKKI MELTZER
Grounds of Claim
AGREEMENT WITH THE FOLLOWING PARTIES AND DATE.
Parties
THE REGISTERED PROPRIETOR(S)
Date
22/10/2016
Estate or Interest
FREEHOLD ESTATE
Prohibition
ABSOLUTELY
Lodged by
WOLSKI S & CO
Notices to
S. WOLSKI & CO. of 3 GLENDEARG GROVE MALVERN VIC 3144
Any encumbrances created by Section 98 Transfer of Land Act 1958 or Section

24 Subdivision Act 1988 and any other encumbrances shown or entered on the
plan or imaged folio set out under DIAGRAM LOCATION below.
DIAGRAM LOCATION
SEE LP002918 FOR FURTHER DETAILS AND BOUNDARIES
ACTIVITY IN THE LAST 125 DAYS
NUMBER STATUS DATE

AN152184C DISCHARGE OF MORTGAGE Registered 05/10/2016
AN192832R MORTGAGE Registered 19/10/2016
AN238099Q CAVEAT Registered 03/11/2016
------------------------END OF REGISTER SEARCH STATEMENT------------------------
Additional information: (not part of the Register Search Statement)
Street Address: 3 GLENDEARG GROVE MALVERN VIC 3144
Title 2684/701 Page 1 of 2

Copyright State of Victoria. This publication is copyright. No part may be reproduced by any process except in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright
Act 1968 (Cth) and for the purposes of Section 32 of the Sale of Land Act 1962 (Vic) or pursuant to a written agreement. The information is only valid at the time
and in the form obtained from the LANDATA REGD TM System. The State of Victoria accepts no responsibility for any subsequent release, publication or
reproduction of the information.
REGISTER SEARCH STATEMENT (Title Search) Transfer of Page 2 of 2

Land Act 1958
DOCUMENT END
Title 2684/701 Page 2 of 2

11.02 LAND SURVEY
11.08.17
11.03 LEGAL POINT OF DISCHARGE
11.08.17
Our Ref: BC0195/17
23 March 2017
Keith Long & Associates

Suite17, 2 Bromham Place
RICHMOND VIC 3121
Dear Sir/Madam,
Re: 3 Glendearg Grove MALVERN VIC 3144

Building Regulation 610(2)
Location for Stormwater Discharge Point
I refer to the building permit application/building design provided to Council for its report with relation
to the above.
PROPERTY SUBJECT TO FLOODING
The property is as per Regulation 802 of the Building Regulations 2006.
LEGAL POINT OF DISCHARGE
It is noted that no building plans or specific details of the proposed development have been submitted
with the application for the legal point of discharge.
The legal point of discharge for the property is the kerb and channel of Glendearg Grove as shown
on the attached plan .
RECOMMENDATIONS
The Relevant Building Surveyor must ensure compliance with these recommendations. Council consent for the
point of discharge is subject to compliance with the following conditions:
1. The suitability, location and level of the specified legal point of discharge must be checked and confirmed
prior to the design of the stormwater layout and prior to the commencement of any drainage works.
2. Any existing connection to the specified point of discharge may be utilised only if that drain is checked
and proven to be in good order and of adequate capacity.
3. Any new outlet into the street kerb and channel must be at least 500mm clear of any new or existing
crossing. The outlet must also be at least 2.0 metres clear of any street tree.
4. The drainage of the site shall be by means of a gravity system. A pumped system shall not be used
for any roofed, paved or surface areas. A pump may only be used for agricultural drains and sections of
basement ramps that cannot be drained to the legal point of discharge by gravity. The design and
construction of the pumped system must be in accordance with AS/NZ 3500.3.2:1998.
5. Cast iron or galvanised iron pipes shall be used within the road reserve. U.P.V.C. (sewer quality) pipes
may be used in the road reserve if the full length of the pipe within the Road Reserve is under a hard
paved footpath or surface, or if at least 150mm of earth cover is available (within the nature strip).
6. A Road Management Act Consent must be obtained for drainage works within the road reserve and a
Road Opening Permit must be obtained for a connection to an underground Council drain or pit.
7. If applicable, individual lots or town houses should be connected to the legal point of discharge
independently of other lots.
8. All internal and external pipes shall be 100mm diameter (minimum) U.P.V.C. or concrete. F.R.C pipes
may be used if greater than 300mm of cover is to be provided.
9. Inspection openings or pits shall be provided at all pipe junctions and bends.
10. Pits or inspection openings must be provided to allow access to all drains (including A.G. drains) for
cleaning and maintenance purposes.
11. Pit sizes shall be a minimum of 450 x 450mm (internal size). Pits greater than 600mm in depth shall be
600 x 600mm.
12. Pipes under buildings shall be rubber ring jointed or solvent welded and be laid without bends or
junctions.
13. All site drainage including all surface runoff must be contained within the site and connected to the lawful
point of discharge.
14. All other drainage requirements shall comply with AS/NZS 3500.3.2:1998.
PUBLIC OR PRIVATE DRAINS ON SUBJECT SITE
Council has no record of any public stormwater drains or private drains (that may serve neighbouring
properties) being located on the property. If any such drains exist, no structure shall be built over or
interfere with the drain or easement without written consent from Stonnington Council.
Any further enquiries in relation to the information provided should be directed to Travis Jenkins,
Urban and Infrastructure Projects, on 8290 3280 or tjenkins@stonnington.vic.gov.au.
Yours faithfully
Ian Robson
Municipal Building Surveyor
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern – Council Stormwater Network
Legal Point of Discharge

kerb and channel of
Glendearg Grove
11.04 SOIL REPORT
11.08.17
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION - RESIDENTIAL
3 GLENDEARG GROVE
MALVERN
PROJECT NO: 21578-1
Prepared for: VENN ARCHITECTS
16TH FEBRUARY 2017
Statewide Geotechnical (Aust) Pty Ltd

17-20 Summer Lane, Ringwood 3134 - Phone: 03 9879 2999 Fax: 03 9879 6226
Email: geo@statewidedrilling.com.au ABN: 73 113 017 799 ACN: 113 017 799
STATEWIDE GEOTECHNICAL (AUST) PTY LTD
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Statewide Geotechnical (Aust) Pty Ltd was engaged by Venn Architects to conduct
suitable field investigation in accordance with AS2870-2011 (Residential Slabs and
Footings) for the purpose of assigning a site classification and providing site specific
advice in relation to; earthworks, footings, construction and site maintenance
requirements.
We understand that the proposed construction will comprise ground and upper floor
articulated brick veneer and clad frame addition to the rear of the existing dwelling, and a
new in-ground pool.
2.0 SCOPE OF INVESTIGATION
Fieldwork was carried out by engineering staff from this firm on 15th February, 2017. Two
boreholes were drilled with a hand auger and the subsurface profiles logged, sampled and
appropriately strength/density tested. Existing footings to the dwelling were inspected at
one location. Footing probe and borehole locations are shown in figure 1.
3.0 SITE DESCRIPTION
3.1 Building / Site Details
The site is a rectangular residential allotment, bounded to the front (west) by Glendearg
Grove and to remaining sides by developed residential allotments. The site surface
gradient was measured using a hand held clinometer and ranged from 0-1o sloping
towards the south. An existing single and double storey brick veneer dwelling is centrally
located onsite, and appears to be in a reasonable condition. An existing rear double
storey addition will be demolished.
A few 6-9m high trees are located around the property, including the adjoining properties.
For this site, due to the relatively stable deep sand profile, these trees are not expected to
have any significant drying related effect on the proposed construction envelope.
It is important that the designer satisfy themselves as to the mature heights of these trees
and hence the extent of potential drying related influence on the proposed construction
envelope.
Key site details are summarised on attached figure 1.
A photograph looking north-west towards the proposed addition is shown on the following
page.
Project No: 21578-1 Page 2 16/02/2017

3.2 Climatic Region
This site is classified as being within the Class 2 ’Wet Temperate’ Climatic Region.
3.3 Existing Footing Details
Footing Probe No. FP1

Location (see figure 1) South-East corner of original part of
dwelling
Composition Concrete Strip
Founding Depth (ground surface to 750mm
base of footing) (mm)
Depth of Footing (top to base of 300mm
footing) (mm)
Projection (mm) 0mm
Founding Material Silty SAND
Moisture condition of founding Moist
material
Potential for moisture change Medium
Footing Performance (at probe Satisfactory
location)
Project No: 21578-1 Page 3 16/02/2017

4.0 GEOLOGY
4.1 Regional
The site is identified on the Geological Survey of Victoria RINGWOOD Sheet (1:63,360) as
being located within the Province of Pliocene ‘Brighton Group’ Sands and associated soil
profiles.
4.2 Borehole Profile
Two boreholes were drilled on this site during our investigation. Logs of the specific
boreholes are attached to this report. An overview of the site subsurface profile follows:
 FILL material extending from surface to 0.3-0.35m, underlain by
 Natural Silty SAND, grey becoming light grey, medium dense, containing trace
ferruginous gravel, extending to 1.5-1.7m, underlain by
 Sandy CLAY, brown / orange / grey, medium plasticity, very stiff, extending to
2.0m+.
4.3 Soil Moisture / Groundwater
The fill material is described as slightly moist to moist. The natural silty sand is described
as moist becoming wet, overlying moist sandy clay.
During wet months or following significant rainfall events, development of “perched”

groundwater may occur, resulting in localized wetting or saturation of fill materials or
natural sand soils which overlie the clay interface.
5.0 SITE CLASSIFICATION
This site is classified as Class S in accordance with AS2870 – 2011.
Any SITE CUTTING or FILL PLACEMENT has the potential to alter areas of the site which
may be affected by abnormal soil moisture conditions. It may also alter appropriate footing
types.
Where CUT or FILL works occur, this office must be supplied with accurate details to
ensure that the SITE CLASSIFICATION and FOOTING ADVICE remain appropriate.
6.0 SITE PREPARATION
Ensure existing footings and related structures are removed sufficiently so as not to
interfere with new footings.
Tree stumps should be removed at the same time that trees are felled and stump
excavations immediately backfilled with competent fill materials (i.e. granular materials or
low-medium plasticity clays), placed in lifts of 200mm maximum with each lift being well
compacted.
Project No: 21578-1 Page 4 16/02/2017

‘Abnormal’ soil moisture conditions are likely to occur through areas from which buildings,
paving or trees have been recently removed. Such abnormal conditions will diminish with
time, particularly during winter months when frequent rainfall is experienced. Allow the
maximum possible time to elapse between removal of buildings, pavements or trees and
the commencement of new construction.
In conjunction with any excavation to achieve required grade levels the site shall be
prepared in accordance with Section 6 of AS2870 – 2011 (Residential Slabs & Footings).
Particular attention should be given to the stripping of all vegetation and topsoil containing
root zone material. In addition, any areas of soft, loose or wet material which will not
respond to compactive measures should be selectively excavated to achieve a firm
working base.
In the absence of any underpinning of adjoining structures, construction excavations

should be designed so that the cut (from top to bottom) is not intersected by an inverted
plane extending outwards (and downwards) from the base of adjoining footings at an angle
of 30o through non cohesive soil and 45o through cohesive soil.
Excavation within the natural silty sand for the proposed pool may be subject to sidewall
collapse and temporary shoring of excavations should be anticipated.
7.0 FOOTING DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS
7.1 Overview
TYPE ENGINEER DESIGN POSSIBLE RISK(S)

REQUIRED
On Grade Slab Optional Acceptable
Strip/Stump Footings Optional Acceptable
7.2 On Grade Slab
For areas of ROLLED FILL, (per AS2870-2011) and/or successfully proof rolled site fill,
having total depths of less than 400mm, construction of a CLASS S slab is appropriate.
Slab EDGE and INTERNAL beams must penetrate through any fill material and be
founded at least 100mm into the underlying natural silty sand.
Maximum allowable bearing pressures beneath slab beams are: 100kPa (edge and
internal).
All relevant construction notes to Fig.3.1, AS2870-2011 apply.
Where total depths of rolled and/or proof rolled site fill materials exceed 600mm, then
through such areas slab panels must be designed as SELF SUPPORTING.
Project No: 21578-1 Page 5 16/02/2017

7.3 Strip / Stump Footings
Footings proportioned in accordance with a CLASS S site classification must penetrate

through any fill material and be founded at least 200mm into the underlying natural silty
sand.
Minimum founding depths should not be reduced to less than 500mm.
Maximum allowable bearing pressure beneath footings must not exceed 100kPa.
All relevant construction notes to Fig. 3.6, AS2870 2011 apply.
7.4 Existing Footings
The footing probe indicates that the external strip footing is under sized with respect to
current specifications. AS2870 recommends a minimum footing depth of 500mm for a solid
brick dwelling on a site classified as CLASS S. The depth of the existing footing is
measured to be 300mm.
The underlying silty clay profile may be apportioned an allowable end bearing capacity of
100kPa and can withstand the additional loads that the proposed new works will impart.
When application of point loads will result in applied bearing pressures exceeding this
figure, then insertion of additional (new) stumps will be required, as per section 7.3 of this
report.
It must be emphasized that while the bearing capacity of the silty sand / sandy clay profile
is sufficient for the proposed second storey addition, further surface movement leading to
doors jamming, brick cracking etc. cannot be ruled out should foundation zone soil
moisture conditions change.
7.5 General
Avoid OVERDEEPENING of footing excavations as this will result in wet or saturated soil
conditions being encountered with resultant problems of collapse for open excavations.
This situation is most acute during wet months.
Where edge beams/footings are located adjacent to a backfilled service trench, we advise
that, unless continuous rock is intersected at shallower depths, such footings should be
deepened such that they are founded at or below the level of a plane of inclination (30o)
extending outwards from the base of the trench.
Project No: 21578-1 Page 6 16/02/2017

8.0 CONSTRUCTION ADVICE
Founding depths recommended in Section 7.3 are designed to minimize foundation

movement experience by the proposed super structure. Minor foundation movement
cannot be ruled out; particularly should any factors cause significant alterations to the soil
moisture content within the foundation zone clays. Should the risk of such movement be
unacceptable to the property owner, this office should be contacted immediately in relation
to alternate engineer designed suspended footing systems which will negate potential
footing movement.
Provide full height control joints in masonry walls above or close to junctions between
different types of footing systems, footings founded at significantly different depths or
footings founded on significantly different materials (i.e. clay and rock).
Brickwork control joints and/or features which articulate the brickwork such as timber
panelling or full height windows should be incorporated at regular intervals. Full height
articulation joints should be provided within 4.5m of corners, and a nominal 6.0m
thereafter. Should a rendered finish be applied to new brickwork or clad frame walls, it is
important that control joints are similarly integrated into the render finish.
Provide full height control joints in masonry walls at the junction between the extension
and the existing building.
Internal finish to floor and walls at the junction between pre-existing building and new
addition must be tolerant of minor differential movements.
9.0 SITE MAINTENANCE
The attached Appendix (Site Maintenance Requirements) forms an integral part of this
report and should be read carefully. In addition the following maintenance issues are
emphasised;
Ensure that the ground level is contoured to provide adequate drainage away from
foundations.
For and on behalf of

Statewide Geotechnical (Aust) Pty Ltd
David Alkemade B.Eng (Geo), MSc Matthew Cotter BSc

Engineering Manager Engineering Geologist
Project No: 21578-1 Page 7 16/02/2017

Statewide Geotechnical (Aust) Pty. Ltd. PROJECT No: 21578
ABN 73 113 017 799
Date Drilled: 15/2/2017
BOREHOLE LOGS Supervisor: CS
CLIENT : VENN ARCHITECTS

PROJECT: 3 GLENDEARG GROVE, MALVERN
BOREHOLE NO: 1 METHOD: H LOCATION: See attached figure
COHESION SOIL MOISTURE/
DEPTH STRUCTURE MATERIAL DESCRIPTION IN SITU TESTING SAMPLE
(m) or GROUNDWATER DEPTH PP DCP / SPT
DENSITY (m)
FILL Admixed sand, silt, gravel, grey / dark MD M/SM

brown
0.3
SOIL Silty SAND, grey, becoming lighter, trace MD M
PROFILE ferruginous gravel @ 1.4m ↓
W
1.7
1.8 225
Sandy CLAY, medium plasticity, brown / VSt M
grey / orange
2.0
2.0m FINISH
BOREHOLE NO: 2 METHOD: H LOCATION: See attached figure

FILL Admixed sand, silt, gravel, rubble, grey / MD SM
brown
0.35
SOIL Silty SAND, grey, becoming lighter, MD M
PROFILE ↓
W
1.5
Sandy CLAY, medium plasticity, brown / VSt M

grey / orange
2.0
2.0m FINISH
Sample Type Moisture Condition Consistency Relative Density Testing

U Undisturbed Sample D – Dry VS – Very Soft VL – Very Loose PP – Pocket Penetrometer
D Disturbed Sample M – Moist S – Soft L – Loose VSH – Vane Shear
SPT *SPT Sample SM – Slightly Moist F – Firm MD – Moderately Dense DCP – Dynamic Cone Penetrometer
U50 Tube Sample VM – Very Moist St – Stiff D – Dense *SPT – Standard Penetrometer Test
U63 Tube Sample W – Wet VSt – Very Stiff VD – Very Dense
Seepage Entry H – Hard
Standing Water Level Fb - Friable
PROJECT No: 21578
FIGURE No: 1
5M
TREE
9M
TREE
BH1
BH2
1˚ F
ALL
FP1
6M6MTREE
4M
TREE TREE
DOUBLE STOREY
BRICK VENEER
8M
TREE 6M TREE
4M 5M
TREE TREE
6M
TREE 4M 4M
4M 4M
TREE TREE
TREE TREE
7M
TREE
6M
TREE
FRONT OF BLOCK
N
GLENDEARG GROVE
KEY
PROJECT: 3 GLENDEARG GROVE, MALVERN Borehole
SCALE: NOT TO SCALE Probe

Statewide Geotechnical (Aust) Pty Ltd APPENDIX 1
REPORT ADDENDUM
To be read in conjunction with attached report
LIMITATIONS OF REPORT
The subsurface conditions and related site preparation and footing advice outlined in this report is based on assumptions that
test results obtained from borings or pits are representative of the overall subsurface conditions. It is the responsibility of the
owner/builder to confirm that the locations of our test site has broadly covered the site area for the final proposed
construction.
In the event that site/footing excavations reveal soil conditions which differ from those described in this report then Statewide
Geotechnical (Aust) Pty Ltd should be contacted immediately and excavations stopped immediately. We take no
responsibility for site/footings excavations deepened beyond our recommended founding depth without prior approval from
this firm.
The recommendations in this report are also based on the following:-
a) Information about the site and its history, proposed site treatment and building type conveyed to us by the client
or their agent.
b) Professional judgments and opinions using the most recent information in soil testing practice that is available to
us.
c) The location of our test sites and the information gained from this and other investigations.
Should the client or their agent neglect to supply us with correct relevant information, including information about previous
buildings, trees or past activities on the site, or should changes be made to the building type, size and/or position, our report
may be made irrelevant or inappropriate. In such cases, we will not accept any liability for the consequences and we reserve
the right to levy an additional charge if more testing or a change to the report is necessary.
Unless otherwise stated in our commission, all dimensions and measurements in relation to borehole positions and depths of
soil strata, as well as slope directions and magnitudes are approximates only and must not be relied upon for accurate
building cost calculations. Plans do not represent accurate title details. Locations of site features including trees, services,
existing/adjoining buildings etc are approximates only.
All contractors must be well briefed as to the requirements and specifications in this report. To minimize the likelihood of
misinterpretation, this report must not be reproduced unless in full and contractors given ready access to the complete report.
This report is based on the assumptions that conditions revealed through selective sampling are indicative of the actual
conditions throughout the site, i.e. correlation between boreholes. Variations between boreholes may exist due to previous
land use or natural geologic processes. Additional deepening of the foundations, deeper than the minimum specified
founding depths in this report may be required. The actual subsurface conditions can be discerned only during earthworks
when the subsurface profile can be directly observed.
CONSTRUCTION & SITE MAINTENANCE

Conventional footings are designed to accommodate normal reactivity induced seasonal surface movements, but require that
a good foundation maintenance program be implemented. A good foundation maintenance program should be aimed at
keeping foundation zone soils at a low and constant moisture content. To this end we recommend that the notes contained in
AS2870-2011 Appendix B and the CSIRO Information Sheet BTF 18 (references 1 and 4) be implemented, and that
particular attention be given to the points discussed below.
To ensure the satisfactory long term performance of footings, it is absolutely imperative that:
 No water shall be allowed to pond or pool at the base of the foundation excavations.
 The storm water be connected as soon as the roof is sealed. This will normally require the installation of a temporary
system ‘above ground’ until permanent drainage is connected and operational, and
 The ground surface and pavements adjacent to the building be graded away from the building as per the drainage
requirements C5.2.AS2870 Supp-2011.
Articulation
Articulation of masonry walls should be provided as per details contained in reference (3) above. Spacing between
articulation joints should not exceed a maximum of 6.0m, and should be provided at/or between:
 Any new walls abutting the existing walls.
 Footings founding at significantly different founding depths, or founding material, and
 Points of high stress, i.e. above door and window openings, changes in storey height, or above large spanning lintels.
Service Trenches/Easements
The presence of service trenches and easements is a common cause of unsatisfactory performance of foundations through
either direct undermining or through the introduction of undesirable levels of soil moisture. For this reason we recommend:
 Where footings are located in close proximity or adjacent to a backfilled service trench or easements, the footings
must be deepened and founded at a depth at or below the level of plane of inclination of 45o above horizontal
extending outwards from the base of the trench or filling (as illustrated by figure C6.1 AS2870 Suppl-2011). This
includes service trenches which may be present on adjacent sites or on site prior to the current development (such as
abandoned storm water and sewer trenches); and
 A minimum offset of 2.0m from the building should be adopted for all service trenches and/or easements.
 Where the minimum 2.0m offset is not possible, the maximum available offset should be adopted, and the footing
should be deepened at least one footing width below the level of plane of inclination of 45 o above horizontal
extending outwards from the closest deepest corner of the service trench. This is intended to minimize the risk of
unacceptable soil moisture changes facilitated by the proximity of the service trenches. There will be instances
where this office can reduce this depth upon discussions and written approval.
 All service trenches should be sloped away from the building as per AS2870-2011 section 6.6(d).
 Backfill material should ideally comprise weakmix concrete, mortar or (preferably) cement stabilized soil, or clean
adequately tamped/compacted clay placed marginally wet of optimum. Permeable or granular material such as sand,
gravel, ¼ minus, or building rubble, should not be used to backfill service trenches in proximity to building
foundations.
Where footings/edge beams are to be additionally deepened, we recommend blinding concrete should first be poured in
the base of the excavation upon which the footing/edge beam can be constructed.
Significant additional deepening (greater than nominal depth of 1.50m) may necessitate the footing/edge beam to be
suspended to an engineer design. The design should be conducted with the intention that should the clay soils shrink,
the footing/edge beam should then be supported on the mass pad/pier footing. In this way the structural stiffness of the
footing can remain the same throughout the design, i.e. maintain a uniform slab edge beam thickness or strip footing
depth. These footings must be founded as per the rest of the development. Recommendations for bored piers/mass
excavated pad footings may be obtained from this office if required.
Site drainage
The site should be graded or drained to prevent water from ponding against or near the building. Monitoring of surface
drainage paths should be ongoing. In any areas where ponding or pooling of water does occur, the surface should be
regraded to direct water away from the building or to storm water discharge points.
Garden restrictions
Garden beds should not compromise site drainage or be located directly adjacent to the building and should not be over-
watered where they are near the building foundations.
Maintenance of plumbing, services and storm water system
All services and plumbing must be well maintained and periodically checked for leaks. Guttering must be kept clean at all
times and down pipes discharge all roof water into the storm water system (or rainwater tank).
Trees
Trees/shrubs can induce ‘drying’ of foundation zone soils, resulting in shrinkage and consequent foundation movement
and cracking. Conversely, trees/shrubs can also block or crack service pipes, resulting in leaking and wetting of
foundation zone soils, with similar undesirable consequences.
Trees should therefore be prohibited a minimum distance equal to the mature height of the tree from structures for sites
of high reactivity. There generally has to be a compromise between the presence of trees and foundation movement and
associated cracking.
Tree roots are attracted to moist ground conditions. If a relatively low and constant ground moisture condition can be
maintained in the vicinity of the foundations, tree roots, which may cause volumetric changes in the foundation zone soils
and/or cracking in later dry periods, will be attracted to other areas.
Foundation performance
It should be noted that the conventional foundations specified in AS2870-2011 may still experience some minor (non-
structural) foundation movement and cracking, even where good foundation maintenance practices are undertaken,
depending on environmental factors and local conditions (refer to AS2870-2011 Section 1.3.1 and Table C1 and C2
Appendix C). This reflects the necessity of achieving a balance between cost, safety and serviceability.
Alternatives to conventional foundations can be ‘tailored’ to suit the desired level of performance of the foundation
system. Should minor foundation movements be intolerable or on-going maintenance be undesirable, the foundation
may be engineered accordingly. This will be a matter for the proponent to decide based on the required level of
serviceability and desired performance criteria, and cost. Further advice with regard to an alternative foundation design
may be obtained from this office, if required.
This report is valid for a period of 2 years from date of testing. Should construction works commence after this
time frame, then this office should be contacted for further advice and a report update. Note that this update will
require a site inspection and possible additional fieldwork.
References:
AS2870-2011. “Residential slabs and footings – Construction”
AS2570 Suppl-2011
. “Residential slabs and footings – Construction – Commentary”
“The Cement and Concrete Association of Australia” Technical note TN61
“Foundation Maintenance and Footing Performance: A Homeowners Guide”, CSIRO Information Sheet BTF 18.
11.05 ENERGY REPORT
11.08.17
Reducing the world’s carbon footprint one house at a time
1D Venture Way, Pakenham 3810 T 1300 033 343
Level 2, 803 Pacific Highway, Gordon NSW 2072 E admin@energylab.com.au
Ground Floor, 2 Innovation Parkway, Birtinya QLD 4575
Alteration/Addition NCC 3.12 Energy Efficiency Assessment
Two house energy rating method as per Practice Note 55 2014
3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern,

File Name: GLE-003-16
Report Date: 10-08-2017
Class: 1
HER Current Conditions HER New Conditions

Inclusions have been based on worst case scenario assumptions unless To be applied to new works only, unless noted otherwise.
noted on provided documentation.
Wall Insulation to Reach R2.5 + Foil
No existing sub floor insulation Overhanging upper floor area to be insulated with R2.5
No existing floor insulation Internal perimeter wall insulation of Bathroom to reach R2.5
No existing wall insulation Ceiling Insulation to Reach R6.0 (Including to existing areas) (+ Foil
No existing ceiling insulation to flat framed roof areas)
Unsealed single glazed windows All windows and glazed doors to be double glazed with a MAX U
Unsealed Chimney 3.90 and MAX SHGC 0.63
Unsealed Entry Door Existing chimneys to be weather-sealed
Unsealed Exhaust Fan
Star Rating Calculations - NCC 3.12 Compliance

Volume calculations to determine required star rating as per the formula provided in Practice
Required Star Rating Achieved Star Rating
Note 55 (9.5).
Existing internal dwelling volume = 800.0m3

New work internal volume = 623.5m3
3.1 3.6
Existing house star rating = 0.0
New house star rating benchmark = 6.0
Formula calculations: ( ( (800.0 - 115.8) * 0.0 ) + ( (623.5 + 115.8) * 6.0 ) ) / ( 800.0 + 623.5 ) =
3.1
Additional Provisions as per NCC 3.12.0 (a)(i) and NCC 3.12.0 (b):
No downlights have been assessed within this energy report. The installation of downlights will negatively affect the energy report due to a loss of ceiling insulation as perNCC 3.12 Table 3.12.1.1b.
Insulation is to be installed in accordance with the provisions outlined in NCC 3.12.1.1
All construction elements are to be sealed in accordance with the provisions outlined in NCC 3.12.3
A hot water supply system must be designed and installed in accordance with Section 8 of AS/NZS 3500.4 or clause 3.38 of AS/NZS 3500.5. Installation to be in accordance with NCC 3.12.5.
Central heating water piping and heating/cooling ductwork must use thermal insulation material in accordance with AS/NZS 4859.1. Installation to be in accordance with NCC 3.12.5.
All residential lighting is subject to meeting performance levels outlined in NCC 3.12.5.5.
Assessment Notes:
Construction drawings are assessed based on the requirements outlined in the National Construction Code Part 3.12.0.1 and NATHERS Technical Note 2
The energy assessment has been completed using : revised construction drawings supplied by Venn Architects P/L on the 09-08-2017
Any alteration to the construction drawings or alterations during/post construction will render the energy efficiency assessment void.
All results are based on a fixed assumption that a minimum of holland blinds will be installed by the owner upon a Certificate of Occupancy being issued. All other window furnishings cannot be
simulated.
If no floor coverings have been defined within the supplied documentation floor tiles will be assessed within the kitchen and wet areas with carpet to the balance of the dwelling.
If no wall and roof colours have been defined within the supplied documentation then a light coloured roof and medium coloured walls will be assessed as per NATHERS Technical Note 2. Typical solar
absorptance values are located within NCC 3.12.1.2
Rainwater tanks or solar hot water units do not form part of a 6 star energy report. Please consult NCC V2.6.1a or your registered building surveyor for further information.
Default Clause 10.12 from NATHERS Technical Note 2 will be adopted if no neighbouring building information is documented on the assessed drawings.
You can view a full list of our Terms and Conditions at www.energylab.com.au
Nationwide House Energy Rating Scheme* Certificate
Certificate Number: SH4PCKAGZM Date of Certificate: 10 Aug 2017 ★ Star rating: 0
Assessor details
Accreditation
number: VIC/BDAV/11/2078
Name: Sharelle Haines
Organisation: EnergyLab
Email:
Phone:
Declaration
admin@energylab.com.au
1300033343
No potential conflicts of interest to
0
The more stars the more
energy efficient
of interest: declare
Software: FirstRate5: 5.2.6 (3.13)
AAO: BDAV
Overview
Predicted annual energy load for heating and cooling
based on standard occupancy assumptions
Dwelling details
Address: 3 Glendearg Grove

765.1 MJ/m 2
Suburb: Malvern For more information on

your dwelling's rating see:
State: VIC Postcode: 3144
www.nathers.gov.au
Type: Existing Home NCC Class: Class 1a
Lot/DP NatHERS
number: - climate zone: 62
Exposure: suburban
Key construction and insulation materials Ceiling penetrations **NOTE: This total is the maximum
number of ceiling penetrations allowed
(see following pages for details) (see following pages for
to a ceiling (under a roof) for this
details)
certificate. If this number is exceded
Construction: Wall: in construction then this certificate
Roof: Sealed: 0 IS NOT VALID and a new certificate
Floor: Unsealed: 6 is required. Loss of ceiling insulation
for the penetrations listed has been
Insulation: Wall: TOTAL:** 6 taken into account with the rating.
Roof:
Floor: Principal downlight type: No downlights modelled
Glazing:
Net floor area (m2) Annual thermal Window selection - Scan to access this
performance loads default windows only certificate online and
Conditioned: 219.5 (MJ/m2) confirm this is valid.
Note on allowable window values: Only a
Unconditioned: 29.3 5% tolerance to the nominated SHGC
Garage: - window values shown on page 2 can be
Heating: 715 used with this rating.
TOTAL: 248.8 Cooling: 50.1 Note: Only a +/-5% SHGC
TOTAL: 765.1 tolerance is allowed with this
rating.
NB: This tolerance ONLY applies to
SHGC, the U-value can always be lower
but not higher than the values stated on
Plan documents page 2.
If any of the windows selected are
Plan ref/date: - outside the 5% tolerance then this
certificate is no longer valid and the https://www.fr5.com.au/QRCodeLand
Prepared by: - dwelling will need to be rerated to ing?PublicId=SH4PCKAGZM
confirm compliance.
* Nationwide House Energy Rating Scheme (NatHERS) is an initiative of the Australian, state and territory
governments. For more details see www.nathers.gov.au
Page 1 of 7
Building Features
Windows type and performance value
Window ID Window type U-value SHGC

TIM-001-01 W Timber A SG Clear 5.4 0.56
Windows schedule
Window ID Window no. Height (mm) Width (mm) Orientation Zone name Outdoor shade
TIM-001-01 W Opening 1 2310 825 W Bedroom 1 No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 2 2310 825 W Bedroom 1 No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 15 1900 1000 N Study No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 3 2310 825 W Sitting/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 6 2400 800 S Sitting/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 7 2400 800 S Sitting/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 8 2400 450 E Sitting/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 16 1450 900 N Bath No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 11 800 2800 S PDR/Laundry No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 35 800 800 S PDR/Laundry No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 24 600 820 E PDR/Laundry No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 12 1300 1000 S Bar No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 26 1300 1400 W Kitchen/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 22 2700 5900 E Kitchen/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 18 700 700 N Kitchen/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 19 2700 800 N Kitchen/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 25 1500 700 E Kitchen/Living No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 5 2825 1475 W Entry No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 17 1800 800 N Stairs No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 13 1300 2000 S Bedroom 2 No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 21 2100 2900 E Bedroom 3 No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 27 850 700 W WC No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 20 2100 900 E Bath No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 14 2100 4000 N Rumpus No
TIM-001-01 W Opening 28 1900 1300 W Corridor No
Roof windows and skylight type and performance value
Page 2 of 7
Building Features
ID Window type U-value SHGC
Roof window and skylight schedule
Outdoor Indoor shade/

ID Roof window/ skylight no. Area (m2) Orientation Zone name shade diffuser
External wall type
Type Insulation Wall wrap

1 : DB - Double Brick No
External wall schedule
Wall type Area (m2) Orientation Zone name Fixed shade Eaves
1 : DB - Double Brick 2.9 W Bedroom 1 No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 1.3 N Bedroom 1 Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 1.3 S Bedroom 1 Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 18.1 N Bedroom 1 No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 12.7 N Study No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 3.2 W Sitting/Living No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 1.3 N Sitting/Living Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 8 W Sitting/Living No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 1.3 S Sitting/Living Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 3 W Sitting/Living No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 25.6 S Sitting/Living Yes Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 3.4 W Sitting/Living Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 3.3 E Sitting/Living Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 5.7 E Sitting/Living Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 9 N Bath No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 7.2 W PDR/Laundry Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 12.5 S PDR/Laundry No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 7.2 E PDR/Laundry No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 12.4 S Bar Yes No
Page 3 of 7
Building Features
1 : DB - Double Brick 5.4 W Kitchen/Living Yes No

1 : DB - Double Brick 17.8 E Kitchen/Living No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 5.5 N Kitchen/Living Yes Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 12.2 E Kitchen/Living Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 8.7 N Kitchen/Living No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 6 W Entry No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 8.8 N Stairs No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 9.7 W Bedroom 2 No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 13.5 E Bedroom 3 No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 2.4 W WC Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 4 S WC No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 7.2 S Bath No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 6.7 E Bath No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 12.9 W Rumpus No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 11.6 E Rumpus Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 16.5 N Rumpus No No
1 : DB - Double Brick 5.8 W Corridor Yes No
Internal wall type
Type Area (m2) Insulation

1 : FR5 - Internal Plasterboard Stud Wall 472.6
Floors
Location Construction Area (m2) Sub floor ventilation Added insulation Covering
Bedroom 1 Timber 20 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Study Timber 13.6 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Sitting/Living Timber 46.1 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Bath Timber 11 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
PDR/Laundry Timber 7.4 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
PDR/Laundry Timber 2.6 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Bar Timber 9.7 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Bar Timber 1 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Page 4 of 7
Building Features
Kitchen/Living Timber 36.4 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles

Entry Timber 18.1 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Stairs Timber 17.3 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Stairs Timber 1 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Bedroom 2 Timber 12.3 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
WC Timber 1.2 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Bath Timber 7.2 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Rumpus Timber 31.6 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Corridor Timber 1.9 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Ceiling type
Location Material Added insulation Roof space above

Bedroom 1 Plasterboard 0.0 Yes
Study Plasterboard 0.0 Yes
Sitting/Living Plasterboard 0.0 Yes
Bath Plasterboard 0.0 Yes
PDR/Laundry Plasterboard 0.0 No
PDR/Laundry Plasterboard 0.0 Yes
Bar Plasterboard 0.0 No
Bar Plasterboard 0.0 Yes
Kitchen/Living Plasterboard 0.0 No
Entry Plasterboard 0.0 Yes
Stairs Plasterboard 0.0 No
Stairs Plasterboard 0.0 Yes
Bedroom 2 Plasterboard 0.0 No
WC Plasterboard 0.0 No
Bath Plasterboard 0.0 No
Page 5 of 7
Building Features
Rumpus Plasterboard 0.0 No

Corridor Plasterboard 0.0 No
Ceiling penetrations
Location Number Type Width (mm) Length (mm) Seal/ unsealed

Bedroom 1 1 Chimneys 150 150 Unsealed
Study 1 Chimneys 150 150 Unsealed
Sitting/Living 1 Chimneys 200 200 Unsealed
Bath 1 Exhaust Fans 250 250 Unsealed
Kitchen/Living 1 Exhaust Fans 250 250 Unsealed
Bath 1 Exhaust Fans 250 250 Unsealed
Ceiling fans
Location Number Diameter (mm)
Roof type
Material Added insulation Roof colour

Disc:Attic-Discontinuous 0.0 medium
Framed:Flat - Flat Framed (Metal Deck) 0.0 medium
Page 6 of 7
Additional information
Explanatory notes
About this report Accredited Assessors
Residential energy ratings address the quality of the To ensure you get a high-quality, professional NatHERS
building fabric i.e. walls, windows, floors and roof/ceilings. House Energy Rating report, you should always use an
Ratings do not cover the energy or water efficiency of accredited assessor, accredited assessors are members
appliances including heating and cooling, hot water, of a professional body called an Assessor Accrediting
dishwashers, ovens, fridges, TVs etc. or solar panel or Organisation (AAO).
water tank requirements. The efficiency or specification of AAOs have specific quality assurance processes in place
these items is generally covered by other regulations, and continuing professional development requirements to
standards or guidelines. maintain a high and consistent standard of assessments
across the country. Non-accredited assessors do not have
General Information this level of quality assurance or any on-going training
requirements.
A NatHERS House Energy Rating is a comprehensive, If you have any questions or concerns about this report,
dynamic computer modelling evaluation of the floorplans, please direct them to your assessor in the first instance.
elevations and specifications to predict an energy load of
If your assessor is unable to address your questions or
a home. Not all of us use our homes in the same way, so
concerns, please contact their AAO listed under ‘assessor
ratings are generated using standard assumptions. This
details’. You can also find a range of information about
means homes can be compared across the country.
accredited assessors on the AAO websites.
The actual energy consumption of your home may vary
significantly from the predicted energy load figures in this
Disclaimer
report depending on issues such as the size of your
household and your personal preferences, e.g. in terms of
The energy values quoted are for comparison purposes
heating or cooling.
only; they are not a prediction of actual energy use. This
While the figures are an indicative guide to energy use, rating only applies to the floor plan, construction details,
they can be used as a reliable guide for comparative orientation and climate as submitted and included in the
purposes between different house designs and for attached drawing set that bears a stamp with the same
demonstrating that the design meets the required number as this certificate. Changes to any of these details
regulatory compliance. could affect the rating.
Homes that are energy efficient use less energy, are
warmer in winter, cooler in summer and cost less to run. Contact
The higher the star rating the more energy efficient.
This NatHERS House Energy Rating report was carefully For more information on the Nationwide House Energy
prepared by your assessor on the basis of comprehensive Rating Scheme (NatHERS), visit www.nathers.gov.au
modelling using standard procedures to rate your home For more information on energy efficient design and
using an underlying engine developed by the Australian insulation visit www.yourhome.gov.au
Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research
Organisation (CSIRO).
All information relating to energy loads presented in this
report is based on a range of standard assumptions in
order to allow for comparisons with reports prepared for
other homes and to demonstrate minimum regulatory
compliance. The standard assumptions include figures for
occupancy, indoor air temperature and are based on a
unique climate file for your region.
Page 7 of 7
Certificate Number: 5K1VPVROMT Date of Certificate: 10 Aug 2017 ★ Star rating: 3.6
Assessor details
Accreditation
number: VIC/BDAV/11/2078
Name: Sharelle Haines
Organisation: EnergyLab
Email:
Phone:
Declaration
admin@energylab.com.au
1300033343
No potential conflicts of interest to
3.6
The more stars the more
energy efficient
of interest: declare
Software: FirstRate5: 5.2.6 (3.13)
AAO: BDAV
Overview
Predicted annual energy load for heating and cooling
based on standard occupancy assumptions
Dwelling details
Address: 3 Glendearg Grove

250.7 MJ/m 2
Suburb: Malvern For more information on

your dwelling's rating see:
State: VIC Postcode: 3144
www.nathers.gov.au
Type: Alteration NCC Class: Class 1a
Lot/DP NatHERS
number: - climate zone: 62
Exposure: suburban
Key construction and insulation materials Ceiling penetrations **NOTE: This total is the maximum
number of ceiling penetrations allowed
(see following pages for details) (see following pages for
to a ceiling (under a roof) for this
details)
certificate. If this number is exceded
Construction: Wall: in construction then this certificate
Roof: Sealed: 80 IS NOT VALID and a new certificate
Floor: Unsealed: 6 is required. Loss of ceiling insulation
for the penetrations listed has been
Insulation: Wall: TOTAL:** 86 taken into account with the rating.
Roof:
Floor: Principal downlight type: Modelled but type not
Glazing: specified
Net floor area (m2) Annual thermal Window selection - Scan to access this
performance loads default windows only certificate online and
Conditioned: 303.1 (MJ/m2) confirm this is valid.
Note on allowable window values: Only a
Unconditioned: 8.6 5% tolerance to the nominated SHGC
Garage: - window values shown on page 2 can be
Heating: 213.4 used with this rating.
TOTAL: 311.7 Cooling: 37.3 Note: Only a +/-5% SHGC
TOTAL: 250.7 tolerance is allowed with this
rating.
NB: This tolerance ONLY applies to
SHGC, the U-value can always be lower
but not higher than the values stated on
Plan documents page 2.
If any of the windows selected are
Plan ref/date: - outside the 5% tolerance then this
certificate is no longer valid and the https://www.fr5.com.au/QRCodeLand
Prepared by: - dwelling will need to be rerated to ing?PublicId=5K1VPVROMT
confirm compliance.
Page 1 of 8
Building Features
Windows type and performance value
Window ID Window type U-value SHGC

TIM-002-01 W Timber B SG Clear 5.4 0.63
CMP-004-01 I Composite B DG Air Fill Clear-Clear 3.9 0.59
Windows schedule
Window ID Window no. Height (mm) Width (mm) Orientation Zone name Outdoor shade
TIM-002-01 W WEX01 2310 825 W Bedroom 1 No
TIM-002-01 W WEX02 2310 825 W Bedroom 1 No
TIM-002-01 W WEX03 2310 825 W Media No
TIM-002-01 W WEX04 2310 825 W Media No
CMP-004-01 I DGF01 2700 900 S Media No
CMP-004-01 I WGF10 2750 1655 N Study No
TIM-002-01 W DEX01 2825 1475 W Entry No
TIM-002-01 W WGF01 1800 825 S Bedroom 2 No
CMP-004-01 I WGF02 2700 300 S ENS 2 No
CMP-004-01 I DGF02 2700 900 S Gym No
CMP-004-01 I WGF11 2750 870 E WIR1 No
CMP-004-01 I WGF09 4300 500 W Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I DGF03 2700 900 S Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I WGF06 2650 715 E Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I WGF07A 2650 965 E Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I WGF04A 2650 465 E Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I DGF04 2650 1100 E Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I WGF04B 2650 715 E Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I WGF07B 2650 965 N Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I WGF08A 700 3280 N Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I WGF08B 700 1230 N Kitchen/Living/Dining No
CMP-004-01 I WGF03 700 2410 S Laundry No
CMP-004-01 I WFF05A 1500 1500 E Bedroom 3 No
CMP-004-01 I WFF05B 1500 3500 E Bedroom 3 No
CMP-004-01 I WFF08 1800 1300 W Bedroom 4 No
CMP-004-01 I WFF03 2400 1250 E Bedroom 4 No
CMP-004-01 I WFF04 700 2200 S Bath No
Page 2 of 8
Building Features
CMP-004-01 I WFF01A 1800 2759 W Stairs No

CMP-004-01 I WFF01B 1800 2759 W Stairs No
CMP-004-01 I WFF01C 1800 2759 W Stairs No
CMP-004-01 I WFF01D 1800 1350 W Stairs No
CMP-004-01 I WFF01E 1800 1350 W Stairs No
CMP-004-01 I WFF02 2700 1030 S Stairs No
CMP-004-01 I WFF06 3150 715 E Stairs No
CMP-004-01 I WFF07A 3150 965 E Stairs No
CMP-004-01 I WFF07B 3150 965 N Stairs No
Roof windows and skylight type and performance value
ID Window type U-value SHGC

DEFAULTS:SG-Generic-01
A Clear Al SG DEFAULT ROOF WINDOW System 01 7.3 0.79
GEN-04-001a SC: Single Clear - -
Roof window and skylight schedule
Outdoor Indoor shade/

ID Roof window/ skylight no. Area (m2) Orientation Zone name shade diffuser
DEFAULTS:SG-Generic-01
A Element 1 0.9 N ENS 2 None None
GEN-04-001a Element 2 0.7 S ENS 1 None No
GEN-04-001a Element 4 0.7 S PDR 1 None No
External wall type
Type Insulation Wall wrap

1 : DB - Double Brick No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F Glass fibre batt: R2.5 (R2.5) Yes
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F Glass fibre batt: R2.5 (R2.5) No
External wall schedule
Wall type Area (m2) Orientation Zone name Fixed shade Eaves
Page 3 of 8
Building Features

1 : DB - Double Brick 18.1 N Bedroom 1 Yes Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 3.2 W Media No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 1.3 N Media Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 8 W Media No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 1.3 S Media Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 2.8 W Media No Yes
1 : DB - Double Brick 18.7 S Media Yes Yes
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 7.8 N Study Yes No
1 : DB - Double Brick 6 W Entry No Yes
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 9.7 W ENS 2 Yes No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 4.5 S ENS 2 No No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 7 S Gym No No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 8.4 E WIR1 Yes No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 9 N WIR1 No No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 8.5 W WIR1 Yes Yes
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 3.8 W Kitchen/Living/Dining Yes No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 5.7 S Kitchen/Living/Dining No No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 7.1 S Kitchen/Living/Dining No No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 42.2 E Kitchen/Living/Dining No Yes
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 20.7 N Kitchen/Living/Dining Yes No
2 : BV - Brick Veneer - R2.5F 7.3 S Laundry No No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 13.6 E Bedroom 3 No No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 9.5 N Bedroom 3 Yes Yes
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 4 W Bedroom 4 Yes No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 13.6 S Bedroom 4 No No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 4.4 E Bedroom 4 Yes No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 1.5 S Bedroom 4 Yes No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 8.3 S Bath Yes No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 7.6 E Bath No No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 29.6 W Stairs No No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 4.4 S Stairs Yes No
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 5.7 E Stairs Yes Yes
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 21.7 N Stairs No No
Page 4 of 8
Building Features
3 : EPS50 - 50mm EPS - R2.5F 2.4 E Rumpus No No
Internal wall type
Type Area (m2) Insulation

1 : FR5 - Internal Plasterboard Stud Wall 608.4
2 : Int - Internal Stud Wall - R2.5F 31.8 Glass fibre batt: R2.5 (R2.5)
Floors
Location Construction Area (m2) Sub floor ventilation Added insulation Covering
Media Timber 20.5 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Study Timber 8.2 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Entry Timber 17.9 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
ENS 2 CSOG: Slab on Ground 4.8 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Gym CSOG: Slab on Ground 7.5 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
WIR1 Timber 13.2 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
ENS 1 Timber 6.7 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Kitchen/Living/Dining CSOG: Slab on Ground 83.4 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Kitchen/Living/Dining CSOG: Slab on Ground 5 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Kitchen/Living/Dining CSOG: Slab on Ground 3.5 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Laundry CSOG: Slab on Ground 3.3 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Laundry CSOG: Slab on Ground 1.2 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
PDR 1 Timber 3.3 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Bedroom 3 Timber 16.4 Elevated 2.5 Carpet
Bath Timber 8.6 Elevated 2.5 Tiles
Stairs Timber 24.5 Enclosed 0.0 Tiles
Rumpus Timber 29.8 Enclosed 0.0 Carpet
Rumpus Timber 2.9 Elevated 2.5 Carpet
Ceiling type
Location Material Added insulation Roof space above
Page 5 of 8
Building Features

Media Plasterboard 6.0 Yes
Study Plasterboard 6.0 Yes
Entry Plasterboard 6.0 Yes
ENS 2 Plasterboard 6.0 No
Gym Plasterboard 6.0 No
WIR1 Plasterboard 6.0 Yes
ENS 1 Plasterboard 6.0 Yes
Kitchen/Living/Dining Plasterboard 0.0 No
Laundry Plasterboard 6.0 No
Laundry Plasterboard 0.0 No
PDR 1 Plasterboard 6.0 Yes
Bath Plasterboard 6.0 No
Ceiling penetrations
Location Number Type Width (mm) Length (mm) Seal/ unsealed

Bedroom 1 1 Chimneys 250 250 Sealed
Bedroom 1 6 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
Media 1 Chimneys 250 250 Sealed
Media 6 Downlights 50 50 Unsealed
Study 2 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
Bedroom 2 1 Chimneys 250 250 Sealed
Page 6 of 8
Building Features
ENS 2 1 Exhaust Fans 250 250 Sealed

ENS 2 3 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
Gym 2 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
WIR1 4 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
ENS 1 1 Exhaust Fans 250 250 Sealed
ENS 1 3 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
Kitchen/Living/Dining 1 Exhaust Fans 250 250 Sealed
Kitchen/Living/Dining 22 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
Laundry 2 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
PDR 1 1 Exhaust Fans 250 250 Sealed
PDR 1 2 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
Bath 1 Exhaust Fans 250 250 Sealed
Bath 4 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
Rumpus 8 Downlights 50 50 Sealed
Ceiling fans
Location Number Diameter (mm)
Roof type
Material Added insulation Roof colour

Disc:Attic-Discontinuous 0.0 medium
Framed:Flat - Flat Framed (Metal Deck) 0.0 medium
Ceil: Ceiling 0.0 medium
Page 7 of 8
Additional information
Explanatory notes
About this report Accredited Assessors
Residential energy ratings address the quality of the To ensure you get a high-quality, professional NatHERS
building fabric i.e. walls, windows, floors and roof/ceilings. House Energy Rating report, you should always use an
Ratings do not cover the energy or water efficiency of accredited assessor, accredited assessors are members
appliances including heating and cooling, hot water, of a professional body called an Assessor Accrediting
dishwashers, ovens, fridges, TVs etc. or solar panel or Organisation (AAO).
water tank requirements. The efficiency or specification of AAOs have specific quality assurance processes in place
these items is generally covered by other regulations, and continuing professional development requirements to
standards or guidelines. maintain a high and consistent standard of assessments
across the country. Non-accredited assessors do not have
General Information this level of quality assurance or any on-going training
requirements.
A NatHERS House Energy Rating is a comprehensive, If you have any questions or concerns about this report,
dynamic computer modelling evaluation of the floorplans, please direct them to your assessor in the first instance.
elevations and specifications to predict an energy load of
If your assessor is unable to address your questions or
a home. Not all of us use our homes in the same way, so
concerns, please contact their AAO listed under ‘assessor
ratings are generated using standard assumptions. This
details’. You can also find a range of information about
means homes can be compared across the country.
accredited assessors on the AAO websites.
The actual energy consumption of your home may vary
significantly from the predicted energy load figures in this
Disclaimer
report depending on issues such as the size of your
household and your personal preferences, e.g. in terms of
The energy values quoted are for comparison purposes
heating or cooling.
only; they are not a prediction of actual energy use. This
While the figures are an indicative guide to energy use, rating only applies to the floor plan, construction details,
they can be used as a reliable guide for comparative orientation and climate as submitted and included in the
purposes between different house designs and for attached drawing set that bears a stamp with the same
demonstrating that the design meets the required number as this certificate. Changes to any of these details
regulatory compliance. could affect the rating.
Homes that are energy efficient use less energy, are
warmer in winter, cooler in summer and cost less to run. Contact
The higher the star rating the more energy efficient.
This NatHERS House Energy Rating report was carefully For more information on the Nationwide House Energy
prepared by your assessor on the basis of comprehensive Rating Scheme (NatHERS), visit www.nathers.gov.au
modelling using standard procedures to rate your home For more information on energy efficient design and
using an underlying engine developed by the Australian insulation visit www.yourhome.gov.au
Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research
Organisation (CSIRO).
All information relating to energy loads presented in this
report is based on a range of standard assumptions in
order to allow for comparisons with reports prepared for
other homes and to demonstrate minimum regulatory
compliance. The standard assumptions include figures for
occupancy, indoor air temperature and are based on a
unique climate file for your region.
Page 8 of 8
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
Architectural Drawings
JOB No. DRAWING No. ISSUE
Engineering Drawings
JOB No. DRAWING No. ISSUE
AREA SCHEDULE
TYPE %
INSULATION SCHEDULE
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION LOCATION R-VALUE SIZE
DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS REV. REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE REVISION ITEMS PROJECT DRAWING SCALE DRAWN
FIGURE DIMENSIONS TAKE
PRECEDENCE OVER SCALED
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
CONTRACTORS MUST VERIFY
ALL DIMENSIONS ON SITE
BEFORE COMMENCING ANY
WORK OR MAKING ANY SHOP
DRAWINGS. Level 1, 178 Ferrars Street South Melbourne Victoria 3205 T +61 3 9682 4222 F +61 3 9682 4233 E info@vennarchitects.com W www.vennarchitects.com
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
LIST OF WINDOWS, DOORS & FIXTURES

TO BE RETAINED.
CHECK WINDOW & DOOR SCHEDULE FOR SPEC & NEW LOCATION.
NO. DESCRIPTION
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
REF DESCRIPTION
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
C C
REF DESCRIPTION
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
REF DESCRIPTION
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
REF DESCRIPTION
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
WINDOW SCHEDULE
10-08-2017 No. LOCATION TYPE SIZE GLAZE HARDWARE REMARKS No. LOCATION TYPE SIZE GLAZE HARDWARE REMARKS
GLAZING TYPE LIST

REF. DESCRIPTION
WINDOW TYPE LIST

REF. DESCRIPTION
DOOR TYPE LIST

REF. DESCRIPTION
SKYLIGHT LIST
REF. DESCRIPTION
No. LOCATION SIZE GLAZE HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
3.6
213.4
37.3
10-08-2017
DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING NUMBER
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)

Main
LIGHTING
Menu CALCULATOR FOR USE
LIGHTING WITH J6.2(a) VOLUME
CALCULATOR FOR AND 3.12.5.5
ONEUSE WITHVOLUME TWO
J6.2(a) (First issued with
VOLUME ONE 2014)
NCCAND 3.12.5.5 VOLUME TWO (First issued with NCC 2014) Help screen
Building name/description Classification

3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Class 1
Number of rows preferred in table below 18 (as currently displayed)
Adjustment Factor One Adjustment Factor Two (n/a for Class 1) OVERALL DESIGN PASSES
Design Lamp
Floor area Adjustment Factor Dimming Adjustment Factor Dimming Lamp or Illumination Power
Type of or Design Design
Description of the One Percentages Two Percentages Density System Share of
space Illumination Location Lumen Lumen
space % of Aggregate
Power Load Adjustment % % of full Depreciation Adjustment % % of full Depreciation System System
Allowance Used
Factors Area power Factor Factors Area power Factor Allowance Design
ID
18 1 Bath Bathroom 7 m² 35 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 2 Bedroom 1 Bedroom 20 m² 100 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 3 Bedroom 2 Bedroom 21.7 m² 109 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 4 Bedroom 3 Bedroom 22.5 m² 113 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 5 Bedroom 4 Bedroom 22 m² 110 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 6 ENS 1 Bathroom 6.7 m² 34 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 7 ENS 2 Bathroom 4.8 m² 24 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 8 Entry Other 17.9 m² 90 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 9 Gym Other 7.5 m² 38 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
Kitchen/Living/
10 Kitchen 91.8 m² 459 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 Dining
18 11 Laundry Laundry 4.5 m² 23 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 12 PDR 1 Toilet 3.3 m² 17 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 13 PDR 2 Toilet 2.9 m² 15 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 14 WIR1 Other 13.1 m² 66 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 15 Rumpus Lounge Room 31.3 m² 157 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 16 Sitting Living Room 20.6 m² 103 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 17 Stairs Other 24.9 m² 125 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
18 18 Study Other 8.2 m² 41 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m² 6% of 100%
Design
Allowance
Average
330.7 m² 1654 W Class 1 building 5.0 W/m² 5.0 W/m²
Main
LIGHTING
Menu CALCULATOR FOR USE
LIGHTING WITH J6.2(a) VOLUME
CALCULATOR FOR AND 3.12.5.5
ONEUSE WITHVOLUME TWO
J6.2(a) (First issued with
VOLUME ONE 2014)
NCCAND 3.12.5.5 VOLUME TWO (First issued with NCC 2014) Help screen
Building name/description Classification

3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern Class 1
Number of rows preferred in table below 18 (as currently displayed)
Adjustment Factor One Adjustment Factor Two (n/a for Class 1) OVERALL DESIGN PASSES
Design Lamp
Floor area Adjustment Factor Dimming Adjustment Factor Dimming Lamp or Illumination Power
Type of or Design Design
Description of the One Percentages Two Percentages Density System Share of
space Illumination Location Lumen Lumen
space % of Aggregate
Power Load Adjustment % % of full Depreciation Adjustment % % of full Depreciation System System
Allowance Used
Factors Area power Factor Factors Area power Factor Allowance Design
ID
IMPORTANT NOTICE AND DISCLAIMER IN RESPECT OF THE LIGHTING CALCULATOR if inputs
The Lighting Calculator has been developed by the ABCB to assist in developing a better understanding of lighting energy efficiency parameters. While the are valid
ABCB believes that the Lighting Calculator, if used correctly, will produce accurate results, the calculator is provided "as is" and without any representation or
warranty of any kind, including that it is fit for any purpose or of merchantable quality, or functions as intended or at all. Your use of the Lighting Calculator is
entirely at your own risk and the ABCB accepts no liability of any kind.
Copyright © 2014 - Australian Government, State and Territory Governments of Australia. All Rights Reserved


11.06 DOOR HARDWARE SPECIFICATION
11.08.17
Designer Doorware
14 Adams Court, Sunshine, Victoria, Australia
Phone 061 03 9300 8888, Fax 061 03 9310 1866
DD2017198.REV020817: 3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern

Consultant: Charlie Fazio - AH
Doors with hardware
All doors in this project
Door Area Description Rating Handing Dr type Fr. Type
Code Quantity Description

Product
GATE01 GROUND FLOOR GATE 01

PR-R10-PCC 1 Prisma set R10 PCC BKA
ML-2009-LH-PCC 1 Vestibule Double Cylinder Lock PCC BKA
C570-BKA 2 Oval Cylinder PCC BKA
KA 2 Keying alike per cylinder barrel
E14-BKA 2 Oval Cylinder escutcheon R10 rose PCC BKA
XFSH-FES10 1 FES10 Electric Strike
XJL-LOCKBOX-1-ZPGP 1 Lock box to suit ML2000/LW3572
*HINGES 1 SUPPLIED BY FABRICATOR
D-EX.01 GROUND FLOOR ENTRY
H100-FP-SSS 3 100x75 Fixed Pin Button Tip Hinge
ML-2114-RH-PCC 1 Combination Double Cylinder Lock PCC BKA
D-GF.01 GROUND FLOOR SITTING EXTERNAL
*DOOR DELETED 1 THIS DOOR HAS BEEN DELETED
D-GF.02 GROUND FLOOR GYM EXTERNAL
PR-PS54N-E-LH-PCC 1 Prisma half set ext 90mm oval cyl LH PCC BKA
PR-PS54N-I-RH-PCC 1 Prisma half set int 90mm oval cyl RH PCC BKA
NS-3114-LH-PCC 1 Comb' Double Cylinder Resd' Lock 30mm Back Set PCC BKA
SK11-PCC 1 Oval removable Snib with Key PCC BKA
KC-C4 1 Key cut to code C4
D-GF.03 GROUND FLOOR LAUNDRY EXTERNAL
ProMaster Hardware 7 Page 1 of 3 2 Aug 2017 14:59

Confidential Information Designer Doorware ©
Designer Doorware
Phone 061 03 9300 8888, Fax 061 03 9310 1866

Doors with hardware

Product
D-GF.04 GROUND FLOOR BUTLER EXTERNAL

W-GF.05 GROUND FLOOR DINING EXTERNAL
*DOOR FURNITURE 1 SUPPLIED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER
D-EX.02 GROUND FLOOR SITTING
TL60-VBK 1 Tubular Latch 60mm backset
D-EX.03 GROUND FLOOR BED 2
D-GF.07 GROUND FLOOR GYM
D-GF.06 GROUND FLOOR ENSUITE 2
FP51112-65-PCC 1 Rnd. Flush Priv. set incl. SP51 Bolt & 2801 edge PCC BKA
D-GF.05 GROUND FLOOR LAUNDRY
DS57-PCC 1 Quad magnetic door stop wall mounted PCC BKA
D-EX.04 GROUND FLOOR STUDY
D-EX.05 GROUND FLOOR POWDER 1
H300-LH-SSS 3 100x75 Left Hand Lift Off Hinge
E11-BKA 1 Turn snib on R10 rose PCC BKA
E12-BKA 1 Emergency Release on R10 rose PCC BKA
TP60-VBK 1 Tubular privacy bolt 60mm backset
D-EX.06 GROUND FLOOR BED 1
D-GF.08 GROUND FLOOR WIR
DS55-PCC 1 Quad Magnetic door stop floor mounted PCC BKA

Designer Doorware
Phone 061 03 9300 8888, Fax 061 03 9310 1866

Doors with hardware

Product
D-GF.09 GROUND FLOOR ENSUITE 1

D-FF.01 FIRST FLOOR RUMPUS
D-FF.02 FIRST FLOOR BED 4
D-FF.03 FIRST FLOOR BATH
D-FF.04 FIRST FLOOR LINEN
D-FF.05 FIRST FLOOR BED 3

11.07 MECHANICAL SERVICES SPECIFICATION
11.08.17
4 Violet Court, Wonga Park 3115
M: 0413 583 761
F: 03 9722 2154
E: cjsaircon@optusnet.com.au
Lic. No. 32341
ABN 14 107 746 476
Authorisation No: AU01840
QUOTATION No 1319
To: Venn Architects
Att: Cam Lane
From: Chris Tyers
Date: 26/5/17
RE PROJECT: 3 GLENDEARG GROVE MALVERN
Please find herewith our quotation and proposal for supply and installation of Air Conditioning and
Hydronic heating to the above-mentioned project.
Taking into consideration ceiling height, orientation of building and floor area, I have calculated your
total cooling and heating loads, with these figures in mind, I have selected equipment to meet the
required cooling and heating capacity and achieve an indoor design temperature of 21°C during winter
and 22°C during summer months.
QUOTATION DETAILS
AIR CONDITIONING
GROUND FLOOR
Supply and installation of 2xSamsung split ducted Air Conditioner to serve ground floor area, this
will come complete with 7-day programmable thermostat, Linear slot diffusers, ductwork,
refrigeration pipework, drain, control wiring, and commissioning of systems.
1ST FLOOR
Supply and installation of 4x Samsung bulkhead split ducted Air Conditioner to serve 1st floor area,
this will come complete with, 7-day programmable thermostat,Bar diffusers, ductwork , refrigeration
pipework, drain, control wiring, and commissioning of systems.
HYDRONIC HEATING
Supply and installation of Inslab heating to serve living/kitchen/laundry and butlers,9x Korado
compact panels to serve master/study/sitting/bed 2/entry/rumpus and beds 3&4 areas, this will come
complete with flow and return heating lines 7-day programmable thermostat, 2x Radiant 30kw gas
fired boiler, insulation to lines, control and lockshield valves, backflow prevention, insulation valves,
flow and return manifold, control wiring and commissioning of system
Page 1 of 2
4 Violet Court, Wonga Park 3115
M: 0413 583 761
F: 03 9722 2154
E: cjsaircon@optusnet.com.au
Lic. No. 32341
ABN 14 107 746 476
Authorisation No: AU01840
EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
QTY MAKE MODEL AREA PHASE BREAKER
1 RADIANT 30KW GROUND FLOOR 1 10AMP

1 RADIANT 30KW GROUND &1st FLOOR 1 10AMP
1 SAMSUNG ACO160 FRONT GROUND 1 40AMP
1 SAMSUNG ACO140 REAR GROUND 1 40AMP
2 SAMSUNG AMO35 RUMPUS
1 SAMSUNG AMO35 BED 3
1 SAMSUNG AMO35 BED 4
1 SAMSUNG AMO60X OUTDOOR 1 40AMP
EXCLUDED FROM QUOTE
 Power supply to equipment.
 Trimming for Linear slot diffusers.
 Gas and water within 1m of boiler.
Our quotation includes a full 5 year warranty on air conditioners and 1 year on boilers all new
equipment and 12 months service.
All works carried out on this project will be done so only by qualified tradespeople and in strict
accordance with all relevant building codes.
Yours Faithfully
Chris Tyers
Page 2 of 2
11.08 WINDOW FURNISHING SPECIFICATION
11.08.17
Proposal for
Venn Architects
Project Location
Presented by Jeremy Gomo

Curtain & Blind Proposal
Presented to: Cam Lane
Date: 1-7-17
Project: Private Residence
Location: 3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern
Document: Quotation
Version: V002
Estimator: Naomi Bartlett
Lovelight Blinds Contact: Jeremy Gomo
Phone: 1300 763 171
Fax: (03) 8676 1777
Mobile: 0417 327 793
Email: jeremy@lovelight.com.au
Web: www.lovelightblinds.com.au
Scope of Works .......................................................................................................................................... 3
Terms & Conditions ................................................................................................................................... 5
Letter of Acceptance .................................................................................................................................. 7
2
Scope of Works
Roller Blinds
Please note the following materials will be used:
• Blockout Fabric to be Elements – Colour TBC

• Sheer fabric to be Neotec – Colour TBC
• Base rails to be oval – Colour to match blind
• Motorised blinds to have Somfy Sonesse Silent RTS Motors – Operated via remote
• Manual blinds to have chrome control chains fitted with child safety devices
• Blinds over large windows to be linked to reduce the amount of motors required
• Does not include required electrical work
• Includes site measure and installation
All prices include materials and labour required for manufacturing and installation
WINDOW
FABRIC/TYPE LOCATION REF QTY
REF
NEOTEC MOTORISED STUDY W GF-10 1

ELEMENTS BLOCKOUT MANUAL BED 2 W GF-01 1
ELEMENTS BLOCKOUT MANUAL BED 3 W FF-05B 1
ELEMENTS BLOCKOUT MANUAL BED 3 W FF-05B 1
ELEMENTS BLOCKOUT MANUAL BED 3 W FF-05A 1
ELEMENTS BLOCKOUT MANUAL BED 4 W FF-03 1
SOMFY REMOTE 1
1 CHANNEL REMOTE 1
3
Curtains
Please note the following materials will be used:
• Fabric quoted at $95p/m at a roll width of 3m

• Heading to be Pencil pleat with 2.2 x fullness
• Curtains to be lined with a 3-Pass blockout lining - Ivory
• Tracks to be System 20 - White
• Includes site measure and installation
All prices include materials and labour required for manufacturing and installation
OPEN
TYPE LOCATION FABRIC / COLOUR QTY
DIRECTION
MANUAL BLOCKOUT CURTAIN BED 1 TBC C/O 1

MANUAL BLOCKOUT CURTAIN MEDIA TBC C/O 1
4
Terms & Conditions
1.0 VALIDITY 5.1 To the maximum extent permitted by law, Lovelight
1.1 This quotation is open for acceptance for a period of Blinds will only be liable to the Principal under this
30 days from the date of quotation. Lovelight Blinds agreement for the direct, proximate and foreseeable
may, at its option, extend this period by notification to loss of damage suffered from a breach or default of
the Customer. any of its obligations under this agreement. Lovelight
Blinds will in no case whatsoever (including, but not
limited to, negligence) be liable:
2.0 FORMATION OF AGREEMENT
5.1.1 For any loss or damage that is indirect, remote
2.1 No contractual obligations shall arise until Lovelight
or unforeseeable; or
Blinds has;
5.1.2 For any consequential loss or damage, being
2.1.1 Received from the Customer a signed Letter of
loss or damage that does not occur directly
Acceptance and the deposit as stated in the
and naturally in the ordinary course of events
quotation.
as a result of a breach of this contract,
2.1.2 Prior to the occurrence either of the events in including but not limited to, the loss of a
2.1.1, Lovelight Blinds may without incurring benefit or gain and the incurrence of any
any liability whatsoever revise or withdraw its expense; or
quotation.
5.1.3 For loss of production, loss of revenue, loss of
2.1.3 In the event the Customer provides Lovelight use, loss of contract, loss of goodwill or loss of
Blinds with a written Order, such an Order is profit arising from on in connection with the
subject to these terms and conditions. performance of this agreement.
3.0 ENTIRE UNDERSTANDING 6.0 EXCEPTED RISKS

3.1 The parties acknowledge that this quotation embodies 6.1 Lovelight Blinds shall not be liable for delay or failure
the entire understanding and agreement between the to fulfil any of its obligations resulting directly from the
parties as to the subject matter thereof. following events including but not limited to:
3.2 All previous negotiations, understandings, 6.1.1 Any negligent act or omission of the Customer,
representations, warranties, memoranda or its employees and or agents,
commitments in relation to, or in any way affecting, the
6.1.2 Any events occurring on or before the date of
subject matter of this Contract will be merged in and
completion for the works which are beyond the
superseded by this Contract and will be of no force or
reasonable control of Lovelight Blinds
effect whatever and no party shall be liable to any
including but not limited to industrial
other party in respect of those matters.
conditions, inclement weather, shortage of
3.3 No oral explanation or information provided by any suitable materials or parts
party to another shall affect the meaning or
6.1.3 Any condition on the site or its surroundings
interpretation of this Contract; or
affecting the ability to complete the works
without delay which Lovelight Blinds could not
4.0 PAYMENT TERMS have reasonably foreseen.
4.1 The Customer shall pay to Lovelight Blinds a 50% 6.1.4 Variations directed by the customer,
deposit stated in the letter of offer upon the signing or 6.1.5 Directions or delays by municipal, public or
acceptance of this proposal. statutory authorities.
4.2 Lovelight Blinds shall submit to the Customer a final
50% invoice prior to installation.
4.3 Installation will not go ahead without the final invoice
payment.
4.4 Should the Customer neglect or refuse to pay the
amount of any payment by the due date then Lovelight
Blinds may, at their option, with or without notice to the
Customer, suspend works or remove installed goods
until full payment is made.
4.6 Any claims which are not paid by the due date shall
accrue interest at a rate of 2.5% per month.
4.6 Any claims which are not paid by the due date shall
accrue interest at a rate of 2.5% per month.
5.0 LIABILITY
5
7.0 RISK & OWNERSHIP 10.0 VARIATIONS
7.1 Risk of loss, damage or destruction to the materials 10.1 Any variation to this proposal shall be notified to the
and equipment or any part thereof shall pass to the Lovelight Blinds project manager by the Customer or a
Customer on installation. representative of the Customer. The agreed value of
7.2 Ownership of materials and equipment shall remain variations shall be added to or deducted from the
with Lovelight Blinds, until payment of the full contract contract sum.
sum and any other monies due to Lovelight Blinds 10.2 Where no agreement is reached by the Customer and
under this agreement. Lovelight Blinds as to the value of the variations, then
7.3 The Customer authorises Lovelight Blinds to enter the the following shall apply:
Customer’s premises at any time to retake possession 10.2.1 Additions shall be charged at cost plus 35% to
of the materials and equipment and to dispose of the cover the cost of administration, overhead and
equipment to recover costs if the Customer breaches profit.
this Agreement. 10.2.2 Deletions shall be made at cost
10.3 Any changes to the plans, specifications, electrical
8.0 ACCESS layouts, project requirements must be forwarded to
8.1 Lovelight Blinds’ proposal is based on a continuous Lovelight Blinds in writing. Variation works associated
work program, unless otherwise stated. If the with project modifications will not proceed until such
Customer causes the Works to be delayed or delays time that a cost for the variation (of any) has been
are caused by any of the events stated above, then discussed and agreed on.
such extensions of time to the date for Practical 10.4 Any wiring or cabling diagrams supplied by Lovelight
Completion shall be granted Blinds to third party contractors must be accurately
8.2 Where Lovelight Blinds been granted an extension of followed. In the event a contractor is unable or
time under this clause, the Customer shall pay such unwilling to follow the supplied diagrams, Lovelight
extra costs as are necessarily incurred by Lovelight Blinds must be notified immediately. Should Lovelight
Blinds by reason of the delay. Blinds incur additional expenses associated with
incorrect cabling by third parties; these costs will be on
charged to the Customer.
9.0 WARRANTY
9.1 Lovelight Blinds provides warranty on workmanship,
11.0 SCHEDULE OF RATES
programming and commissioning only. Product
warranties are provided by the manufacturer or 11.1 During standard operational hours 0730-1830,
supplier of the product installed. Monday-Friday, Lovelight Blinds technical resources
are charged at $125 per hour.
9.2 It is the responsibility of the Customer to test the
functionality of the equipment at the time of 11.2 For after hours and weekend works, Lovelight Blinds
commissioning. In the course of testing, should the technical resources are charge at $175 per hour.
Customer discover any faults, the Customer shall 11.3 For all service call requests the initial call out fee is
immediately inform Lovelight Blinds so that $120.00 for the first hour and $50.00 for each
arrangements can be made to remedy the fault. subsequent half hour after that.
9.3 Within 60 days of practical completion, Lovelight 11.4 All spare parts required for service calls will be
Blinds shall replace faulty hardware at no cost to the charged accordingly depending on the part/s required.
Customer. After that period, any product related
warranty claims will incur labour costs associated with
12.0 GENERAL EXCLUSIONS
the service call and charged according to the Lovelight
Blinds Schedule of Rates 12.1 Unless specifically stated in the proposal document
and/or quotation, the following items are excluded from
9.4 Lovelight Blinds staff will only attend site for the
the Lovelight Blinds scope of works:
purpose of service calls or works outside the
specifications (including any warranty works) unless 12.1.1 Site allowances or site establishment
an official order is received by fax or email. 12.1.2 Trenching, digging, cable chasing, concrete
cutting or road boring
12.1.3 Supply authority fees and charges
12.1.4 Patching/painting
12.1.5 Supply of telephone or broadband lead in
cable
12.1.7 Supply of light fitting
6
Letter of Acceptance
Provided that everything in this proposal is clear, the next step is to approve the engagement of Lovelight Blinds to the project.
This is done by completing and signing the attached Letter of Acceptance and either:
Mailing to: Lovelight Blinds or email to: jeremy@lovelight.com.au

35-37 Mount Street
Prahran VIC 3181
Proposal Details
To:
Quote No:
Date:
Customer Details
Name:
Address:
Phone:
Email:
Contract Details
Contract Value: TBA
GST:
TOTAL:
50% Deposit (inc GST)
50% Prior to Install (inc GST)
Payment Options
By Electronic Transfer By Credit Card By Mail
Payments to Commonwealth Bank To pay via MasterCard or VISA Mail your cheque to
Name: Lovelight Blinds Phone the office on 1300 763 171 Lovelight Pty Ltd
BSB: 063 226 A 1.5% surcharge will apply 35-37 Mount Street
ACC: 1063 6112 Prahran VIC 3181
Offer
Lovelight Blinds offers to undertake the works and supply materials as specified in this proposal document for the above
stated price.
Acceptance
Print name:
Signature: Date:
7
11.09 POOL SPECIFICATION
11.08.17
OUR PROPOSAL FOR

Venn Architects
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Laguna Pools to provide a quote for your
proposed project.
Laguna Pools and Spas is a Melbourne based premium concrete swimming pool builder. With more than 600
pools in the ground and more than 30 years of experience, Laguna Pools is an innovative and highly skilled team.
Our dedicated staff bring a consistent and comprehensive approach to building high quality swimming pools.
We specialise in collaborating with builders, architects and designers, and have a first class project management
system that enables us to deliver a range of services and achieve superior quality.
INCLUDED IN THIS PROPOSAL
• Company Overview
- Introduction
- Laguna Pools Studio
- Value Proposition
• Our Services
- Key Products and Services
- Core Competencies
- Capabilities and areas of expertise
• Standard Inclusions
• Optional Extras
• Glossary of Terms
VISIT OUR STUDIO
We would be pleased to extend an invitation for you to visit us at our studio, where we can discuss your project in
detail and also meet with your builder, designer or architect if required. We can offer advice, answer any questions
and show you why choosing Laguna Pools will ensure your experience is a positive one.
We have installed a fully functional swimming pool and spa, where you can see how our industry best equipment
opearates and the advantages it provides.
Please feel free to call our office to arrange an appointment:
Unit 7, 25 Cook Road

Mitcham 3132
Victoria
P 9874 7964
E sales@lagunapools.com.au
W lagunapools.com.au
VALUE PROPOSITION
A swimming pool is a big investment and should be planned and executed

with precision, quality and streamlined processes.
We believe in ensuring this process is a positive one and is developed to be as easy as possible for the consumer.
We can customise your project to suit your needs, and integrate our 1st class project management with our
experienced and highly skilled construction team to deliver a premium product that meets all expectations. We will
keep you informed throughout the entire process, we will try to understand each client’s unique circumstance and
tailor a build process that leaves you at ease and confident that decision to use Laguna Pools is an inspired one.
KEY PRODUCTS AND SERVICES
Company Overview
• Premium concrete swimming pools and spas
• Integrated project management
• Recommended and trusted partners
• Industry leading equipment and suppliers
• Comprehensive after sales service
Core Competencies, Capabilities and Areas of Expertise

• First class relationship management
• Respected and trusted brand
• High quality personnel
• Standardised efficient construction process
• Deep client and market understanding
• Creative and innovative

OUR SERVICES
DESIGN
We recognise that your pool is a major investment. Most pool builders

neglect the importance of quality design. We are the exception and
together we make your ideas become reality
We are here to listen carefully to your needs, to collaborate with your

architect and builder where necessary, and to produce the design that
best suits your home and budget.
A visit to our showroom and design studio will show you a range of
design options and finishes, sourced from leading local and international
suppliers. In your interests, we refuse to compromise on quality.
POOLS
A Laguna Pool is one that is completed right, the first time, to last. There
are no shortcuts when achieving an exceptional pool and we take pride
in our work to ensure that your pool is at the forefront of design and
construction.
The construction team works with only the best materials and the latest
construction techniques to ensure that your pool is built to the highest
standard.
Laguna Pools meet best-practice sustainable standards, with minimum

maintenance. Our pools are for enjoyment, not hard work: self-cleaning,
self-testing, as maintenance-free as a pool can be.
Environmental sustainability is a priority.

We use the latest energy-efficient filtration
equipment and solar heating systems.
SWIMMING POOL INCLUSIONS
CLIENT INFORMATION
Date: 04/05/2017
Client: Venn Architects
Site Address: 3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern
Pool: As per Design. Waterline Depth 1.1m - 1.7m
INCLUDED IN PRICE
• Building permit • Astral P600 energy efficient pool pump
• Swimming pool designs and engineering • Astral CA 400 sand filter
• Builders home warranty insurance • Viron EQ 25 self testing and dosing PH & salt
chlorination system
• Excavation of pool hole including cartage and
tipping fees • Waterco Skimmer Box, 50mm Suction line &
2 solar suctions
• All steel fixing as per engineer’s requirements
• Automatic water leveler
• Concrete pool shell to Australian standards
• 2 pool returns/1 solar return
• Fully tiled Ceramic mosaic pool interior (tile PC
$70sqm) • Handover kit
• 7 Spa Electrics L.E.D Single color wet niche • All start up chemicals
light with transformers
• Your new Laguna Pool will be left crystal clear
• All pool pipe, fittings and equipment installed
and ready to swim in
within 10 meters
OPTIONS
HEATING OPTIONS Price
• Sunlover 100% coverage, digitally controlled solar heating system
• Viron Evo 450 gas heater
• Oasis C17 Electric Heat pump
CLEANING OPTIONS (choose one only)

• Maytronics s300i Robotic Cleaner
• Paramount Cyclean in floor cleaning
OPTIONS
NOT INCLUDED
• Any service connections (e.g. power for filtration /gas line / Backwash line)
• Coping pavers/landscaping
• Asset Protection (if required)
• Planning Permit (if required)
• Any piers, footings or screw piles
All prices include GST. Quote is subject to site inspection, council and engineering approval.
Valid 14 days
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
BUILDING PERMIT
A Building Permit is required to construct a pool in any residential property.
SWIMMING POOL DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING

Are the drawings done by an engineer that determines how the pool is constructed This also includes a compliance certificate
that is required by the relevant permit body
HOME WARRANTY INSURANCE (HWI)

Insurance required by law for all registered builders to carry out a project over the value over $12,000.
EXCAVATION
The digging of the pool hole.
CARTAGE
The transport of the spoil from the excavation to a disposal site.
TIPPING FEES
The fees charged by some organizations to enter their property and dispose of your spoil.
STEEL FIXING
The preparation of the steel reinforcing as per the engineer’s requirements, carried out before the concrete is sprayed
CONCRETE SHELL
32mpa concrete is pneumatically applied to the steel, once dry forms the concrete shell.
FULLY TILED
Mosaic tiles of your choice applied to the entire interior surface of the pool.
WET NICHE LIGHTS

An underwater light that is encased in the pool wall and does not protrude out past the walls surface.
SKIMMER BOX
A large suction point designed to skim surface water from pool, collect leaves and debris and send remaining water to filter.
POOL RETURNS
Eyelet points from which clean water returns from the filter system.
HAND OVER KIT (H/O)

Contains all relevant items to assist in the ongoing maintenance of your new Laguna Pool. Containing items such as Pool pole,
Vacuum Head, Vacuum Hose, Water testing kit, Pool Broom and a leaf scope.
STARTUP CHEMICALS
Start-up chemicals for your newly completed swimming pool to bring the water chemistry to within the desired parameters.
COPING PAVERS
The first row of paving around your pools perimeter.
BACKWASH LINE
The line that discharges dirty filter water. This must be plumbed from the filter into the sewer line by a licensed plumber.
STANDARD POOL FILTRATION AND SOLAR LOOP
6600
POND PR SS
POOL
3500
PR SS
EQUIPMENT
FILTER PUMP- Viron P600
FILTER- Astral CA 400
SOLAR PUMP- E series 230 SR
PIPE DIMENSION
PR: 50MM
SR: 40MM
SS: 40MM SP
SKIM: 50MM
DISTANCE TO POOL 3M
WATER RECALCULATION SYSTEM PLUMBED AS PER AS1926.3 :

FILTER FP
STANDARD SKIMMER BOX( WITH TOP ACCESS HOLE>150MM)
TO BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLAUSE5.2.
MAX 280 MM ACCESS HOLE; MIN 200 MM DEPTH; VENTED,
CHILD RESISTANT LID; TO BE INSTALLED A MIN 100MM FROM
POOL EDGE.
CLAUSE 6.1.3: OUTLETS TO BE A MIN 600MM APART; COVER TO
SPECIFY PIPE DIAMETER & FLOW RATE; TESTING AUTHORITY
REF NO. AND DATE PLUMBING PIPES TO BE INSTALLED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH COVER.
DESIGNED BY: CLIENT: VENN ARCHITECTS

LEGEND: LAGUNA POOLS
PR POOL RETURN FILTER FILTER DRAWN BY:
J KH TITLE: 3 GLENDEARG GROVE,
SR SOLAR RETURN
SP SOLAR PUMP MALVERN
CHECKED BY:
SS SOLAR SUCTION HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
FP FILTER PUMP APPROVED BY:
SPA
S SPA SUCTION
SPA
SKIMMER
JOB NUMBER:
J SPA JET
J SCALE1:50 SIZE: A3 SHEET OF REV
11.10 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
11.08.17
11.11 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE ITEMS INCLUDED IN FIXED PRICE

1 Repair Gutters to Main Roof and Veranda
2 Repair Slate to Veranda
3 Patch Soffit to Veranda
4 Replace Veranda Fretwork
5 Replace Veranda Slab, Tessellated tiles and Bluestone
6 Move Meter Box to Front Fence
7 New Doors (3)
8 New Bluestone Hearths
9 New Victorian Mantle
10 New Obscured Glass to Entrance
11 New Face Bricks - Study
MAINTENANCE ITEMS PROVISIONAL SUMS

12 Internal Floor Repair PC
13 Hard Plaster PC
11.08.17
11.12 TOWN PLANNING PERMIT
11.08.17
Level 1/178 Ferrars Street
South Melbourne VIC 3205
Dear Sir/Madam,
RE: PLANNING PERMIT NO.: 1327/16 - PC1

PROPERTY ADDRESS: 3 GLENDEARG GROVE, MALVERN VIC 3144
ENDORSEMENT OF PLANS / COMPLIANCE WITH PERMIT CONDITION(S) APPROVAL
I refer to the plan(s) lodged on the 07/06/2017 and wish to advise that Council has resolved that
the plans satisfy condition(s) 1 (a) on the above planning permit. The plans have been endorsed
and are enclosed.
Description Council date stamped

TP02C Context Page 07/06/2017
TP03C Existing Plans & Demolition Plan – Ground Floor 07/06/2017
TP04C Existing Conditions & Demolition Plan – 1st Floor 07/06/2017
TP05C Existing Elevations 07/06/2017
TP06C Design Response 07/06/2017
TP07C Proposed Ground Floor Plan 07/06/2017
TP08C Proposed First Floor Plan 07/06/2017
TP09C Proposed Roof Plan 07/06/2017
TP10C Proposed Elevations 07/06/2017
TP11C Indicative Images, Materials & Finishes 07/06/2017
WSUD Report 07/06/2017
STORM Rating Report 07/06/2017
Please note that any changes or amendments made to the plans that have not been
identified or specifically applied for have not been approved.
You may also need approval from Council's Building, Arboriculture or Health Units. These
approvals must be sought before acting on this Planning Permit. If you have any queries, please
contact the Building Unit on 8290 318, the Arboriculture Unit on 8290 2064 and the Health Unit on
8290 3393.
Should you have any queries, please contact William Rief during business hours on 8290-3592 or
wrief@stonnington.vic.gov.au.
Yours faithfully,
PHILLIP GUL
Statutory Planning Coordinator
PROXIMITY TO NOTABLE LANDMARKS
ISA
B E LLA
ST R EE
T
E ROAD
WATTLETRE
DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS REV. DATE. PROJECT SCALE DRAWN

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.
DRAWING DRAWING NUMBER
DRAWINGS ARE FOR DESIGN &
PLANNING PURPOSES ONLY.
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION.

Level 1, 178 Ferrars Street South Melbourne Victoria 3205 T +61 3 9682 4222 F +61 3 9682 4233 E info@vennarchitects.com W www.vennarchitects.com
ISA
BEL
L A S TRE
ET
E ROAD
WATTLETRE

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

ISA
BEL
L A S TRE
ET
E ROAD
WATTLETRE

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

ISA
BEL
L A S TRE
ET
E ROAD
WATTLETRE

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

PROXIMITY TO NOTABLE LANDMARKS
ISA
B E LLA
ST R EE
T
E ROAD
WATTLETRE

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

MATERIALS & FINISHES

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

ISA
BEL
L A S TRE
ET
E ROAD
WATTLETRE

DATE JOB No.
MEASUREMENTS.

Keith Long & Associates Pty. Ltd.
CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERS
Suite 17, No. 2 Bromham Place, Richmond Victoria 3121 Date 08/02/2017
T 03 9429 5286 F 03 9429 6929 ABN 69 465 037 524
E mail@keithlongandassociates.com.au ACN 006 372 327
1.0 RESPONSE TO POLICY OBJECTIVES (22.18-2)

Objectives
– To achieve beat practice water quality performance objectives.
– Promote the use of water sensitive urban design, including stormwater reuse.
– To mitigate the detrimental effect of development on downstream waterways.
– To minimise peak stormwater flows and stormwater pollutants.
Response
– Water Quality Treatment measures:
Raingardens are proposed to treat stormwater quality before it enters Council’s drain.
Please refer to figure below for a typical detail of the propose above-ground
raingarden.
1639_KLAREPORT_REVISEDDOC.DOC 1 of 4
T 03 9429 5286 F 03 9429 6929 ABN 69 465 037 524
2.0 STORMWATER TREATMENT

– Stormwater quality is a significant issue in urban areas as the high levels of
impervious surfaces transport stormwater quickly into the drainage system along with
sediment and pollutants from the urban environment.
– Strategies for improving stormwater include reducing volume entering the stormwater
system, either by on-site detention and / or reuse, or by maximising on-site
penetration, and providing treatment measures so that the quality of any stormwater
leaving the site is improved.
– This development achieves a score of 101% using Melbourne Water’s STORM tool.
For the full STORM Rating Report please refer to the appendix.
T 03 9429 5286 F 03 9429 6929 ABN 69 465 037 524
Actions to manage stormwater

Actions Potential Impact Strategies and Innovations
Water Sensitive Urban Increased infiltration 3 x 0.5 sqm of 100 mm of

Design means that groundwater below ground raingardens
flows are improved. to treat 90 sqm of the
Treatment via raingardens lower North roofs.
means quality of 1.5 x 2 sqm of 100 mm
stormwater entering the above ground raingardens
mains system is improved. to treat 185 sqm of the
upper and lower South
roofs.
3.0 SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN

– The proposed development consists mainly of internal alterations to an existing
residence and an extension to the rear of the property.
– Existing stormwater infrastructure is to be carefully protected and its function is to be
maintained during construction.
– Hay bales or a similar method is proposed to be used during construction to protect
building materials / spoils discharging into Council’s assets.
4.0 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

– Actions for ongoing building performance.
Actions Potential Impact Strategies and Innovations
Building fine-tuning Ensures the building Building WSUD services

WSUD services operate as will be reviewed quarterly
designed, throughout during first 12 months of
various climatic conditions occupation with the aim of
and with realistic increasing operational
occupancy profiles. efficiency.
T 03 9429 5286 F 03 9429 6929 ABN 69 465 037 524
Appendix A
STORM Rating Report
STORM Rating Report
TransactionID: 434698
Municipality: STONNINGTON
Rainfall Station: STONNINGTON
Address: 3 glendearg grove
malvern
VIC 3144
Assessor: cameron lane
Development Type: Residential - Extension
Allotment Site (m2): 645.00
STORM Rating %: 101
Description Impervious Area Treatment Type Treatment Occupants / Treatment % Tank Water
(m2) Area/Volume Number Of Supply
(m2 or L) Bedrooms Reliability (%)
Lower Roofs North 90.00 Raingarden 100mm 1.50 0 124.80 0.00
All Roofs South 185.00 Raingarden 100mm 3.00 0 124.05 0.00
Upper Roof North 65.00 None 0.00 0 0.00 0.00
Date Generated: 16-Feb-2017 Program Version: 1.0.0

11.13 INDICATIVE IMAGES
11.08.17

1639 CD Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1639 CD Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPECIFICATION

Alterations and Additions

to an existing dwelling on a site located at

3 Glendearg Grove, Malvern

Venn Architects Pty Ltd

Telephone: 03 9682 4222

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd

A1.2. SCOPE OF WORKS

 Bulk excavation to part of the site where new pool is located.

A1.3. LOCATION & SITE

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-1 of 23

Architect: Venn Architects Pty Ltd

Approved Approved by the Architect. However approval of drawings, samples,

Where used in conjunction with the Architect’s response to shop

AS The current edition of any standard, code or other document published

BCA The current edition of the Building Code of Australia / National

B.S British Standard or Code published by the British Standards Institute.

Builder The Contractor as herein defined

Completed Completed to the satisfaction of the Architect.

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-2 of 23

All contract documents being in full compliance with the Domestic

Contract documents All documents described in Clause A2.1 of this Specification.

Documents The Contract documents as described in Clause A.2.1 of this

Directed Directed by the Architect

Engineer Structural Keith Long

Indicated Indicated on the drawings or properly to be inferred from them.

The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate protection against

Inspected Inspected by the Architect.

Owner Nikki Meltzer

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-3 of 23

Provide Provide and fix.

Retention Cash Retention, retained at 10% of last claim up to a total of 5% of

Security Cash Retention, retained at 10% of last claim up to a total of 5% of

Clause C 3 relating to Bank Guarantees shall not apply to this Contract

Selected Selected from a range and/or selected from a stack of materials to

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-4 of 23

A2. THE AGREEMENT

A2.1. NATURE OF CONTRACT

The Contract documents will comprise the following:

1. The ABIC SW-2008 Agreement.

A2.3. THE CONTRACT SCHEDULES

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-5 of 23

A2.4. DIVISIONS OF THE SPECIFICATION

A2.5. CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY

A3.1. INTENT OF DOCUMENTS

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-6 of 23

A3.3. SECURITY - CASH RETENTION

A3.4. SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS

A3.4.1. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS

A3.4.2. STRUCTURAL & CIVIL ENGINEERS DRAWINGS

A3.4.3. LAND SURVEYORS DRAWINGS

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-7 of 23

A4. MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP

 A written request for the substitution.

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-8 of 23

A4.5. MAKING GOOD

A4.6. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-9 of 23

6 Variation in the size of items built into wall openings +0-10 mm

7 Variations in cross sectional dimensions of concrete -0+10 mm.

A4.7. COMPONENT DESIGN

A4.8. CONSTRUCTION LOADS

AUGUST 2017 Venn Architects Pty Ltd Page A-10 of 23